Edirol R-1 El manual del propietario

Marca: Edirol

Modelo: R-1

Categoría: Equipo de grabación

Tipo: El manual del propietario

*03892123- 03*

Owner’s Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Mode d’emploi

Manuale d’uso

Manual del usuario

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled:

“USING THE UNIT SAFELY” and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 2;

p. 5). These sections provide important information concerning

the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel

assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature

provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in

its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a

convenient reference.

any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.

As of December 10, 2005 (EDIROL-1)

Information When you need repair service, call your nearest EDIROL/Roland Service Center or authorized

EDIROL/Roland distributor in your country as shown below.

EUROPE

EDIROL (Europe) Ltd.

Studio 3.4 114 Power Road

London W4 5PY

U. K.

TEL: +44 (0)20 8747 5949

FAX:+44 (0)20 8747 5948

http://www.edirol.com/europe

Deutschland

TEL: 0700 33 47 65 20

France

TEL: 0810 000 371

Italia

TEL: 02 93778329

CANADA

Roland Canada Music Ltd.

(Head Office)

5480 Parkwood Way Richmond

B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA

TEL: (604) 270 6626

Roland Canada Music Ltd.

(Toronto Office)

170 Admiral Boulevard

Mississauga On L5T 2N6

CANADA

TEL: (905) 362 9707

U. S. A.

Roland Corporation U.S.

5100 S. Eastern Avenue

Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,

U. S. A.

TEL: (323) 890 3700

EGYPT

Al Fanny Trading Office

9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany

Street,

ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,

Cairo 11341, EGYPT

TEL: 20-2-417-1828

REUNION

Maison FO - YAM Marcel

25 Rue Jules Hermann,

Chaudron - BP79 97 491

Ste Clotilde Cedex,

REUNION ISLAND

TEL: (0262) 218-429

SOUTH AFRICA

Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.

Royal Cape Park, Unit 24

Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800

Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA

TEL: (021) 799 4900

CHINA

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co.,Ltd.

5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road

Shanghai 200090, CHINA

TEL: (021) 5580-0800

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co.,Ltd.

(BEIJING OFFICE)

10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili

Chaoyang District Beijing

100011 CHINA

TEL: (010) 6426-5050

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co.,Ltd.

(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)

2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie

Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,

Guangzhou 510600, CHINA

TEL: (020) 8736-0428

HONG KONG

Parsons Music Ltd.

8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39

Chatham Road South, T.S.T,

Kowloon, HONG KONG

TEL: 2333 1863

INDIA

Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.

409, Nirman Kendra

Mahalaxmi Flats Compound

Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,

Mumbai-400011, INDIA

TEL: (022) 2493 9051

INDONESIA

PT Citra IntiRama

J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150

Jakarta Pusat

INDONESIA

TEL: (021) 6324170

KOREA

Cosmos Corporation

1461-9, Seocho-Dong,

Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA

TEL: (02) 3486-8855

MALAYSIA/

SINGAPORE

Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.

45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,

Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling

Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA

TEL: (03) 7805-3263

PHILIPPINES

G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue

Makati, Metro Manila 1200,

PHILIPPINES

TEL: (02) 899 9801

TAIWAN

ROLAND TAIWAN

ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.

Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung

Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,

TAIWAN, R.O.C.

TEL: (02) 2561 3339

THAILAND

Theera Music Co. , Ltd.

330 Soi Verng NakornKasem,

New Road, Sumpantawongse,

Bangkok 10100, THAILAND

TEL: (02) 224-8821

VIETNAM

SAIGON MUSIC

DISTRIBUTOR

(TAN DINH MUSIC)

138 Tran Quang Khai Street

Dist. 1, Ho Chi Minh City

VIETNAM

TEL: (08) 848-4068

AUSTRALIA/

NEW ZEALAND

Roland Corporation

Australia Pty.,Ltd.

38 Campbell Avenue

Dee Why West. NSW 2099

AUSTRALIA

For Australia

Tel: (02) 9982 8266

For New Zealand

Tel: (09) 3098 715

ARGENTINA

Instrumentos Musicales S.A.

Av.Santa Fe 2055

(1123) Buenos Aires

ARGENTINA

TEL: (011) 4508-2700

BARBADOS

A&B Music Supplies LTD

12 Webster Industrial Park

Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados

TEL: (246)430-1100

BRAZIL

Roland Brasil Ltda.

Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B

Parque Industrial San Jose

Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL

TEL: (011) 4615 5666

CHILE

Comercial Fancy II S.A.

Rut.: 96.919.420-1

Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor

Santiago - Centro, CHILE

TEL: (02) 688-9540

COLOMBIA

Centro Musical Ltda.

Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9

Medellin, Colombia

TEL: (574)3812529

CURACAO

Zeelandia Music Center Inc.

Orionweg 30

Curacao, Netherland Antilles

TEL:(305)5926866

DOMINICAN REPUBLIC

Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez

Calle Proyecto Central No.3

Ens.La Esperilla

Santo Domingo,

Dominican Republic

TEL:(809) 683 0305

ECUADOR

Mas Musika

Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma

Guayaquil - Ecuador

TEL:(593-4)2302364

GUATEMALA

Casa Instrumental

Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11

Ciudad de Guatemala

Guatemala

TEL:(502) 599-2888

HONDURAS

Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.

BO.Paz Barahona

3 Ave.11 Calle S.O

San Pedro Sula, Honduras

TEL: (504) 553-2029

MARTINIQUE

Musique & Son

Z.I.Les Mangle

97232 Le Lamantin

Martinique F.W.I.

TEL: 596 596 426860

Gigamusic SARL

10 Rte De La Folie

97200 Fort De France

Martinique F.W.I.

TEL: 596 596 715222

MEXICO

Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.

Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar

de los Padres 01780 Mexico

D.F. MEXICO

TEL: (55) 5668-6699

NICARAGUA

Bansbach Instrumentos

Musicales Nicaragua

Altamira D'Este Calle Principal

de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida

1 Cuadra al Lago.#503

Managua, Nicaragua

TEL: (505)277-2557

IRELAND

Roland Ireland

G2 Calmount Park, Calmount

Avenue, Dublin 12

Republic of IRELAND

TEL: (01) 4294444

ITALY

Roland Italy S. p. A.

Viale delle Industrie 8,

20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY

TEL: (02) 937-78300

NORWAY

Roland Scandinavia Avd.

Kontor Norge

Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95

Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo

NORWAY

TEL: 2273 0074

POLAND

MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.

UL. Gibraltarska 4.

PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND

TEL: (022) 679 44 19

PORTUGAL

Roland Iberia, S.L.

Portugal Office

Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto

4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL

TEL: 22 608 00 60

ROMANIA

FBS LINES

Piata Libertatii 1,

535500 Gheorgheni,

ROMANIA

TEL: (266) 364 609

RUSSIA

MuTek

Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6

117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA

TEL: (095) 981-4967

SPAIN

Roland Iberia, S.L.

Paseo García Faria, 33-35

08005 Barcelona SPAIN

TEL: 93 493 91 00

SWEDEN

Roland Scandinavia A/S

SWEDISH SALES OFFICE

Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.

S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN

TEL: (0)8 702 00 20

SWITZERLAND

Roland (Switzerland) AG

Landstrasse 5, Postfach,

CH-4452 Itingen,

SWITZERLAND

TEL: (061) 927-8383

UKRAINE

TIC-TAC

Mira Str. 19/108

P.O. Box 180

295400 Munkachevo,

UKRAINE

TEL: (03131) 414-40

UNITED KINGDOM

Roland (U.K.) Ltd.

Atlantic Close, Swansea

Enterprise Park, SWANSEA

SA7 9FJ,

UNITED KINGDOM

TEL: (01792) 702701

BAHRAIN

Moon Stores

No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,

P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,

State of BAHRAIN

TEL: 17 211 005

PERU

Audionet

Distribuciones Musicales SAC

Juan Fanning 530

Miraflores

Lima - Peru

TEL: (511) 4461388

TRINIDAD

AMR Ltd

Ground Floor

Maritime Plaza

Barataria Trinidad W.I.

TEL: (868)638 6385

URUGUAY

Todo Musica S.A.

Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771

C.P.: 11.800

Montevideo, URUGUAY

TEL: (02) 924-2335

VENEZUELA

Instrumentos Musicales

Allegro,C.A.

Av.las industrias edf.Guitar

import

#7 zona Industrial de Turumo

Caracas, Venezuela

TEL: (212) 244-1122

AUSTRIA

Roland Elektronische

Musikinstrumente HmbH.

Austrian Office

Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,

A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA

TEL: (0512) 26 44 260

BELGIUM/FRANCE/

HOLLAND/

LUXEMBOURG

Roland Central Europe N.V.

Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel

(Westerlo) BELGIUM

TEL: (014) 575811

CZECH REP.

K-AUDIO

Kardasovska 626.

CZ-198 00 Praha 9,

CZECH REP.

TEL: (2) 666 10529

DENMARK

Roland Scandinavia A/S

Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,

DK-2100 Copenhagen

DENMARK

TEL: 3916 6200

FINLAND

Roland Scandinavia As, Filial

Finland

Elannontie 5

FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND

TEL: (0)9 68 24 020

GERMANY

Roland Elektronische

Musikinstrumente HmbH.

Oststrasse 96, 22844

Norderstedt, GERMANY

TEL: (040) 52 60090

GREECE

STOLLAS S.A.

Music Sound Light

155, New National Road

Patras 26442, GREECE

TEL: 2610 435400

HUNGARY

Roland East Europe Ltd.

Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83

H-2046 Torokbalint,

HUNGARY

TEL: (23) 511011

CYPRUS

Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.

17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,

CYPRUS

TEL: (022) 66-9426

IRAN

MOCO INC.

No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,

Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad

Tehran, IRAN

TEL: (021) 285-4169

ISRAEL

Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons

Ltd.

8 Retzif Ha’aliya Hashnya St.

Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL

TEL: (03) 6823666

JORDAN

MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.

FREDDY FOR MUSIC

P. O. Box 922846

Amman 11192 JORDAN

TEL: (06) 5692696

KUWAIT

EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI

& SONS CO.

Abdullah Salem Street,

Safat, KUWAIT

TEL: 243-6399

LEBANON

Chahine S.A.L.

Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine

Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-

5857

Beirut, LEBANON

TEL: (01) 20-1441

OMAN

TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.

Malatan House No.1

Al Noor Street, Ruwi

SULTANATE OF OMAN

TEL: 2478 3443

QATAR

Badie Studio & Stores

P.O. Box 62,

Doha, QATAR

TEL: 423554

SAUDI ARABIA

aDawliah Universal

Electronics APL

Corniche Road, Aldossary

Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,

SAUDI ARABIA

P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952

SAUDI ARABIA

TEL: (03) 898 2081

SYRIA

Technical Light & Sound

Center

Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.

Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,

Damascus, SYRIA

TEL: (011) 223-5384

TURKEY

ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.

Galip Dede Cad. No.37

Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY

TEL: (0212) 249 85 10

U.A.E.

Zak Electronics & Musical

Instruments Co. L.L.C.

Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,

No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,

U.A.E.

TEL: (04) 3360715

ASIA

AFRICA

AUSTRALIA/

NEW ZEALAND

EUROPE

CENTRAL/LATIN

AMERICA

MIDDLE EAST

NORTH AMERICA

03892123 ’05-11-4N

Owner’s Manual

001

• Before using this unit, make sure to

read the instructions below, and the

Owner’s Manual.

..................................................................................................

002c

• Do not open (or modify in any way)

the unit or its AC adaptor.

..................................................................................................

003

• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or

replace parts within it (except when

this manual provides specific instruc-

tions directing you to do so). Refer all

servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland

Service Center, or an authorized Roland

distributor, as listed on the “Information”

page.

..................................................................................................

004

• Never use or store the unit in places

that are:

• Subject to temperature extremes

(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed

vehicle, near a heating duct, on top

of heat-generating equipment); or are

• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet

floors); or are

• Humid; or are

• Exposed to rain; or are

• Dusty; or are

• Subject to high levels of vibration.

..................................................................................................

007

• Make sure you always have the unit

placed so it is level and sure to remain

stable. Never place it on stands that

could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.

..................................................................................................

008c

• Be sure to use only the AC adaptor

supplied with the unit. Also, make

sure the line voltage at the installation

matches the input voltage specified on the AC

adaptor’s body. Other AC adaptors may use a

different polarity, or be designed for a

different voltage, so their use could result in

damage, malfunction, or electric shock.

..................................................................................................

008e

• Use only the attached power-supply

cord. Also, the supplied power cord

must not be used with any other

device.

..................................................................................................

009

• Do not excessively twist or bend the

power cord, nor place heavy objects

on it. Doing so can damage the cord,

producing severed elements and short

circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock

hazards!

..................................................................................................

Used for instructions intended to alert

the user to the risk of injury or material

damage should the unit be used

improperly.

* Material damage refers to damage or

other adverse effects caused with

respect to the home and all its

furnishings, as well to domestic

animals or pets.

Used for instructions intended to alert

the user to the risk of death or severe

injury should the unit be used

improperly.

The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be

carried out. The specific thing that must be done is

indicated by the design contained within the circle. In

the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-

cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

The symbol alerts the user to important instructions

or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is

determined by the design contained within the

triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for

general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.

The symbol alerts the user to items that must never

be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that

must not be done is indicated by the design contained

within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it

means that the unit must never be disassembled.

IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.

BLUE:

BROWN:

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying

the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.

NEUTRAL

LIVE

For the U.K.

This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.

For EU Countries

For Canada

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

NOTICE

AVIS

For the USA

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee

that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.

This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

For the USA

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Compliance Information Statement

Model Name :

Type of Equipment :

Responsible Party :

Address :

Telephone :

R-1

WAVE/MP3 RECORDER

Roland Corporation U.S.

5100 S. Eastern Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938

(323) 890 3700

010

• This unit, either alone or in combi-

nation with an amplifier and

headphones or speakers, may be

capable of producing sound levels that could

cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate

for a long period of time at a high volume

level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If

you experience any hearing loss or ringing in

the ears, you should immediately stop using

the unit, and consult an audiologist.

..................................................................................................

011

• Do not allow any objects (e.g.,

flammable material, coins, pins); or

liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks,

etc.) to penetrate the unit.

..................................................................................................

012b

• Immediately turn the power off,

remove the AC adaptor from the

outlet, and request servicing by your retailer,

the nearest Roland Service Center, or an

authorized Edirol/Roland distributor, as

listed on the “Information” page when:

• The AC adaptor, the power-supply cord,

or the plug has been damaged; or

• If smoke or unusual odor occurs

• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been

spilled onto the unit; or

• The unit has been exposed to rain (or

otherwise has become wet); or

• The unit does not appear to operate

normally or exhibits a marked change in

performance.

..................................................................................................

013

• In households with small children, an

adult should provide supervision

until the child is capable of following all the

rules essential for the safe operation of the

unit.

..................................................................................................

014

• Protect the unit from strong impact.

(Do not drop it!)

..................................................................................................

015

• Do not force the unit’s power-supply

cord to share an outlet with an unrea-

sonable number of other devices. Be

especially careful when using extension

cords—the total power used by all devices

you have connected to the extension cord’s

outlet must never exceed the power rating

(watts/amperes) for the extension cord.

Excessive loads can cause the insulation on

the cord to heat up and eventually melt

through.

..................................................................................................

016

• Before using the unit in a foreign

country, consult with your retailer, the

nearest Roland Service Center, or an autho-

rized Edirol/Roland distributor, as listed on

the “Information” page.

..................................................................................................

019

• Batteries must never be recharged,

heated, taken apart, or thrown into fire

or water.

..................................................................................................

R-1_egfis1.book 3 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

101b

• The unit and the AC adaptor should

be located so their location or position

does not interfere with their proper venti-

lation.

..................................................................................................

102c

• Always grasp only the plug on the AC

adaptor cord when plugging into, or

unplugging from, an outlet or this

unit.

..................................................................................................

103b

• At regular intervals, you should

unplug the AC adaptor and clean it by

using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and

other accumulations away from its prongs.

Also, disconnect the power plug from the

power outlet whenever the unit is to remain

unused for an extended period of time. Any

accumulation of dust between the power plug

and the power outlet can result in poor

insulation and lead to fire.

..................................................................................................

104

• Try to prevent cords and cables from

becoming entangled. Also, all cords

and cables should be placed so they are out of

the reach of children.

..................................................................................................

106

• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy

objects on the unit.

..................................................................................................

107c

• Never handle the AC adaptor or its

plugs with wet hands when plugging

into, or unplugging from, an outlet or

this unit.

..................................................................................................

108b

• Before moving the unit, disconnect the

AC adaptor and all cords coming from

external devices.

..................................................................................................

109b

• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the

power and unplug the AC adaptor

from the outlet (P. 19).

..................................................................................................

110b

• Whenever you suspect the possibility

of lightning in your area, disconnect

the AC adaptor from the outlet.

..................................................................................................

111: Selection

• If used improperly, batteries may

explode or leak and cause damage or

injury. In the interest of safety, please

read and observe the following

precautions (P. 20).

• Carefully follow the installation

instructions for batteries, and make sure

you observe the correct polarity.

• Avoid using new batteries together with

used ones. In addition, avoid mixing

different types of batteries.

• Remove the batteries whenever the unit is

to remain unused for an extended period

of time.

• If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of

cloth or paper towel to wipe all remnants

of the discharge from the battery

compartment. Then install new batteries.

To avoid inflammation of the skin, make

sure that none of the battery discharge gets

onto your hands or skin. Exercise the

utmost caution so that none of the

discharge gets near your eyes. Immedi-

ately rinse the affected area with running

water if any of the discharge has entered

the eyes.

• Never keep batteries together with metallic

objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces,

hairpins, etc.

..................................................................................................

112

• Used batteries must be disposed of in

compliance with whatever regula-

tions for their safe disposal that may

be observed in the region in which you live.

..................................................................................................

R-1_egfis1.book 4 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

IMPORTANTS NOTES

291a

In addition to the items listed under “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on page 5, please read and

observe the following:

Power Supply

301

• Do not connect this unit to same electrical

outlet that is being used by an electrical

appliance that is controlled by an inverter

(such as a refrigerator, washing machine,

microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that

contains a motor. Depending on the way in

which the electrical appliance is used, power

supply noise may cause this unit to

malfunction or may produce audible noise. If

it is not practical to use a separate electrical

outlet, connect a power supply noise filter

between this unit and the electrical outlet.

302

• The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat

after long hours of consecutive use. This is

normal, and is not a cause for concern.

303a

• Since this device draws a relatively large

amount of electrical current, we recommend

that you use it with the AC adaptor unless AC

power is unavailable. Should you prefer to

use batteries, please use the alkaline type.

304a

• When installing or replacing batteries, always

turn off the power on this unit and disconnect

any other devices you may have connected.

This way, you can prevent malfunction and/

or damage to speakers or other devices.

307

• Before connecting this unit to other devices,

turn off the power to all units. This will help

prevent malfunctions and/or damage to

speakers or other devices.

Placement

351

• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other

equipment containing large power trans-

formers) may induce hum. To alleviate the

problem, change the orientation of this unit;

or move it farther away from the source of

interference.

352a

• This device may interfere with radio and

television reception. Do not use this device in

the vicinity of such receivers.

352b

• Noise may be produced if wireless communi-

cations devices, such as cell phones, are

operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise

could occur when receiving or initiating a call,

or while conversing. Should you experience

such problems, you should relocate such

wireless devices so they are at a greater

distance from this unit, or switch them off.

354a

• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight,

place it near devices that radiate heat, leave it

inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise

subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive

heat can deform or discolor the unit.

355b

• When moved from one location to another

where the temperature and/or humidity is

very different, water droplets (condensation)

may form inside the unit. Damage or

malfunction may result if you attempt to use

the unit in this condition. Therefore, before

using the unit, you must allow it to stand for

several hours, until the condensation has

completely evaporated.

Maintenance

401a

• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a

soft, dry cloth or one that has been slightly

dampened with water. To remove stubborn

dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild,

non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure

to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry

cloth.

402

• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or

solvents of any kind, to avoid the possibility

of discoloration and/or deformation.

Repairs and Data

452

• Please be aware that all data contained in the

unit’s memory may be lost when the unit is

sent for repairs. Important data should always

be written down on paper (when possible).

During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the

loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as

when circuitry related to memory itself is out

of order), we regret that it may not be possible

to restore the data, and Roland assumes no

liability concerning such loss of data.

R-1_egfis1.book 5 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

IMPORTANTS NOTES

Additional Precautions

551

• Please be aware that the contents of memory

can be irretrievably lost as a result of a

malfunction, or the improper operation of the

unit. To protect yourself against the risk of

loosing important data, we recommend that

you periodically save a backup copy of

important data you have stored in the unit’s

memory on a hard disk.

552

• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore

the contents of data that was stored on a

memory card once it has been lost. Roland

Corporation assumes no liability concerning

such loss of data.

553

• Use a reasonable amount of care when using

the unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls;

and when using its jacks and connectors.

Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.

554

• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the

display.

555

• A small amount of noise may be heard from

the display during normal operation.

556

• When connecting / disconnecting all cables,

grasp the connector itself—never pull on the

cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts,

or damage to the cable’s internal elements.

558a

• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to

keep the unit’s volume at reasonable levels.

You may prefer to use headphones, so you do

not need to be concerned about those around

you (especially when it is late at night).

559a

• When you need to transport the unit, package

it in the box (including padding) that it came

in, if possible. Otherwise, you will need to use

equivalent packaging materials.

562

• Use a cable from Roland to make the

connection. If using some other make of

connection cable, please note the following

precautions.

• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not

use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting

to this unit. The use of such cables can cause the

sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to

hear. For information on cable specifications,

contact the manufacturer of the cable.

• Depending on the conditions in which you

use the R-1, you may notice a slight sensation

of discomfort or roughness when touching the

R-1 itself or a metal part of a connected mic.

This is due to an extremely small electrical

charge which poses absolutely no danger to

the human body. If this bothers you, you can

use the R-1 on battery power as desired.

Before Using Cards

Using DATA Cards

704

• Carefully insert the DATA card all the way

in—until it is firmly in place.

fig.M512-Insert

705

• Never touch the terminals of the DATA card.

Also, avoid getting the terminals dirty.

707

• This unit’s memory card slot accepts

CompactFlash memory cards. Microdrive

storage media are not compatible.

708

• CompactFlash cards are constructed using

precision components; handle the cards

carefully, paying particular note to the

following.

• To prevent damage to the cards from static

electricity, be sure to discharge any static

electricity from your own body before

handling the cards.

• Do not touch or allow metal to come into

contact with the contact portion of the

cards.

• Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to

strong shock or vibration.

• Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in

closed vehicles, or other such locations

(storage temperature: -25 to 85˚ C).

• Do not allow cards to become wet.

• Do not disassemble or modify the cards.

CompactFlash™

Reverse Side

R-1_egfis1.book 6 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

IMPORTANTS NOTES

851

• Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale,

lending, public performance, broadcasting, or

the like, in whole or in part, of a work

(musical composition, video, broadcast, public

performance, or the like) whose copyright is

held by a third party is prohibited by law.

852b

• When transmitting audio signals to an

external device via a digital connection, this

device is able to transmit data without being

subjected to certain restrictions of the Serial

Copy Management System (SCMS). This is

because the unit is intended solely for musical

production, and is designed not to be subject

to restrictions as long as it is used to record

works (such as your own compositions) that

do not infringe on the copyrights of others.

(SCMS is a feature that prohibits second-

generation and later copying through a digital

connection. It is built into MD recorders and

other consumer digital-audio equipment as a

853

• Do not use this unit for purposes that could

infringe on a copyright held by a third party.

We assume no responsibility whatsoever with

regard to any infringements of third-party

copyrights arising through your use of this

unit.

204

* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

206j

* Windows

is known officially as: “Microsoft

Windows

operating system.”

209

* Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

234

* CompactFlash and are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation and licensed by Compact-

Flash association.

235

* Roland Corporation is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash

™

and CF logo ( )

trademarks.

add

* PortalPlayer and the PortalPlayer logo are trademarks owned by PortalPlay-

er, Inc.

add

* MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS

and Thomson multimedia.

R-1_egfis1.book 7 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Checking the included items

The R-1 comes with the following items. Immediately after opening the package, please

check that you have all of these items. If any items are missing, please contact the dealer

where you purchased the R-1.

■

R-1

fig.r-1

■

AC adaptor

This AC adaptor is designed specifically for

the R-1. Do not attempt to use any other

adaptor with the R-1.

“Connecting the AC adaptor and

turning on the power”

(p. 19)

■

USB cable

(mini B type: 1 meter)

You can use this cable to connect the R-1 to

the USB connector of your computer.

“Connecting the R-1 to your

computer”

(p. 44)

* If the AC adaptor or USB cable becomes

damaged or if you need a replacement for any

reason, please contact one of the Service Centers

listed in the “Information” section at the end of

this manual.

■

CompactFlash card (64 MB)

You can use this memory card to carry out

recording and playback on the R-1.

“Memory card handling”

(p. 25)

■

Carrying case

You can use this case to protect the R-1

while it is being transported or stored.

■

Owner’s manual

This is the document you’re reading. Keep

it at hand for easy reference.

R-1_egfis1.book 8 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Contents

Checking the included items 8

The R-1’s controls and connectors 12

Getting ready to use the R-1 18

Basic connections ...................................................................................................... 18

Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power............................... 19

Installing the batteries and turning on the power ........................................ 20

Connecting headphones ................................................................................... 22

Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)................................................ 23

Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)............................................... 24

Memory card handling ............................................................................................ 25

Types of files that the R-1 can handle.................................................................... 28

Basic recording methods 29

Recording with the internal microphone .............................................................. 29

Recording with an external microphone............................................................... 32

Recording from a cassette tape or CD ................................................................... 35

Playback methods 38

Normal playback ...................................................................................................... 38

REPEAT A-B (Repeat playback)............................................................................. 40

1/2 PLAY (Half-speed playback)........................................................................... 42

PLAY MODE (Playback mode) .............................................................................. 43

Using the R-1 with your computer 44

Connecting the R-1 to your computer ................................................................... 44

Disconnecting the R-1 from your computer ......................................................... 45

Using effects 46

Effect list.....................................................................................................................47

Applying an effect .................................................................................................... 52

Various settings 54

System settings (Setup mode)................................................................................. 54

Restoring the factory settings.................................................................................. 65

List of messages 66

Troubleshooting 67

Problems with recording ......................................................................................... 67

Problems with playback .......................................................................................... 69

Other problems ......................................................................................................... 70

R-1_egfis1.book 9 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Contents

Deutsch

Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1 72

Vorbereitungen zum Einsatz des R-1 78

Formatieren einer CompactFlash-Karte ......................................................... 78

Einfache Aufnahmemethoden 79

Aufnahmen mit dem Einbaumikrofon.................................................................. 79

Aufnehmen mit externem Mikrofon...................................................................... 82

Wiedergabemethoden 85

Normale Wiedergabe ............................................................................................... 85

REPEAT A-B (Wiedergabewiederholung)............................................................ 86

1/2 PLAY (halbierte Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit) ............................................ 87

PLAY MODE (Wiedergabemodus)........................................................................ 88

Einsatz von Effekten 89

Anwenden eines Effekts .......................................................................................... 89

Verschiedene Einstellungen 90

Systemeinstellungen (Konfigurationsmodus)...................................................... 90

Français

Commandes et connecteurs 92

Préparatifs avant utilisation du R-1 98

Formatage d’une carte CompactFlash............................................................ 98

Méthodes d’enregistrement 99

Enregistrement à l’aide du micro intégré.............................................................. 99

Enregistrement avec microphone externe........................................................... 102

Modes de lecture 105

Lecture normale ...................................................................................................... 105

REPEAT A-B (lecture en boucle) .......................................................................... 106

1/2 PLAY (lecture en mode demi-vitesse).......................................................... 107

PLAY MODE (modes de lecture) ......................................................................... 108

Utilisation des effets 109

Application d’un effet ............................................................................................ 109

Paramétrages divers 110

Paramétrage système (mode Setup)..................................................................... 110

R-1_egfis1.book 10 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Contents

Italiano

Controlli e connettori dell’R-1 112

Preparazione all’utilizzo dell’R-1 118

Formattazione di una scheda CompactFlash............................................... 118

Metodi di registrazione di base 119

Registrazione mediante il microfono interno ..................................................... 119

Registrazione mediante un microfono esterno................................................... 122

Metodi di riproduzione 125

Riproduzione normale ........................................................................................... 125

REPEAT A-B (Riproduzione ripetuta)................................................................. 126

1/2 PLAY (Riproduzione a velocità dimezzata)................................................ 127

PLAY MODE (Modalità riproduzione) ............................................................... 128

Utilizzo degli effetti 129

Applicazione di un effetto..................................................................................... 129

Impostazioni 130

Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode) .............................................................. 130

Español

Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1 132

Preparación para el uso de la unidad R-1 138

Formateado de una tarjeta CompactFlash ................................................... 138

Métodos básicos de grabación 139

Grabación con el micrófono interno..................................................................... 139

Grabación con un micrófono externo .................................................................. 142

Métodos de reproducción 145

Reproducción normal............................................................................................. 145

REPETICIÓN A-B (repetición de la reproducción) ........................................... 146

REPRODUCCIÓN 1/2 (reproducción a la mitad de velocidad) ..................... 147

PLAY MODE (Modo de reproducción)............................................................... 148

Utilización de los efectos 149

Aplicación de un efecto.......................................................................................... 149

Algunos parámetros 150

Configuración del sistema (modo Setup (Configuración))............................... 150

Main specifications 152

Index 154

R-1_egfis1.book 11 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

The R-1’s controls and connectors

fig.panel-1

Internal mic

This is a stereo microphone that’s built into the R-1.

You can’t use the internal microphone if a microphone or other device is connected to

the

mic jacks

line input jacks

. If you want to use the internal microphone,

don’t connect anything to the other input jacks.

When recording via the internal microphone, set the mic type select switch to DYN.

Display

Various information about the R-1’s operating state is shown here.

EFFECT button

Press the

EFFECT button

to switch the effect on/off.

This button will light red when the effect is on.

If you turn this on before or during playback, the effect will be applied to the sound that

is being played back. If you turn this on before or during recording, the effect will be

applied to the sound that is being input; i.e., the sound that has been processed by the

effect will be recorded.

The R-1 provides various effects that let you modify the sound being played back or

recorded, giving the sound more impact or allowing more comfortable listening. You

can also transform the sound to give it a totally new character.

EDIT button

Use this button to make effect settings.

For details on the effects, refer to

“Using effects”

(p. 46). You can make effect settings

regardless of whether the

EFFECT button

is on or off.

5 6

R-1_egfis1.book 12 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

The R-1’s controls and connectors

MENU button

This button selects Setup mode, where you can make various settings for the R-1. Here

you can adjust the LCD contrast, specify the recording quality, and make various other

overall settings for the R-1. For details, refer to

“Various settings”

(p. 54)

DISPLAY button

This switches the contents of the R-1’s display.

In PLAY mode, this button will cycle through the playback time, the remaining

playback time in the current song (file), the type of song (file), and the bit rate.

Press the

DISPLAY button

to switch the contents of the display.

PREV button

Use this button to move to the beginning of the song or to select the preceding song.

Pressing this button in the middle of a song will move to the beginning of that song. If

you are already at the beginning (00:00) of the song, pressing this button will take you

to the preceding song. You can press and hold down this button to rewind.

These operations are available while playing or stopped.

NEXT button

Use this button to select the next song. You can press and hold down this button to fast-

forward.

These operations are available while playing or stopped.

REPEAT button

This button lets you play repeatedly between two points (A - B) you specify in the song.

Press this button once to mark point “A” and press it again to mark point “B.”

To cancel repeat playback, press the

REPEAT button

once again. When you cancel

repeat playback, points A and B will both be cancelled.

fig.repeat-a

During playback, press the

REPEAT button

once.

That point will be the beginning (point

) of the

repeated playback.

fig.repeat-b

Press the

REPEAT button

once again. That point

will be the end (point

) of the repeated playback.

fig.repeat-ab

Playback will occur repeatedly over the range you

specified in steps 1 and 2. To cancel repeat playback,

press the

REPEAT button

once again.

SPEED button

This button slows the playback to half-speed. Press it once again to return to normal

speed. This is useful when you are playing along with music at an uncomfortably fast

tempo, or when listening to rapid speech.

Song

R-1_egfis1.book 13 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

The R-1’s controls and connectors

fig.panel-2

STOP button

This button stops playback or recording.

PLAY/PAUSE button

This button starts playback. It also pauses recording or playback.

If you press this button while playing, playback will pause, and the R-1’s display will

indicate

PLAY-PAUSE

. Press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

once again to resume

playback.

Similarly, if you press this button while recording, recording will pause. The R-1’s

display will indicate

REC-PAUSE

, and the

REC button

will blink red.

To resume recording from the Rec Standby condition, press the

REC button

once again

(or press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

). The

REC button

lights red during recording.

REC button

When stopped, pressing the

REC button

will put the R-1 in recording-standby mode.

The R-1's display will indicate

REC STANDBY

, and the

REC button

will blink red.

To begin recording from recording-standby mode, press the

REC button

once again (or

press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

). During recording, the

REC button

will light red.

VALUE dial

Use this dial to select songs, to specify effect types and values, and to select setup mode

items.

EXIT button

Use this button to return to the previous item in Effect Edit or Setup mode. In Setup

mode, your value changes will be cancelled if you press the

EXIT button

before

pressing the

ENTER button

Use this button to select an item or finalize a change in Effect Edit or Setup mode.

5 6

R-1_egfis1.book 14 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

The R-1’s controls and connectors

Mic input jack

Accepts connection of a microphone.

If a cable is plugged into the line input jack, audio will not be input through

the mic input jack.

Set the

mic type select switch

to the appropriate position depending on whether

the connected microphone is a dynamic microphone or a plugin-powered miniature

condenser microphone.

Stereo microphones are supported; use a stereo mini-type cable to make connections. If

you use a monaural microphone, set the Setup mode

“10 Input Select”

setting to

MONO

. For details on this setting, refer to

“System settings (Setup mode)”

(p. 54).

Line input jack

If you want to input an audio signal from an audio device or electronic musical

instrument into the R-1, use a stereo mini-plug cable to connect it to this jack.

Mic type select switch

Set this switch to the appropriate position according to the type of microphone you’ve

connected to the

mic input jack

Input volume

This adjusts the input volume of the sound from the built-in mics ,

mic input jack

, or

line input jack

Use the procedure described in

“Adjusting the input level”

(p. 30) to adjust this while

watching the input level.

USB connector

You can use the included USB cable to connect this connector to your computer.

If the R-1 is connected to your computer, the song files you record can be transferred or

copied to your computer. You can also transfer or copy MP3 or WAV files from your

computer to the R-1 so that these files can be played on the R-1.

This connector supports USB 2.0 (hi-speed USB), allowing files to be transferred

rapidly.

If you want to connect the R-1 to your computer, please refer to

“Connecting the R-1

to your computer”

(p. 44).

When your computer has correctly recognized the R-1, the R-1’s display will indicate

Connected via USB

While the R-1 is connected to a computer, all functionality of the R-1 (other

than its power switch) is disabled; operating the buttons or switches will not

do anything.

DYN

Use this setting if you’ve connected a dynamic microphone.

If you’re using the internal microphone, set this to DYN.

CND

Use this setting if you’ve connected a miniature condenser microphone that re-

quires a power supply. You must use a “plug-in powered” microphone. This jack

supplies a voltage of 2 V.

* If this switch is set to CND, do not connect any microphone or device other than

a “plug-in powered” microphone. Any other type of microphone or device may

be damaged.

R-1_egfis1.book 15 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

The R-1’s controls and connectors

fig.panel-3

Power switch

This turns the power on/off.

Do not turn off the power during playback or recording. You must make sure that

playback or recording is stopped before you turn off the power.

• If you accidentally turn off the power during recording, the data being recorded will

not be saved to the CompactFlash card.

• The CompactFlash card may be damaged if you turn off the R-1’s power while data is

being read or written, such as during playback or recording.

• If you turn off the R-1’s power while the “Now working...” indication is shown during

effect editing or while saving a setting you’ve changed, the R-1 will become unstable,

and may become unable to start up.

Be very careful to never turn off the power when the unit is in such states.

AC adaptor jack

Connect the included AC adaptor to this jack.

HOLD switch

If you set the

HOLD switch

to the ON position, button presses on the R-1 will be

disabled; this is a convenient way to prevent the R-1 from being operated accidentally.

However, even when the

HOLD switch

is ON, the

mic type select switch

input

volume

power switch

, and

output volume

will still be operable.

Output volume

This adjusts the volume that is sent from the

headphone/line output/digital

output jack

. However, the volume of the digital output is not adjustable.

Headphone/line output/digital output jack

This jack outputs audio from the R-1 to headphones or external speakers. If you want to

output a digital signal, use a round optical mini-type digital cable.

Eject button

Press this to eject the CompactFlash card inserted in the

memory card slot

Memory card slot

Insert a CompactFlash card into this slot.

CompactFlash is the only type of memory card that the R-1 can use.

24 25 2623

R-1_egfis1.book 16 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

The R-1’s controls and connectors

fig.panel-4

Battery compartment

If you want to operate the R-1 on batteries, install the batteries here. If you are operating

the R-1 with its AC adaptor, you don’t need to install batteries.

You must switch off the R-1’s power before changing from AC adaptor operation to

battery operation, or from battery operation to AC adaptor operation.

Please read

“Installing the batteries and turning on the power”

(p. 20) before you use

the R-1.

Memory card slot cover

This cover prevents the CompactFlash card from being removed accidentally. When

you open the cover, you will see the

memory card slot

and

eject button

R-1_egfis1.book 17 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Getting ready to use the R-1

* Before making connections with other equipment, you must minimize the volume and turn

off the power of all of your equipment in order to prevent malfunction and/or speaker

damage.

* If you use a cable with a built-in resistor, the volume of the device connected to the line input

jack (LINE IN) may be too low. If so, you should use a connection cable that does not contain

a resistor.

fig.basic_50

The R-1 does not have built-in speakers. In order to hear the playback, you will need to

provide headphones or speakers.

You can use the R-1’s headphone jack as a digital output (optical out) for connection to

a digital device, or as a line output for connection to an analog device. Use the

appropriate cable for your device.

For details, refer to

“Connecting headphones”

(p. 22),

“Connecting digital speakers

(digital devices)”

(p. 23), or

“Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)”

(p. 24).

* Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers.

This can be remedied by:

1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).

2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.

3. Lowering volume levels.

Basic connections

Computer

CD/MD player for playback

Stereo mic

Headphones

AC adaptor

USB

MIC

LINE IN

PHONES

(OPTICAL)

DC IN

MD player or similar for recording

LINE OUT

DIGITAL IN

R-1_egfis1.book 18 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Getting ready to use the R-1

941

* Once the connections have been completed (p. 18), turn on power to your various devices in

the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction

and/or damage to speakers and other devices.

942

* This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power

up is required before the unit will operate normally.

* If batteries are installed and the AC adaptor is also connected, the power will be supplied

from the AC adaptor.

Turn off the R-1’s

power switch

fig.off

Connect the DC plug of the AC adaptor to the DC IN jack on the rear panel of the

R-1.

* Use only the AC adaptor supplied with the R-1.

Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

Turn on the R-1’s

power switch

fig.on-off

* If batteries are installed and the AC adaptor is also connected, the power will be supplied

from the AC adaptor.

Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power

OFF

R-1_egfis1.book 19 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Getting ready to use the R-1

Types of batteries you can use:

• AA alkaline batteries (LR6)

• AA nickel metal hydride batteries (HR15/51)

* The R-1 itself is not able to charge nickel metal hydride batteries; you will need to use a

separate battery charger.

fig.battery

Turn off the R-1’s

power switch

Detach the battery compartment cover

located on the bottom panel of the R-1.

Insert two AA batteries into the

battery compartment, making sure to

observe the correct polarity (+ and -

indications).

Close the battery compartment cover.

fig.on-2

Turn on the R-1’s

power switch

Installing the batteries and turning on the power

Note when using the R-1 on batteries

• We recommend using alkaline batteries which have a longer life.

• Don’t mix new batteries with used batteries or batteries of different types.

• If you won’t be using the R-1 for an extended period of time, you should remove

the batteries to prevent them from leaking and damaging the unit.

• If the R-1 is running on batteries, the display may turn off (the Sleep function) or

the LCD backlight may turn off to save power. If you want to change these

settings, proceed as described in “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54).

If you’re using the AC adaptor, these settings are not used.

• When connecting the R-1 to your computer via a USB cable, you must use the AC

adaptor to prevent the batteries from running down while connected.

R-1_egfis1.book 20 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Getting ready to use the R-1

About the remaining battery capacity

When the batteries run low, a battery icon ( ) is displayed blinking in the upper right

of the display. When this message appears, replace the batteries as soon as possible.

If you continue using the unit when the batteries have run low, the following screen will

appear, and all of the R-1’s functionality will stop.

fig.battery.eps

Turn off the power switch and replace the batteries with fresh ones.

Battery life

(When using alkaline batteries, MP3 192 kbps, and a 256 MB CompactFlash card)

* The battery life indicated above is approximate. Battery life will vary depending on the

environment in which you are using the R-1 and your method of use.

* The battery life will be shorter if you allow display backlighting to remain on or if you use

numerous effects.

Continuous playback

approximately 5.5 hours

Continuous recording

approximately 2 hours

R-1_egfis1.book 21 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Getting ready to use the R-1

Here’s how to connect headphones.

fig.phones

Turn off the power of the R-1.

Turn the

output volume

all the way toward the left to minimize the volume.

Connect your headphones to the

headphone jack

Now you can use the R-1 to record or play back as described in

“Basic recording

methods”

(p. 29) or

“Playback methods”

(p. 38).

Even if the song (file) was recorded at an appropriate recording level, you may hear

distortion or crackling during loud passages of the song if the output volume is too

high.

Connecting headphones

Output volume

Headphone jack

Headphones

R-1_egfis1.book 22 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Getting ready to use the R-1

Here’s how to connect amplified speakers that have digital input jacks.

fig.speaker

Turn off the power of the R-1.

Set the volume of the speakers to the minimum setting.

* If you’re using a digital connection, the R-1’s

output volume

control will not affect the

volume.

* The digital output has a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

Connect the

digital output jack

to your digital-compatible amplified speakers.

Use a cable with a round optical mini-plug to connect to the R-1’s digital output

jack.

Cables are not included; you will need to provide them separately.

Now you can use the R-1 to record or play back as described in

“Basic recording

methods”

(p. 29) or

“Playback methods”

(p. 38).

Gradually raise the speaker volume to an appropriate listening level.

If you’re using a digital connection, the R-1’s

output volume

control will not affect

the volume.

Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)

Digital output jack

DIGITAL IN

(OPTICAL)

Optical cable

Amplified speakers

Rectangular optical plug

Round optical mini-plug

R-1_egfis1.book 23 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Getting ready to use the R-1

fig.analog

Turn off the power of the R-1.

Turn the output volume all the way toward the left to minimize the volume.

Connect the R-1’s

line output jack

to your amplified speakers.

You will need an audio cable for connection to the R-1's line output jack.

Cables are not included; you will need to provide them separately.

Now you can use the R-1 for recording or playback as described in

“Basic recording

methods”

(p. 29) or

“Playback methods”

(p. 38).

Gradually turn the

output volume

toward the right to increase the volume.

You can also adjust the volume of your speakers.

Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)

Line output jack

Output volume

LINE IN

Audio cable

Amplified speakers

R-1_egfis1.book 24 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Getting ready to use the R-1

The R-1 uses CompactFlash memory cards.

Types of CompactFlash that you can use

• CompactFlash cards of up to 4 GB (Gigabytes) in size can be used.

Even when using a high-capacity CompactFlash card, recording will stop when

the file being recorded reaches 2 GB in size. The file will automatically be saved,

and recording will end.

• Depending on the manufacturer or model, some CompactFlash cards may not be

capable of successful recording or playback on the R-1.

• Micro Drives cannot be used. If you inadvertently use a Micro Drive, we can take

no responsibility for any damage or malfunctions that may occur to the Micro

Drive or to the R-1.

930

* Never insert or remove a CompactFlash card while this unit’s power is on. Doing so may

corrupt the unit’s data or the data on the CompactFlash card.

931

* Carefully insert the CompactFlash card all the way in-until it is firmly in place.

Recordable times on a CompactFlash card

The following table shows the approximate lengths of time you can record using

CompactFlash cards.

Recordable times (approximate)

Units: minutes

* The recording times listed above are approximate. The actual length of time you are able to

record may be slightly different than shown here, so please allow some leeway in your

recording plans.

* Use the R-1 itself to format the CompactFlash card.

* Use the included AC adaptor when recording continuously for an extended time.

* If there are multiple files, the total time that can actually be recorded will be less than the

time shown above.

* The R-1 can handle up to 255 files. Once the number of files in the CompactFlash card

reaches 255, you won’t be able to make any more recordings.

Memory card handling

CompactFlash size

File type 64 MB 256 MB 512 MB 2 GB

WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz

15 31 125

WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz

23 47 188

MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps

102 208 831

MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps

128 260 1,039

MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps

170 346 1,386

MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps

205 416 1,663

MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps

256 520 2,079

MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps

341 693 2,772

MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps

130

512 1,040 4,158

R-1_egfis1.book 25 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Getting ready to use the R-1

fig.CFslot

Inserting

Turn off the power of the R-1.

Open the

memory card slot cover

and insert the CompactFlash card with

its back side facing upward.

Push the CompactFlash card all the way

into the slot.

Close the

memory card slot cover

* With a CompactFlash card, the reverse side

is the side that has a raised lip when you’re

looking at the edge not containing the

terminals.

To insert a CompactFlash card, position it

so its reverse side faces upwards, and gently

push the card into the slot. If you attempt to

forcibly insert the card in the wrong

direction, you may damage the R-1 or the

CompactFlash card. Please use caution.

Removing

fig.CFslot2

Turn off the power of the R-1.

Open the

memory card slot cover

Push the

eject button

and remove the

CompactFlash card.

Inserting and removing a card

With the back of the

CompactFlash card

facing upward, push

it all the way into the

slot

Insert this way

Push the eject button

R-1_egfis1.book 26 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Getting ready to use the R-1

You must format a CompactFlash card before you can use it with the R-1.

You must use the R-1 itself to format the CompactFlash card. Follow the procedure

explained on page 60 of “System settings (Setup mode).”

CompactFlash cards formatted by a device other than the R-1 may not work correctly

with the R-1.

Turn off the power of the R-1.

Insert the CompactFlash card into the R-1’s

memory card slot

fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps

Turn on the power of the R-1.

If the CompactFlash card contains

no songs (files) that the R-1 is able

to play, the display will indicate No

Song. If the card contains songs

(files), the play mode screen will

appear.

Press the

MENU button

* If you decide to cancel the procedure,

press the

EXIT button

. You will

return to the previous screen.

fig.format-disp.eps

Turn the

VALUE dial

to select

Format Card

Press the

ENTER button

fig.format.eps

When the display shown here

appears, press the

ENTER button

fig.sure.eps

The screen will ask you to confirm

that you really want to format the

card. To format the card, press the

ENTER button

* If you decide not to format the card, press the

EXIT button

. You will return to step 5.

Never remove the CompactFlash card while formatting is in progress. Doing

so may damage the CompactFlash card.

fig.complete.eps

Formatting is completed when the

display indicates

Completed!

Press the

MENU button

You will return to the main screen (play mode).

Formatting a CompactFlash card

R-1_egfis1.book 27 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Getting ready to use the R-1

The R-1 can handle the following types of files.

Choose the type of file that is appropriate for your needs, depending on whether audio

quality or recording time is more important for your situation.

* Recording is always in stereo.

WAV files are not compressed; they capture all of the information in the recorded

sound. This means that they will have better audio quality than MP3 files. However,

WAV files are also much larger than MP3 files.

What is Bit Rate?

Bit Rate indicates the speed at which data is transferred. This is given in units

of “bps” (bits per second). Higher bit rates will deliver better audio quality. A

higher bit rate conveys more information, meaning that the sound will be

represented more accurately; but this also means that the file size will increase.

With a lower bit rate, the audio quality will be lower but the file size will also

be smaller.

What is VBR?

VBR stands for Variable Bit Rate. This means that the bit rate is varied according

to the type of sound at each moment in the recording. A higher bit rate is used

when there is a larger amount of sonic information to be captured, and a lower

bit rate is used when there is a lesser amount.

Types of files that the R-1 can handle

Sampling frequency (kHz)

Bit rate (kbps)

MP3

Playback

8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48

* All converted to 44.1 kHz for

playback

8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96,

112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,

320, VBR

Recording

44.1

64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320

Sampling frequency (kHz)

bit depth (bits)

WAV

Playback

8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48

* All converted to 44.1 kHz for

playback

8, 16, 24

Recording

44.1

16, 24

R-1_egfis1.book 28 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Basic recording methods

The following table shows the approximate lengths of time you can record using

CompactFlash cards.

Recordable times on a CompactFlash card

Recordable times (approximate)

Units: minutes

* The recording times listed above are approximate. The actual length of time you are able to record

may be slightly different than shown here, so please allow some leeway in your recording plans.

* Use the R-1 itself to format the CompactFlash card.

* Use the included AC adaptor when recording continuously for an extended time.

* If there are multiple files, the total time that can actually be recorded will be less than the time

shown above.

fig.mic-LR.eps

The R-1’s internal microphone is stereo. Audio entering

the microphone at the right side of the R-1 is recorded

on the right (R) channel, while the audio picked up by

the left microphone is recorded on the left (L) channel.

If you want to use the internal microphone,

don’t connect anything to the mic input jack or

line input jack.

If a microphone or cable is connected to the mic

input jack or line input jack, these inputs will

take priority, and the internal microphone will

not be used.

Make sure that the R-1’s power is turned off. Also set the

input volume

to the

minimum position.

If you want to hear (monitor) the sound while recording from the internal

microphone, connect a set of headphones to the phones jack and use them for

monitoring. If you connect external speakers and attempt to use them for

monitoring, acoustic feedback will occur, so don’t attempt to monitor through

speakers.

CompactFlash size

File type 64 MB 256 MB 512 MB 2 GB

WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz

15 31 125

WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz

23 47 188

MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps

102 208 831

MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps

128 260 1,039

MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps

170 346 1,386

MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps

205 416 1,663

MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps

256 520 2,079

MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps

341 693 2,772

MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps

130

512 1,040 4,158

Recording with the internal microphone

L R

R-1_egfis1.book 29 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Basic recording methods

Turn on the R-1’s power as described in

“Connecting the AC adaptor and

turning on the power”

(p. 19).

If you're recording via the internal microphone, set the mic type select switch to

DYN

Refer to

“Types of files that the R-1 can handle”

(p. 28), and specify the type of

file that you want to record. To make your selection or to check the current

selection, use Setup mode

07 Record Mode

(p. 54).

Adjust the input level as follows.

Adjusting the input level

fig.rec-1.eps

1. Press the REC button.

The R-1 enters recording-

standby mode. The display

indicates the remaining amount

of time that the R-1 can record for

the type of file (recording quality) you’ve selected.

* The song name shown in Record Standby mode is the name of the file that will be newly

created when recording is finished.

fig.rec-2.eps

2. Press the DISPLAY button.

3. Play (or perform) the sounds

that you actually intend to

record, and position the R-1’s internal microphone where it can pick up the sound.

* If you want to apply an effect to the sound while you record it, adjust the input level while

the effect is turned on (i.e., applied).

fig.rec-3.eps

4. While the sound plays,

gradually increase the input

volume.

Adjust the level so that the ■

input level indicators shown in

the display do not reach the righmost ■. (Position in the above illustration)

If the recording level is too low, you won’t be able to record very soft sounds. If the

recording level is too high, loud sounds will be distorted, causing crackles in the

recorded sound.

* If the material you are recording occasionally contains sudden loud sounds, such as the

attack of a drum in a band performance or sudden laughter during a quiet conversation, we

recommend that you use the Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 54). When doing so, adjust the input

level appropriately for the principal type of sound you are recording—not for the sudden

loud sounds that sometimes occur.

When you use the Limiter, the input level is automatically adjusted so that the audio input

level doesn’t get excessively high. When using the Limiter, you should adjust the input level

so that the ■ symbol at the position in the illustration appears only occasionally.

Remaining recording time

R-1_egfis1.book 30 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Basic recording methods

fig.rec-time.eps

Press the

REC button

Recording will begin.

* You can also start recording by pressing

the

PLAY/PAUSE button

If you move the

input volume control

in Record Standby mode or during

recording, the input level will change. Be careful that you don’t operate the

input volume

control inadvertently. Even if the

HOLD switch

is ON, the

input volume

is not affected by the HOLD function.

When you’re finished recording, press the

STOP button

If you want to pause recording, press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

. To defeat pause

and resume recording, press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

again.

The recorded data will be saved as a file on the CompactFlash card. The display will

indicate the file name of the recorded data, and that file will be selected.

* The file name is created automatically, using this format:

R1_0001.MP3

. The

0001

portion

will be the number that follows the highest-numbered file existing on the CompactFlash

card.

* The file is created at the root level of the CompactFlash card. Folders (directories) are not

created.

* Since the R-1 does not contain an internal clock, all files will have a creation date of January

1, 2002.

To listen to the data you just recorded, press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

. For other

playback methods, refer to

“Playback methods”

(p. 38).

Elapsed time from

start of recording

How the input level meter indicates the signal level

Number of ■’s dB Number of ■’s dB

None ∞ –– -50.0 8 -21.0 –– -18.0

1 -50.0 –– -40.0 9 -18.0 –– -15.0

2 -40.0 –– -36.0 10 -15.0 –– -12.0

3 -36.0 –– -33.0 11 -12.0 –– -9.0

4 -33.0 –– -30.0 12 -9.0 –– -6.0

5 -30.0 –– -27.0 13 -6.0 –– -3.0

6 -27.0 –– -24.0 14 -3.0 –– 0.0

7 -24.0 –– -21.0 15 0.0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 31 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Basic recording methods

The R-1 can use dynamic microphones and the miniature plug-in powered condenser

microphones that are designed to be connected to the recording jack of an MD (Mini

Disc) recorder or the microphone jack of a computer.

If you use a condenser microphone, you must use one that is designed for

plug-in power. If you connect the wrong type of microphone or a conventional

stereo mini-plug microphone, your equipment may be damaged.

fig.conmic-LR.eps

Make sure that the R-1’s power is turned off. Set the

input volume

to the

minimum position.

If anything is connected to the

line input jack

, the input from the

mic input

jack

will be ignored. If you want to record via the mic

input jack

, don’t

connect anything to the line input jack.

Turn on the R-1’s power as described in

“Connecting the AC adaptor and

turning on the power”

(p. 19).

Specify the type of file you want to record, as described in

“Types of files that the

R-1 can handle”

(p. 28). You can use Setup mode

07 Record Mode

(p. 54) to

specify the desired setting or to check the current setting.

Set the

mic type select switch

appropriately for the type of microphone you’ve

connected to the

mic input jack

. ->

“Mic type select switch”

(p. 15)

Recording with an external microphone

Stereo mic

MIC TYPE

INPUT LEVEL

MIC

R-1_egfis1.book 32 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Basic recording methods

Connect your external microphone to the

mic input jack

If you want to hear (monitor) the sound while recording, connect a set of

headphones to the phones jack and use them for monitoring. If you connect

external speakers and attempt to use them for monitoring, acoustic feedback

will occur, so don’t attempt to monitor through speakers.

Adjust the input level as follows.

Adjusting the input level

fig.rec-1.eps

1. Press the REC button.

The R-1 enters recording-

standby mode. The display

indicates the remaining amount

of time that the R-1 can record for

the type of file (recording quality) you’ve selected.

* The song name shown in Record Standby mode is the name of the file that will be newly

created when recording is finished.

fig.rec-2.eps

2. Press the DISPLAY button.

3. Play (or perform) the sounds

that you actually intend to

record, and position your external microphone where it can pick up the sound.

* If you want to apply an effect to the sound while you record it, adjust the input level while

the effect is turned on (i.e., applied).

fig.rec-3.eps

4. Gradually increase the input

volume.

Adjust the level so that the ■

input level indicators shown in

the display do not reach the

rightmost ■. (Position in the above illustration)

If the recording level is too low, you won’t be able to record very soft sounds. If the

recording level is too high, loud sounds will be distorted, causing crackles in the

recorded sound.

* If the material you are recording occasionally contains sudden loud sounds, such as the

attack of a drum in a band performance or sudden laughter during a quiet conversation, we

recommend that you use the Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 54).When doing so, adjust the input

level appropriately for the principal type of sound you are recording—not for the sudden

loud sounds that sometimes occur.

When you use the Limiter, the input level is automatically adjusted so that the audio input

level doesn’t get excessively high. When using the Limiter, you should adjust the input level

so that the ■ symbol at the position in the illustration appears only occasionally.

Remaining recording time

R-1_egfis1.book 33 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Basic recording methods

fig.rec-time.eps

Press the

REC button

Recording will begin.

* You can also start recording by pressing

the

PLAY/PAUSE button

If you move the

input volume control

in Record Standby mode or during

recording, the input level will change. Be careful that you don’t operate the

input volume

control inadvertently. Even if the

HOLD switch

is ON, the

input volume

is not affected by the HOLD function.

When you’re finished recording, press the

STOP button

If you want to pause recording, press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

. To defeat pause

and resume recording, press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

again.

The recorded data will be saved as a file on the CompactFlash card. The display will

indicate the file name of the recorded data, and that file will be selected.

* The file name is created automatically, using this format:

R1_0001.MP3

. The

0001

portion

will be the number that follows the highest-numbered file existing on the CompactFlash

card.

* The file is created at the root level of the CompactFlash card. Folders (directories) are not

created.

To listen to the data you just recorded, press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

. For other

playback methods, refer to

“Playback methods”

(p. 38).

Elapsed time from

start of recording

How the input level meter indicates the signal level

Number of ■’s dB Number of ■’s dB

None ∞ –– -50.0 8 -21.0 –– -18.0

1 -50.0 –– -40.0 9 -18.0 –– -15.0

2 -40.0 –– -36.0 10 -15.0 –– -12.0

3 -36.0 –– -33.0 11 -12.0 –– -9.0

4 -33.0 –– -30.0 12 -9.0 –– -6.0

5 -30.0 –– -27.0 13 -6.0 –– -3.0

6 -27.0 –– -24.0 14 -3.0 –– 0.0

7 -24.0 –– -21.0 15 0.0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 34 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Basic recording methods

This section explain how to record audio from an external device via the line input jack.

* The R-1 does not have a digital input jack.

As an example, here’s how to record from a CD player into the R-1.

fig.cd

The microphone input is disabled if you connect a device or cable to the line

input jack. This means that you cannot record the microphone input and line

input mixed together. If something is connected to both the line input jack and

the mic input jack, only the sound entering the line input jack will be recorded.

Make sure that the R-1’s power is turned off. Set the

input volume

to the

minimum position.

Turn on the R-1’s power as described in

“Connecting the AC adaptor and

turning on the power”

(p. 19).

Specify the type of file you want to record, as described in

“Types of files that the

R-1 can handle”

(p. 28). You can use Setup mode

07 Record Mode

(p. 54) to

specify the desired setting or to check the current setting.

Use an audio cable to connect the output jacks of your CD player to the R-1’s

line

input jack

On your CD player, play back the song that you want to record and adjust the

input level as described below. ->

“Adjusting the input level”

(p. 36)

Recording from a cassette tape or CD

CD/MD player, cassette deck, etc.

LINE IN

LINE OUT

R-1_egfis1.book 35 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Basic recording methods

Adjusting the input level

fig.rec-1.eps

1. Press the REC button.

The R-1 enters recording-

standby mode. The display

indicates the remaining amount

of time that the R-1 can record for

the type of file (recording quality) you’ve selected.

* The song name shown in Record Standby mode is the name of the file that will be newly

created when recording is finished.

fig.rec-2.eps

2. Press the DISPLAY button.

3. On the device that’s connected to the line input jack, play back the sounds that

you want to record. In this example, play back a CD on your CD player.

* If you want to apply an effect to the sound while you record it, adjust the input level while

the effect is turned on (i.e., applied).

fig.rec-3.eps

4. Gradually increase the input

volume.

Adjust the level so that the ■

input level indicators shown in

the display do not reach the

rightmost ■. (Position in the above illustration)

If the recording level is too low, you won’t be able to record very soft sounds. If the

recording level is too high, loud sounds will be distorted, causing crackles in the

recorded sound.

If the sound still distorts or is too soft even after you’ve used the R-1’s

input volume control to adjust the input level, try adjusting the volume

of your CD player or other playback device.

* If the material you are recording occasionally contains sudden loud sounds, we recommend

that you use the Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 54). When doing so, adjust the input level

appropriately for the principal type of sound you are recording—not for the sudden loud

sounds that sometimes occur.

When you use the Limiter, the input level is automatically adjusted so that the audio input

level doesn’t get excessively high. When using the Limiter, you should adjust the input level

so that the ■ symbol at the position in the illustration appears only occasionally.

Remaining recording time

R-1_egfis1.book 36 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Basic recording methods

fig.rec-time.eps

Press the

REC button

Recording will begin.

* You can also start recording by pressing

the

PLAY/PAUSE button

If you move the

input volume control

in Record Standby mode or during

recording, the input level will change. Be careful that you don’t operate the

input volume

control inadvertently. Even if the

HOLD switch

is ON, the

input volume

is not affected by the HOLD function.

Press the Play button of your CD player.

When you’re finished recording, press the R-1’s

STOP button

If you want to pause recording, press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

. To defeat pause

and resume recording, press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

again.

The recorded data will be saved as a file on the CompactFlash card. The display will

indicate the file name of the recorded data, and that file will be selected.

* The file name is created automatically, using this format:

R1_0001.MP3

. The

0001

portion

will be the number that follows the highest-numbered file existing on the CompactFlash

card.

* The file is created at the root level of the CompactFlash card. Folders (directories) are not

created.

Press the Stop button of your CD player.

To listen to the data you just recorded, press the

PLAY/PAUSE button

. For other

playback methods, refer to

“Playback methods”

(p. 38).

Elapsed time from

start of recording

How the input level meter indicates the signal level

Number of ■’s dB Number of ■’s dB

None ∞ –– -50.0 8 -21.0 –– -18.0

1 -50.0 –– -40.0 9 -18.0 –– -15.0

2 -40.0 –– -36.0 10 -15.0 –– -12.0

3 -36.0 –– -33.0 11 -12.0 –– -9.0

4 -33.0 –– -30.0 12 -9.0 –– -6.0

5 -30.0 –– -27.0 13 -6.0 –– -3.0

6 -27.0 –– -24.0 14 -3.0 –– 0.0

7 -24.0 –– -21.0 15 0.0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 37 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Playback methods

fig.play-1_50

The R-1 does not have internal speakers. In order to hear the playback, you’ll need to

provide a set of headphones or speakers.

You can use the R-1’s phones jack as a digital output (optical out) for connection to your

digital audio device, or as a line output for connection to your analog audio device.

Before you continue, make connections using the type of cable appropriate for your

device. Refer to

“Connecting headphones”

(p. 22),

“Connecting digital speakers

(digital devices)”

(p. 23), or

“Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)”

(p. 24).

With the display showing an indication like the one in the illustration, turn the

VALUE dial

to select a song (file).

Press the

PREV button

to move to the previous song (file), or the

NEXT button

to move to the next song (file).

* If the display indicates No Song, the CompactFlash card contains no files that the R-1 is able

to play.

Press the R-1’s

PLAY button

( ); the song (file) shown in the display will

begin playing.

Gradually turn the

output volume

control toward the right to adjust the volume

to a comfortable listening level.

Normal playback

File name

R-1_egfis1.book 38 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Playback methods

During playback, you can hold down the

PREV button

to rewind, or hold down

the

NEXT button

to fast-forward. Playback will resume when you release the

button.

* The song name shown in the display is the name of the file. It does not correspond to the ID3

tag within the MP3 file.

* Song names are displayed in alphabetical order according to the following list of characters;

they are not displayed in the order in which they were recorded.

(space) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

* If the CompactFlash card contains sub-directories (folders), all files at the root level will be

displayed first, followed by the files in the sub-directories (folders).

* Filenames beginning with “.” are ignored and will not be displayed.

* Files with extensions other than .mp3 and .wav are ignored and will not be displayed.

For more about the files that the R-1 is able to record and play back, refer to

“Types of files that the R-1 can handle”

(p. 28).

Rewinding or fast-forwarding during playback

This is a note of caution regarding operations while playing 16-bit/24-bit WAV files.

With some types of CompactFlash cards, performing fast-forward or rewind operations

while playing back these files will exceed the maximum speed at which data can be

read, causing the fast-forward or rewind operation to halt.

If this occurs, press the Stop button to stop playback. Then, start playback again.

R-1_egfis1.book 39 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Playback methods

This function lets you specify a region of the song during playback, causing it to play repeatedly.

fig.repeat-disp_50

Procedure

During playback, press the

REPEAT

button

( ) once.

That location will be assigned as the

beginning of the repetition (point

Press the

REPEAT button

once

again. That location will be assigned

as the end of the repetition (point

fig.repeat-a

The region you specified in steps 1

and 2 (the region between points A

and B) will play back repeatedly.

To cancel repeat play, press the

REPEAT button

once again.

REPEAT A-B (Repeat playback)

Song

R-1_egfis1.book 40 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Playback methods

To cancel this function

• With points

and

specified, pressing the

REPEAT button

( ) will cancel the

settings for points

and

• If after specifying point

, you press the

STOP button

before specifying point

the point

setting will be cancelled.

• If you want to stop playback as well as cancel the repeat settings, press the

STOP

button

. Playback will stop, and the repeat playback settings (points

and

) will

also be cancelled.

Notes

* If after specifying point A, you press the STOP button before specifying point B, the point

A setting will be cancelled.

* If after specifying point A you allow playback to continue all the way to the end of the song,

playback will repeat between point A and the end of the song.

* If you press the STOP button during repeat play, playback will stop and the repeat region

(A-B) settings will be cancelled.

R-1_egfis1.book 41 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Playback methods

Here’s how you can play back at half the normal speed.

fig.half-disp_50

Procedure

While stopped or playing, press the

SPEED button

The lower line of the display will

indicate

1/2

, and playback will occur at

half-speed

If the R-1 is currently playing, the playback will slow down.

If the R-1 is currently stopped, half-speed playback will begin when you press the

PLAY button

* This function adjusts the pitch of the half-speed playback so that it remains the same as the

normal pitch. This may produce a wavering effect in the playback; this is not a malfunction.

To cancel this function

half-speed playback

is active, press the

SPEED button

to cancel it.

If you don’t cancel half-speed playback, the next song will also play back at

half-speed.

1/2 PLAY (Half-speed playback)

R-1_egfis1.book 42 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Playback methods

Here you can specify the order and method of playback.

fig.disp-play_50

Press the

MENU button

You can’t change the play mode while the R-1 is playing.

You must first press the

STOP button

to stop playback.

Use the VALUE dial to select

05 Play Mode

Press the

ENTER button

Use the

VALUE dial

to select the play mode you want.

fig.sequential.eps

After you’ve selected the play mode

you want, press the

ENTER button

Press the

MENU button

You will return to play mode.

PLAY MODE (Playback mode)

Sequential

Songs will play back in the order of 001, 002, 003...009

* Use the PREV and NEXT buttons or the VALUE dial to select a file (song).

Single

Only the selected file (song) will be played repeatedly.

Shuffle

The song playback order will change automatically.

* A previously played song will not be played.

* If you use the PREV / NEXT buttons or the VALUE dial to select a file (song),

the file (song) names will appear in the same order as when

Sequential

play

mode is selected.

1, 6

3, 5

2, 4

R-1_egfis1.book 43 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Using the R-1 with your computer

The R-1 can handle the following types of files.

Use the AC adaptor when connecting the R-1 to your computer.

* When connecting the R-1 to your computer via a USB cable, you must use the AC adaptor

to prevent the batteries from running down while connected.

Insert a CompactFlash card into the R-1.

If the R-1’s

power switch

is off, turn it on.

Use a USB cable to connect the R-1 to your computer.

The R-1 will be detected by your computer.

If no CompactFlash card is inserted in the R-1 when you connect it to your

computer, the R-1’s display will indicate

No Card

. In this case, the R-1 will

not be detected by your computer. Your computer will also fail to detect the

R-1 if the R-1 is in Setup mode. Unplug the USB cable that connects the R-1

to your computer, return to step 1 of this procedure, and insert the

CompactFlash card.

The R-1’s CompactFlash card will be recognized by your computer as follows.

* If you change the above name after the card has been recognized by your computer, it will

subsequently appear with the name you specified.

* If you're using Mac OS 9, format the CompactFlash card on your Macintosh, and then re-

format it on the R-1.

Now you can copy the desired files from the R-1’s CompactFlash card to your

computer, or from your computer to the R-1’s CompactFlash card.

You can copy files by dragging and dropping them.

Sampling frequency (kHz)

Bit rate (kbps)

MP3

Playback

8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48

* All converted to 44.1 kHz for

playback

8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96,

112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320,

VBR

Recording

44.1

64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320

Sampling frequency (kHz)

bit depth (bits)

WAV

Playback

8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48

* All converted to 44.1 kHz for

playback

8, 16, 24

Recording

44.1 16, 24

Connecting the R-1 to your computer

Windows

When the card is recognized by My Computer or Explorer, it will appear with

the name

Removable Disk

Mac OS X

The card will appear on the desktop with a name of

NO NAME

Mac OS 9

The card will appear on the desktop with a name of

Untitled

R-1_egfis1.book 44 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Using the R-1 with your computer

Here’s how to disconnect the R-1 from your computer. You must use the following

procedure to cancel the connection, and then disconnect the USB cable.

Do not switch off power to the R-1, disconnect the USB cable, or remove the

CompactFlash card while the R-1 is still connected to your computer.

In the Windows task tray, double-click the

Safely Remove Hardware

icon ( ).

The

Safely Remove Hardware

dialog box will appear.

In the displayed list of

hardware devices

, select the item that indicates the R-1’s

CompactFlash card.

Item indicating the R-1’s CompactFlash card

In the dialog box, click

[Stop]

When the

Stop Hardware Device

dialog box appears, select the item that indicates

the R-1’s CompactFlash card, and click

[OK]

When your computer indicates

“The USB Mass Storage Device can be

removed safely,”

you can disconnect the USB cable between the R-1 and your

computer. Alternatively, you can switch off power to the R-1.

Cancel the connection with the R-1 displayed on the desktop.

Mac OS X

, drag the R-1’s CompactFlash icon (NO NAME) to the of the

dock.

Normally, when you drag to the trash can located at the right edge of the dock, the

indication will change from the trash can to , allowing you to cancel the

connection.

Mac OS 9

, drag the R-1’s CompactFlash icon (untitled) to the trash.

When the icon has disappeared from the desktop, you can disconnect the USB

cable between the R-1 and your computer. Alternatively, you can switch off power

to the R-1.

Disconnecting the R-1 from your computer

Windows

Windows XP, 2000

USB Mass Storage Device

Windows Me

Removable Disk

Macintosh

R-1_egfis1.book 45 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Using effects

What are effects?

In the context of a digital audio device such as the R-1,

“effects”

are digital processing

techniques that can be applied to a sound to modify it; for example, by making it

brighter or giving it more impact. You can also make speech more intelligible, or reduce

unwanted noise.

The R-1 provides various effects, which are listed on the pages that follow. You can

apply an effect to the input sound and record the processed sound, or apply an effect to

the sound that is being played back by the R-1.

If you apply effects while recording, the volume and tonal character of the recorded

sound will differ from the original sound. Particularly if you are applying an

“aggressive” effect, you should use headphones to monitor the sound while still in the

recording-standby mode to make sure that the sound is not clipping or distorting. We

also recommend that you make a test recording beforehand.

Clipping

Clipping occurs when an effect or amplification causes the audio level

(volume) to exceed the maximum level that a device can handle. This will

cause distortion or a “buzzy” sound during loud passages.

For details on how to make effect settings, refer to

“Applying an effect”

(p. 52).

f you press the EFFECT button during recording or playback, the effect will

be switched on or off. To prevent the effect from being switched on or off

unintentionally, we recommend that you turn the HOLD switch on.

R-1_egfis1.book 46 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Using effects

Effect list

Easy EQ

Eleven settings are provided for use with styles such as rock, pop, or

dance. Each setting modifies the tonal character (frequency response)

appropriately for the selected style of music. For example, the Rock

setting boosts the low and high frequency ranges to give the sound

greater impact. The Pop setting makes it easier to hear the range in

which the melody is usually played. The Vocal setting makes the lyrics

more audible. The Flat setting simply outputs the sound without any

change in tonal character.

Internally, this effect uses a ten-band graphic equalizer.

p. 49

For Speech

This effect is appropriate for material that is mainly a speaking voice,

such as conversation or dialog. It clarifies the voice, and also reduces

the sibilance (unpleasant exaggeration of sounds beginning with “s”)

that can occur when recording with a microphone.

Internally, this effect combines a de-esser and an enhancer.

p. 49

Voice Perform

This effect can completely transform the character of a voice by modi-

fying the pitch of the sound. You can use the provided settings to cre-

ate comical voices, low monster-like voices, or voices that have a

“springy” character.

Internally, this combines a pitch shifter and a delay.

p. 49

Editable EQ

This is a ten-band graphic equalizer with adjustable gain. For each

band, you can adjust the gain in a range of -12 dB– +12 dB to modify

the tonal character of the sound.

p. 49

Noise Reduc-

This effect reduces the “hissing” or “rushing” background noise that

may be heard during silent portions of a recording, or the hiss that is

often heard on an analog record or cassette tape.

Internally, this combines a noise gate and a notch filter.

p. 49

Hum Noise

Cut

This effect reduces the low-pitched “hum” that can occur when re-

cording from a microphone or when a motorized device is located

nearby.

Internally, this is a notch filter.

p. 50

07 Reverb

When you listen to sound, you are hearing not only the sound that

comes directly from the source to your ears, but also the sound that re-

flects off the floor and walls. These reflections are called “reverbera-

tion” (reverb), and their character will vary depending on the size of

the room and the material of which the walls are constructed.

This effect adds simulated reverberation to the original sound, pro-

ducing a natural-sounding impression of spaciousness.

p. 50

Int-Mic Rec.

This effect modifies the character of the sound recorded from the in-

ternal mic or a miniature condenser mic connected to the mic input

jack, giving it the character of sound recorded from a larger mic. It can

simulate the characteristics of famous mics used in recording studios,

giving your sound a professional touch.

This effect is particularly useful when applied during recording.

p. 50

09 Ext-Mic Rec.

This effect modifies the character of the sound recorded from a typical

small dynamic mic connected to the mic input jack, giving it the char-

acter of sound recorded from a larger mic. It can simulate the charac-

teristics of famous mics used in recording studios, giving your sound

a professional touch.

This effect is particularly useful when applied during recording.

p. 50

R-1_egfis1.book 47 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Using effects

Mastering

You may sometimes feel that the material you record is lacking in def-

inition or clarity. Also in some cases, there may be excessive volume

differences between loud and soft passages, or it may be difficult to

hear soft sounds that occur simultaneously with loud sounds. For ex-

ample when recording your band performance, there might be an ex-

cessive difference in volume between the intro and the break. Or when

recording conversation, there will be a difference in volume between

someone near the mic and someone farther from the mic.

The Mastering effect processes such sounds to give them better defini-

tion and a more consistent volume.

You can also use this to enhance the playback of material you’ve al-

ready recorded on the R-1, or to enhance material as you’re recording

it into the R-1 from media such as cassette tape.

Internally, this combines an enhancer and a two-band (low and high)

compressor.

p. 50

Center Cancel

This effect cancels the sounds that are located at the center of a stereo-

recorded song. You can use this to remove the vocal from a song, leav-

ing only the accompaniment. However this will not be as effective if

special effects have been used to create a broader stereo field or if the

recording contains a large amount of reverberation.

p. 51

Tuner

The tuner is a useful tool for use with a musical instrument; it is not an

“effect” that modifies the original sound. This produces a sine wave of

a fixed pitch at the notes C, D, E, ... relative to A=440 Hz. You can use

this reference pitch when tuning your musical instrument.

Internally, this is a fixed-pitch oscillator. Even if you record while the

tuner is sounding, the sound of the tuner will not be recorded.

p. 51

13 Metronome

The metronome is a useful tool for use with a musical instrument; it is

not an “effect” that modifies the original sound. You can specify the

time signature and the tempo of the metronome.

Even if you record while the metronome is sounding, the sound of the

metronome will not be recorded.

p. 51

R-1_egfis1.book 48 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Using effects

01: Easy EQ

02: For Speech

03: Voice Perform

04: Editable EQ

05: Noise Reducer

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

Type

Flat, Rock,

Pop

Dance, HipHop,

Techno, Jazz, Blues,

Classic, Speech, Vocal

Selects an EQ preset.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the output volume.

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

De-eser Sw.

OFF,

Switches the de-eser (sibilant reduction) on/off.

Clarity 1–

–100

Adjusts the amount of clarification applied to the

sound.

Low Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain.

High Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the output volume.

Parameter name Range of values Explanation

Type

High Tone

, Low

Tone, Spring, Spacy

Selects the type of transformation applied to the

sound.

Low Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain.

High Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain.

Pan L50–

CENTER

–R50 Adjusts the panning of the output sound.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the output volume.

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

32Hz

-12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 32 Hz.

64Hz -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 64 Hz.

125Hz -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 125 Hz.

250Hz -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 250 Hz.

500Hz -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 500 Hz.

1kHz -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 1 kHz.

2kHz -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 2 kHz.

4kHz -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 4 kHz.

8kHz -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 8 kHz.

16kHz -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 16 kHz.

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

Noise Gate 0–

–100

Specifies the threshold level; the sound will be cut

when the volume falls below this level.

Hiss Cut 0–

–100 Adjusts the amount by which hiss will be cut.

Low Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain.

High Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the output volume.

R-1_egfis1.book 49 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Using effects

06: Hum Noise Cut

07: Reverb

08: Int-Mic Rec.

09: Ext-Mic Rec.

10: Mastering

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

Frequency

50Hz

, 60Hz

Specifies the frequency at which hum will be cut.

Depth 0–

–100 Adjusts the amount by which hum will be cut.

Low Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain.

High Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the output volume.

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

Type

Hall

, Room, Plate

Selects the type of reverb.

Time 1–

–100 Adjusts the length of reverberation.

Balance

D100:0W–

D50:50W

–

D0:100W

Adjusts the proportion between the original sound

and the reverberation.

Low Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain.

High Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain.

Level

–100 Adjusts the output volume.

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

Type

–5

Selects the type of transformation.

Low Gain -12dB–

–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain.

High Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the output volume.

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

Type

–5

Selects the type of transformation.

Low Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain.

High Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the output volume.

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

Clarity

1–

–100

Adjusts the amount of clarification applied to the

sound.

Crossover

200Hz, 250Hz, 315Hz,

400Hz, 500Hz, 630Hz,

800Hz

, 1kHz, 1.25Hz,

1.6kHz, 2kHz

Specifies the frequency at which the low- and high-

range compressors are divided.

Low Compress 0–

–100

Adjusts the amount of compression for frequencies

below the Crossover point you specified.

High Compress 0–

–100

Adjusts the amount of compression for frequencies

above the Crossover point you specified.

Low Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain.

High Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the output volume.

R-1_egfis1.book 50 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Using effects

11: Center Cancel

12: Tuner

13: Metronome

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

Depth

0–

–100

Adjusts the amount by which the center sound will

be cut.

Point L50–

CENTER

–R50

Makes a fine adjustment to the stereo position at

which the sound will be cut.

Ambience 0–

–100

Adjusts the amount of reverberation that will be

added.

Low Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain.

High Gain -12dB–

0dB

–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the output volume.

Parameter name

Range of values Explanation

Tone (A=440)

F, F#, G, G#,

, A#, B,

C, C#, D, D#, E

Specifies the pitch of the tuner.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the volume of the tuner.

Parameter name Range of values Explanation

Beat

4/4

, 6/8, 1/4, 2/4, 3/4

Specifies the time signature of the metronome.

Tempo 30–

120

–280

Specifies the tempo of the metronome.

* The value will change in steps of 2.

Level 0–

–100 Adjusts the volume of the metronome.

R-1_egfis1.book 51 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Using effects

This section explains how to apply an effect during playback or during recording-

standby mode. You can also make effect settings before you begin playback, or try out

various effect settings while making a trial recording.

fig.effect.eps

Applying an effect

While playing

In recording-standby

Choose an effect

Edit mode

Select a parameter

Type -> Level1

Edit the parameter

Pop -> Dance

-> HipHop...

Exit from

effect edit mode

Begin

playback/recording

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

ENTEREXIT

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

EXITEXIT

01:Eazy EQ

-> 02:For Speech...

Effect mode ON

EDIT

R-1_egfis1.book 52 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Using effects

While in playback or in recording-standby mode, press the R-1’s

EFFECT button

turn it

(lit).

Press the

EDIT button

. You will enter Edit mode.

Use the

VALUE dial

to select the desired type of effect, and then press the

ENTER

button

Each effect has various “parameters” (settings) that adjust the effect. When you

select an effect type, its parameters will have the default settings.

When you change the effect type, the currently set parameter values are cleared.

* If you decide not to change the effect type, press the

EXIT button

or the

EDIT button

to leave

Effect mode.

Now you can select a parameter. Use the

VALUE dial

to select a parameter, and

then press the

ENTER button

* If you decide not to select a parameter, press the

EDIT button

to leave Effect mode.

* If you want to return to the effect selection, press the

EXIT button

Now you can edit the parameter. Use the

VALUE dial

to specify the desired value

for the parameter, and then press the

EXIT button

Press the

EDIT button

to leave Effect mode.

If you want to return to the parameter selection, press the

EXIT button

The effect parameter settings you make are remembered until you change

them.

R-1_egfis1.book 53 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Various settings

For details on how to make these settings, see

“Procedures”

(p. 56).

* During playback, recording, or recording-standby, you can’t enter Setup mode by pressing

the

MENU button

System settings (Setup mode)

Menu/Effect

Value (default

value: boldface)

Procedure

LCD Contrast

Adjusts the contrast of the display.

1–

–10 A (p. 56)

LCD Backlight

Specifies the time after which the display back-

light will turn off when running on batteries.

OFF, ON,

5sec

10sec, 20sec

A (p. 56)

Delete File

Deletes a file.

–– B (p. 58)

Rename File

Changes the name of a file.

–– C (p. 60)

Play Mode

Specifies the order in which songs will play.

Sequential

Single, Shuffle

A (p. 56)

Limiter

Turns the input level limiter on/off.

* The limiter reduces the input level appropriately

when the input level is excessive.

The threshold level is -9 dBFS.

OFF

, ON

A (p. 56)

Record Mode

Specifies the type of file created when you record.

This will determine the audio quality of the re-

corded file.

MP3 64kbps,

MP3 96kbps,

MP3 128kbps,

MP3 160kbps,

MP3 192kbps

MP3 256kbps,

MP3 320kbps,

WAV 16bit,

WAV 24bit

A (p. 56)

Track Splitting

Turns the track splitting function on/off.

* When the signal level falls below -36 dBFS dur-

ing recording, the file will automatically be split

at that point. Recording will resume when the

signal level increases again, and the recording

time indication will be reset to “0:00:00.”

OFF

, ON

A (p. 56)

Input Monitor

Turn this on if you’re monitoring the input signal

through headphones. Turn this off if you’re not

monitoring the signal.

* During recording, the sound will be heard re-

gardless of whether this is on or off.

OFF

, ON

A (p. 56)

R-1_egfis1.book 54 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Various settings

Input Select

Set this to STEREO if you’ve connected a stereo

microphone. Set this to MONO if you’ve connect-

ed a monaural microphone. If you use the STE-

REO setting with a monaural signal, only the L

(left) channel will be recorded. If this is set to

MONO, sound will be recorded on both the L and

R channels.

* The recorded file will be stereo even if this is set

to MONO.

STEREO

, MONO

A (p. 56)

Sleep Timer

Specifies the time after which the R-1 will enter

Sleep mode when running on batteries.

* This setting does nothing if you’re using the AC

adaptor.

OFF, 1min, 2min,

3min

, 5min,

10min, 15min,

30min, 45min,

60min

A (p. 56)

Format Card

Formats a CompactFlash card.

– D (p. 62)

Firmware Ver1.00

Lets you check the program version of the R-1.

– E (p. 64)

About the R-1

Displays information about the R-1.

– A (p. 56)

Menu/Effect

Value (default

value: boldface)

Procedure

R-1_egfis1.book 55 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Various settings

Procedure A

01 LCD Contrast

02 LCD Backlight

05 Play Mode

06 Limiter

07 Record Mode

08 Track Splitting

09 Input Monitor

10 Input Select

11 Sleep Timer

14 About the R-1

fig.system.eps

Procedures

Specify

the value

5 ->6 -> 7...

Exit setup mode

EXITEXIT

ENTEREXIT

ENTERENTER

Setup mode

ENTERENTER

EXITEXIT

Select an item

from the setup

R-1_egfis1.book 56 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Various settings

While the R-1 is stopped, press the

MENU button

. You will enter Setup mode.

Turn the

VALUE dial

to select an item from the setup menu, and then press the

ENTER button

* If you decide not to continue, you can press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave

Setup mode.

Now you can specify the value. Turn the

VALUE dial

to specify the desired value,

and then press the

ENTER button

* If you press the

EXIT button

, you will return to the setup item selection in step 2. If you

press the

MENU button

, you will exit Setup mode.

If you press either of these buttons, the value you specified in step 3 will be ignored.

The opening screen of Setup mode is displayed. If you want to choose another

setup menu item, use the

VALUE dial

to select an item from the menu (return to

step 2).

If you’re finished with Setup mode, press the

EXIT button

MENU button

If you want to continue making changes in Setup mode, press the

ENTER button

You will return to step 3.

If you want to choose another menu item, turn the

VALUE dial

to select it (instead

of pressing the ENTER button). Make the desired settings for each menu item as

described in

“System settings (Setup mode)”

(p. 54).

R-1_egfis1.book 57 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Various settings

Procedure B

03 Delete File

fig.system-b.eps

Select the file

that you want to delete

001:R1_0001.MP3...

Exit setup mode

EXITEXIT

ENTEREXIT

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

Setup mode

ENTERENTER

Return to Play mode

EXITEXIT

Select an item

from the setup

R-1_egfis1.book 58 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Various settings

In play-standby mode, press the

MENU button

. You will enter Setup mode.

Turn the

VALUE dial

to select the desired item from the setup menu.

Select

03: Delete File

and then press the

ENTER button

* If you decide not to continue, you can press the

EXIT button

MENU button

to leave

Setup mode.

Now you can choose the file that you want to delete. Turn the VALUE dial to select

the file that you want to delete, and then press the ENTER button.

* If you press the

EXIT button

MENU button

, you will exit Setup mode.

* If there is no file to delete, the display will indicate

No Song

The display will ask

“OK to delete? [ENTER]”

If you’re sure you want to delete the file you selected in step 3, press the

ENTER

button

The display will indicate

“Now working...Do not remove card!”

and then will

indicate

“Completed!”

fig.working-complete

Don’t remove the CompactFlash card while a file is being deleted.

Then you will automatically return to the Setup mode screen.

If you’re finished, press the

EXIT button

or the

MENU button

If you want to delete another file, press the

ENTER button

. You will return to step

If you want to choose another menu item, turn the

VALUE dial

to select it (instead

of pressing the

ENTER button

). To make settings for the menu item you select, use

the appropriate procedure as listed in

“System settings (Setup mode)”

(p. 54).

R-1_egfis1.book 59 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Various settings

Procedure C

04 Rename File

fig.system-c.eps

Select the file

that you want to

rename

001:R1_0001.MP3...

The filename

extension

is not displayed

Move the cursor

to the character

you want to

change

Move the cursor to the character

you want to change

Exit setup mode

EXITEXIT

ENTEREXIT

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

Return to Play mode

EXITEXIT

R1_0001.MP3

-> R5_0001.MP3

VALUEVALUE

ENTERENTER

PLAYPLAY (insert)

STOPSTOP (delete)

Setup mode

Select an item

from the setup

R-1_egfis1.book 60 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Various settings

With the R-1 stopped, press the

MENU button

. You will enter Setup mode.

Turn the

VALUE dial

to select the desired item from the setup menu. Select

04:

Rename File

and then press the

ENTER button

* If you decide not to continue, you can press the

EXIT button

MENU button

to leave

Setup mode.

Now you can choose the file that you want to rename. Turn the

VALUE dial

select the file that you want to rename, and then press the

ENTER button

* You will exit Setup mode if you press the

MENU button

Use the

and

NEXT buttons

to move the cursor to a character you want to

change.

* If you press the

MENU button

, you will leave Setup mode.

When you’ve moved the cursor to the location of the character you want to change,

use the

VALUE dial

to select the desired character for that location.

■

Characters that you can use in a file name

(space) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

File names beginning with “.” are ignored by the R-1.

* You will exit Setup mode if you press the

MENU button

Move the cursor to the next location at which you want to change the character.

When you’ve finished making changes to the file name, press the

ENTER button

The display will indicate

Completed!

, and then you will automatically return to the

Setup mode screen.

* When you change the name of a file, the playback order will also be affected.

fig.exists.eps_50

If an identically named file already exists, the

screen shown here will appear. You will need

to specify a different name for the file.

If you’re finished, press the

EXIT button

or the

MENU button

If you want to rename another file, press the

ENTER button

. You will return to step

3. If you want to choose another menu item, turn the

VALUE dial

to select it

(instead of pressing the

ENTER button

). To make settings for the menu item you

select, use the appropriate procedure as listed in

“System settings (Setup mode)”

(p. 54).

Button

Result Button Result

PREV button

Moves the cursor left

PLAY button

Inserts a character

NEXT button

Moves the cursor right

STOP button

Deletes a character

R-1_egfis1.book 61 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Various settings

Procedure D

12 Format Card

fig.system-d.eps

EXITEXIT

EXIT

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

Exit setup mode

Return to Play mode

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

Setup mode

Select an item

from the setup

R-1_egfis1.book 62 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Various settings

With the R-1 stopped, press the

MENU button

You will enter Setup mode.

Turn the

VALUE dial

to select the desired item from the setup menu.

Select

12: Format Card

and then press the

ENTER button

* If you decide not to continue, you can press the

EXIT button

MENU button

to leave

Setup mode.

The display will ask

“OK to format? [ENTER].”

Press the

ENTER button

* If you press the

MENU button

, you will exit Setup mode.

Then the display will ask

“Are You Sure? [ENTER]”

If you’re sure you want to format the card, press the ENTER button.

The display will indicate

“Now working...Do not remove card!”

and then will

indicate

“Completed!”

fig.working-complete

Then you will automatically return to the Setup mode screen.

If you’re finished, press the

EXIT button

or the

MENU button

Since formatting the card will delete all of the files, the display will indicate

Song

If you want to choose another menu item, turn the

VALUE dial

to select it (instead

of pressing the

ENTER button

). To make settings for the menu item you select, use

the appropriate procedure as listed in

“System settings (Setup mode)”

(p. 54).

R-1_egfis1.book 63 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Various settings

Procedure E

13 Firmware Ver1.00

fig.system-e.eps

With the R-1 stopped, press the

MENU button

You will enter Setup mode.

Turn the

VALUE dial

to select the desired item from the setup menu.

Select

13: Firmware Ver1.00.

* The program version of your R-1 will appear in the “1.00” area.

Press the

EXIT button

MENU button

to leave Setup mode.

If you want to choose another menu item, turn the

VALUE dial

to select it instead

of pressing the

EXIT button

MENU button

. To make settings for the menu item

you select, use the appropriate procedure as listed in

“System settings (Setup

mode)”

(p. 54).

ENTEREXIT

Setup mode

Select an item

from the setup

Exit setup mode

R-1_egfis1.book 64 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Various settings

Here’s how you can restore all effect values and setup mode items of the R-1 to their

factory-set state.

Turn off the power of the R-1.

While holding down the

ENTER button

, switch on the R-1’s power.

The display will show the same content as when starting up normally, but the

settings will have been reset to their factory-set condition.

Restoring the factory settings

R-1_egfis1.book 65 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

List of messages

This section lists the most important messages that appear in the display.

Display

Explanation

The batteries have run low. Please replace them with

fresh batteries.

The HOLD switch is turned on.

The R-1 is connected via USB to your computer.

No memory card (CompactFlash) is inserted.

There are no MP3 or WAV files on the memory card.

The time shown is the elapsed time.

STOP: stopped

PLAY: playing

Recording-standby mode

The screen shows the name of the file created by this re-

cording.

Press the REC button or PLAY button to start recording.

Status while recording

The screen shows the name of the file created by this re-

cording, and the remaining time that can be recorded.

The recordable time will depend on the capacity of the

memory card.

* remain: remaining time for recording

Name and type of file being recorded

This screen will appear if you press the DISPLAY button

during recording.

Name and type of file that has been recorded

This screen will appear if you press the DISPLAY button

while playing or stopped.

Playback status

The time shown is the remaining playback time for this

song.

* remain: remaining playback time

Playing repeatedly between points A-B

The screen shows the name of the currently playing file

and the elapsed time.

Playing at half-speed

The screen shows the name of the currently playing file

and the elapsed time.

The R-1 is executing a command. Do not remove the

card.

R-1_egfis1.book 66 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Troubleshooting

If you experience difficulties, read this section first. It contains tips on how to resolve

various problems.

Sound recorded from the mic is heard only from the L (left)

channel

Some mics are stereo, while others are monaural. If you are using a monaural mic, the

sound will be recorded on the L (left) channel.

In this case, you can use

“System settings (Setup mode)”

(p. 54) 10 Input Select to

select MONO as the mic type. This setting is remembered even when the power is

turned off.

Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)”

(p. 54)

Can’t start recording from recording-standby mode

Check the remaining space on your CompactFlash memory card. Recording is not

possible if there is little time remaining on the card. In this case, the R-1 will enter

recording-standby mode, but you will return to the play mode screen if you attempt to

start recording by pressing the record button or play button.

In recording-standby mode, the screen shows the amount of remaining recordable time.

An indication of 0:00:00 means that there is no time left. Please check the display.

Refer to: “Recordable times on a CompactFlash card”

(p. 29)

Can’t use the internal mic (Can’t use an external mic)

The internal mic cannot be used if a mic, cable, or device is connected to the

mic input

jack

line input jack

. If you want to use the internal mic, don’t connect anything to

the other input jacks.

Refer to: “Mic input jack”

(p. 15),

“Line input jack”

(p. 15),

“Recording with the internal microphone”

(p. 29)

Recorded sound is distorted

The sound will distort if the

input volume

is too high. Adjust the input level

appropriately as described in

“Adjusting the input level”

(p. 30), (p. 33), (p. 36).

In some cases, the sound will distort if you apply an effect while recording. Adjust the

input level while the effect is applied. You can also try adjusting the effect parameters

so that distortion does not occur.

Refer to: “Adjusting the input level”

(p. 30), (p. 33), (p. 36)

“Applying an effect”

(p. 52)

Problems with recording

R-1_egfis1.book 67 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Troubleshooting

Can’t record

Check the remaining space on your CompactFlash memory card. Recording is not

possible if there is little time remaining on the card. In recording-standby mode, the

screen shows the amount of remaining recordable time. An indication of

0:00:00

means

that there is no time left. Please check the display.

The R-1 can handle up to 255 files. Once the number of files in the CompactFlash card

reaches 255, you won’t be able to make any more recordings.

In this case, the R-1 will enter recording-standby mode, but you will return to the play

mode screen if you attempt to start recording by pressing the record button or play

button.

Refer to: “Recordable times on a CompactFlash card”

(p. 29)

Recording is not possible if the CompactFlash memory card is not inserted correctly. If

the display indicates

No Card

, the R-1 has not detected a CompactFlash memory card.

Turn off the power, and re-insert the CompactFlash memory card.

Refer to: “Memory card handling”

(p. 25)

Recording will not occur correctly if the input level specified by the

input volume

control

is too low. Please set the input level correctly.

Refer to: “Adjusting the input level”

(p. 30), (p. 33), (p. 36)

If you want to record via a connected mic, connect it correctly to the

mic input jack

You should also check the setting of the

mic type select switch

Refer to: “Mic input jack”

(p. 15),

“Line input jack”

(p. 15),

“Recording with the internal microphone”

(p. 29)

A CompactFlash memory card will not work correctly unless it has been formatted on

the R-1. If you used your computer to format the CompactFlash card, it may not be

formatted correctly for the R-1. In this case, recording will stop immediately after you

begin recording, an indication of

No Song

will appear, and recording will not be

possible.

Refer to: “Formatting a CompactFlash card”

(p. 27)

I used a monaural mic to record, but a stereo file was created

The R-1 normally records in stereo. Even if you connect a monaural mic and set the

Setup mode item Input Select to MONO, a stereo file will be created with the same

sound recorded on the left and right (L, R) tracks.

Even if I adjust the recording level, the sound is distorted

if I turn on the effect

Since some effects work by boosting a portion of the sound, they may cause the overall

volume of the song to increase. This may cause the sound to clip, producing distortion.

If this occurs, take either of the following actions.

• Lower the LEVEL value in the parameters of the effect

This will lower the overall volume, but the character of the effect will be

preserved.

• Lower the input volume to decrease the volume before the effect is applied

This is an easy adjustment to make, but may affect the character of the effect.

R-1_egfis1.book 68 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Troubleshooting

No sound

The

output volume

may be too low. Try gradually increasing the

output volume

Refer to: “Output volume”

(p. 16)

Make sure that your headphones or speakers are connected correctly.

Refer to: “Headphone/line output/digital output jack”

(p. 16)

“Getting ready to use the R-1”

(p. 18)

The CompactFlash memory card contains a song, but the R-1

won’t play it

Make sure that the file name is appropriate. The R-1 can’t use files with a name

beginning with “.” (period).

The R-1 can only play back files with a filename extension of .mp3 (MP3) or .wav

(WAV).

Refer to: “Types of files that the R-1 can handle”

(p. 28)

Can’t play back

Make sure that the file name is appropriate. The R-1 can’t use files with a name

beginning with “.” (period).

The R-1 can only play back files with a filename extension of .mp3 (MP3) or .wav

(WAV).

Also, playback is not possible if the file has been corrupted.

Refer to: “Types of files that the R-1 can handle”

(p. 28)

A song I didn’t want is played back

Could the PLAY MODE be set to Shuffle? If so, the R-1 will randomly select the song to

be played next. This will cause unexpected songs to be played.

Refer to: “PLAY MODE (Playback mode)”

(p. 43)

Problems with playback

R-1_egfis1.book 69 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Troubleshooting

Power won’t turn on

Make sure that the AC adaptor is connected correctly.

If you’re using batteries, check the polarity of the batteries, and make sure that each

battery is firmly seated in the holder. It is also possible that the batteries have run down;

try a fresh set of batteries.

Refer to: “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power”

(p. 19)

“Installing the batteries and turning on the power”

(p. 20)

If the R-1 will not turn on even though there is no problem with the AC adaptor or

batteries, it is possible that the R-1 has malfunctioned.

Please contact “Service Information” listed at the end of this manual.

My computer doesn’t detect the R-1 when I connect it

Your computer will not correctly detect the R-1 if no CompactFlash memory card is

inserted. If the R-1 does not appear on your computer desktop, check that a

CompactFlash memory card is correctly inserted.

Refer to: “Memory card handling”

(p. 25)

Pressing the MENU button doesn’t take me to Setup mode

You can’t enter Setup mode during playback or recording. Stop playback or recording,

and then press the

MENU button

to enter Setup mode.

If the R-1 is playing, recording, or in recording-standby mode, pressing the

button

won’t put you in Setup mode.

Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)”

(p. 54)

Backlight turns off

If you’re using the R-1 on batteries, the backlight may turn off when the R-1 has not been

operated for a certain length of time, depending on the LCD Backlight setting.

Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)”

(p. 54)

The R-1 goes to sleep

If you’re using the R-1 on batteries, it may go to sleep if no operation has been

performed for a certain length of time, depending on the Sleep Timer setting. You can

use Setup mode 11 Sleep Timer to change this setting.

Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)”

(p. 54)

The settings I made have disappeared

If all of the effects and Setup mode settings you made have returned to their original

state, it is possible that you inadvertently restored the R-1 to its factory-set state.

Refer to: “Restoring the factory settings”

(p. 65)

Other problems

R-1_egfis1.book 70 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Troubleshooting

I used a USB cable to connect the R-1 to my computer, but it

was not detected

If the R-1 is in Setup mode, it will not be detected by your computer. Unplug the USB

cable that connects the R-1 to your computer, exit Setup mode, and make the connection

again.

Refer to: “Connecting the R-1 to your computer”

(p. 44)

The effect parameters I edited have been initialized

The effect parameter settings you edit are preserved as long as you don’t change the

effect type; if you change the effect type, the settings will revert to the initial values. If

you make detailed changes to an effect such as “Editable EQ,” we suggest that you write

down the settings on paper.

Refer to: “Applying an effect”

(p. 52)

When selecting a song, the song names are slow to appear

If a file is damaged or invalid, if an MP3 file is in a format that the R-1 does not support,

or if the file is very large, the R-1 may take some time to determine whether it is able to

play the file even if the file has an extension of .MP3 or .WAV.

This may cause the display to be slow when selecting files.

Refer to: “Types of files that the R-1 can handle”

(p. 28)

“Normal playback”

(p. 38)

Acoustic feedback occurs when monitoring through

headphones

If you’re using open-air type headphones to monitor the sound while recording,

moving close to the R-1 may allow sound from the headphones to be picked up by the

microphones, causing acoustic feedback. The R-1’s built-in microphones will pick up

even faint sounds, so be careful not to get too close.

Refer to: “Basic connections”

(p. 18)

R-1_egfis1.book 71 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1

fig.panel-1

Internes Mikrofon

Dies ist ein ins R-1 eingebautes Stereomikrofon.

Sie können das interne Mikrofon nicht benutzen, wenn ein Mikrofon oder ein anderes Gerät mit

einer der Buchsen für den

Mikrofoneingang

oder den

Standardeingang

verbunden

ist. Schließen Sie nichts an die anderen Eingangsbuchsen an, wenn Sie das interne Mikrofon

einsetzen wollen. Bei Aufnahme mit dem eingebauten Mikrofon stellen Sie den Mikrofontyp-

Wahlschalter auf DYN.

Hier werden verschiedene Informationen über den Betriebszustand des R-1 angezeigt.

EFFECT-Taste

Drücken Sie die

EFFECT-Taste

zum Ein- und Ausschalten eines Effekts.

Bei eingeschaltetem Effekt leuchtet die Taste rot.

Wenn Sie diese Taste vor oder während des Abspielens drücken, wird der Effekt auf den

wiedergegebenen Sound angewandt. Wenn Sie diese Taste vor oder während einer Aufnahme

drücken, wird der Effekt auf den eingespielten Sound angewandt, der mit dem Effekt

bearbeitete Sound wird also aufgenommen.

Das R-1 bietet verschiedene Effekte zur Veränderung des ausgegebenen oder aufgenommenen

Sounds an und gibt ihm so eine bessere Wirkung oder erlaubt komfortableres Hören. Sie

können den Sound auch zu einem völlig anderem Charakter transformieren.

EDIT-Taste

Benutzen Sie diese Taste für die Effekteinstellungen.

Detaillierte Hinweise zu Effekten finden Sie unter

“Using effects”

(S. 46). Effekteinstellungen

können Sie unabhängig von der Stellung der

Taste EFFECT

vornehmen.

MENU-Taste

Diese Taste wechselt in den Konfigurationsmodus, in dem Sie verschiedene Einstellungen des

R-1 vornehmen können. Hier können Sie den Kontrast der LCD-Anzeige einstellen, die

Aufnahmequalität bestimmen und verschiedene andere Grundeinstellungen des R-1

vornehmen. Details finden Sie unter

“Verschiedene Einstellungen”

(S. 90).

5 6

R-1_egfis1.book 72 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1

DISPLAY-Taste

Mit dieser Taste wird der Anzeigeinhalt des R-1 gewechselt.

Im PLAY-Modus wechselt die Taste nacheinander zur Anzeige der erfolgten

Abspielzeit, der verbleibenden Abspielzeit der aktuellen Songdatei, deren Dateityp und

der Bitrate.

Drücken Sie die

DISPLAY-Taste

zum Wechseln des Anzeigeinhalts.

PREV-Taste

Mit dieser Taste gehen Sie zum Anfang des Songs oder Sie wählen den vorhergehenden

Song aus.

Ein Druck auf diese Taste während eines Songs geht zum Anfang dieses Songs. Wenn

Sie bereits am Anfang (00:00) des Songs sind, führt Sie diese Taste zum vorhergehenden

Song. Mit kontinuierlichem Druck auf diese Taste können Sie zurückspulen.

Diese Operationen funktionieren während des Abspielens oder bei STOP.

NEXT-Taste

Mit dieser Taste wählen Sie den nächsten Song aus. Mit kontinuierlichem Druck auf

diese Taste können Sie vorspulen.

Diese Operationen funktionieren während der Wiedergabe oder bei STOP.

REPEAT-Taste

Mit dieser Taste können Sie den Bereich zwischen zwei im Song angegebenen Punkten

A und B wiederholt abspielen. Drücken Sie die Taste einmal zur Markierung des

Punktes „A“ und ein zweites Mal für Punkt „B“.

Zum Stornieren der Abspielwiederholung drücken Sie nochmals die

REPEAT-Taste

Mit der Stornierung der Abspielwiederholung löschen Sie beide Punkte A und B.

fig.repeat-a

Drücken Sie während des Abspielens einmal auf

die

REPEAT-Taste

Dieser Punkt wird der Startpunkt

der

Abspielwiederholung.

fig.repeat-b

Drücken Sie nochmals auf die

REPEAT-Taste

Dieser Punkt wird der Endpunkt

der

Abspielwiederholung.

fig.repeat-ab

Der Bereich zwischen den in Schritt 1 und 2 von

Ihnen angegebenen Punkten wird wiederholt

abgespielt. Zum Abbruch der Abspielwiederholung

drücken Sie erneut auf die

REPEAT-Taste

SPEED-Taste

Diese Taste halbiert die Abspielgeschwindigkeit. Drücken Sie die Taste nochmals zur

Rückkehr zur normalen Abspielgeschwindigkeit. Dies ist hilfreich, wenn Sie mit Musik

in ungewöhnlich schnellem Tempo arbeiten oder sehr schnelle Sprache abhören.

Song

R-1_egfis1.book 73 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1

fig.panel-2

STOP-Taste

Diese Taste stoppt Wiedergabe oder Aufnahme.

PLAY/PAUSE-Taste

Die Taste startet die Wiedergabe. Zusätzlich unterbricht sie Aufnahme und Wiedergabe.

Wenn Sie diese Taste während des Abspielens drücken, wird die Wiedergabe des R-1

unterbrochen und in der Anzeige

PLAY-PAUSE

angezeigt. Drücken Sie die

PLAY/PAUSE-

Taste

nochmals, um die Wiedergabe fortzusetzen.

Genauso können Sie mit dieser Taste Aufnahmen unterbrechen. In der Anzeige des R-1wird

dann

REC-PAUSE

stehen, gleichzeitig wird die

REC-Taste

rot blinken.

Zur Fortsetzung der Aufnahme aus der Aufnahmebereitschaft drücken Sie nochmals die

REC-

Taste

oder alternativ die

PLAY/PAUSE-Taste

. Die

REC-Taste

leuchtet bei der Aufnahme

rot.

REC-Taste

Bei gestopptem Gerät bringt die

REC-Taste

das R-1 in Aufnahmebereitschaft. In der Anzeige

des R-1wird dann

REC STANDBY

stehen, gleichzeitig wird die

REC-Taste

rot blinken.

Zum Beginn der Aufnahme aus der Aufnahmebereitschaft drücken Sie nochmals die

REC-

Taste

oder alternativ die

PLAY/PAUSE-Taste

. Die

REC-Taste

leuchtet bei der Aufnahme

rot.

VALUE-Regler

Benutzen Sie diesen Regler zur Auswahl der Songs, zur Bestimmung von Typen und Werten

von Effekten und zur Bedienung im Konfigurationsmodus.

EXIT-Taste

Mit dieser Taste kehren Sie im Konfigurationsmodus und im Effekteinstellungsmodus zum

vorherigen Punkt zurück. Im Konfigurationsmodus werden Ihre Eingaben gelöscht, wenn Sie

die

EXIT-Taste

vor der

ENTER-Taste

drücken.

ENTER-Taste

Mit dieser Taste wählen Sie im Effekteinstellungs- oder im Konfigurationsmodus Eingaben aus

oder schließen Änderungen ab.

5 6

R-1_egfis1.book 74 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1

Mikrofoneingang

Anschlussbuchse für ein Mikrofon.

Falls ein Kabel mit dem Standardeingang verbunden ist, wird kein

Audiosignal durch den Mikrofoneingang entgegengenommen.

Schalten Sie den

Mikrofonauswahlschalter

auf die passende Stellung, je

nachdem ob ein dynamisches Mikrofon oder ein über den Anschluss versorgtes

Kondensatormikrofon mit Ministecker angeschlossen ist.

Stereomikrofone werden unterstützt, nutzen Sie für die Verbindung ein Kabel mit

Stereo-Ministecker. Falls Sie ein Mono-Mikrofon einsetzen, setzen Sie im

Konfigurationsmodus die Einstellung

“10 Input Select”

auf

MONO

. Detaillierte

Hinweise zu dieser Einstellung finden Sie unter

“Systemeinstellungen

(Konfigurationsmodus)”

(S. 90).

Standardeingang

Wenn Sie Audiosignale von Audiogeräten oder Musikinstrumenten ins R-1 eingeben

wollen, benutzen Sie Stereo-Ministecker zu deren Anschluss an diese Buchse.

Mikrofonauswahlschalter

Schalten Sie diesen Schalter in die passende Stellung, je nach dem Typ des am

Mikrofoneingang

angeschlossenen Mikrofons.

Eingangsregler

Hier wird die Eingangslautstärke des Sounds der eingebauten Mikrofone , des

Mikrofoneingangs

oder der

Standardeingänge

geregelt.

Nehmen Sie die Einstellung mit dem in

“Einstellung des Eingangsreglers”

(S. 80)

beschriebenen Verfahren unter Beobachtung der Eingangsempfindlichkeit vor.

USB-Anschluss

Sie können das im Lieferumfang enthaltene USB-Kabel an Ihren Computer anschließen.

Wenn das R-1 an Ihren Computer angeschlossen ist, können Songdateien übertragen

oder auf ihren Computer kopiert werden. Sie können auch MP3- oder WAV-Dateien

vom Rechner zum R-1 transferieren oder kopieren, so dass sie dort abgespielt werden

können.

Der Anschluss unterstützt „Hi-Speed“-USB 2.0 und erlaubt so einen schnellen

Dateitransfer.

Wenn Sie das R-1 mit Ihrem Computer verbinden wollen, berücksichtigen Sie bitte auch

“Connecting the R-1 to your computer”

(S. 44).

Wenn Ihr Rechner das R-1 korrekt erkannt hat, steht in der Anzeige des R-1

Connected

via USB

DYN

Wählen Sie beim Anschluss eines dynamischen Mikrofons diese Einstellung.

Wenn Sie das eingebaute Mikrofon verwenden, stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf

DYN.

CND

Diese Einstellung ist für den Anschluss eines kleinen Kondensatormikrofons, das

eine Stromversorgung benötigt. Sie müssen ein „steckerbetriebenes“ Mikrofon be-

nutzen. Diese Buchse liefert eine Versorgungsspannung von 2 V.

* Schließen Sie keine anderen Mikrofone oder Geräte außer „steckerbetriebenen“

Mikrofonen an, wenn dieser Schalter auf „CND“ steht. Andere Mikrofontypen

oder Geräte könnten beschädigt werden.

R-1_egfis1.book 75 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1

Bei bestehender Verbindung zwischen einem Computer und dem R-1 sind

alle Funktionalitäten des R-1 außer dem Netzschalter unwirksam; die

Bedienung von Tasten und Reglern bleibt wirkungslos.

fig.panel-3

Netzschalter

Schaltet das Gerät an und aus.

Schalten Sie das Gerät bei laufender Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe nicht aus.

Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem Ausschalten, dass Wiedergabe oder Aufnahme gestoppt

sind.

• Falls Sie das Gerät während einer Aufnahme versehentlich ausschalten, werden die

aufgenommenen Daten nicht in der CompactFlash-Karte gespeichert.

• Die CompactFlash-Karte kann beschädigt werden, wenn das R-1 bei Lese- oder

Schreiboperationen wie Wiedergabe oder Aufnahme ausgeschaltet wird.

• Wird das R-1 während einer Anzeige „Now working...“ (In Arbeit...) im

Effekteinstellungsmodus oder beim Speichern einer Einstellung im

Konfigurationsmodus ausgeschaltet, wird das Gerät unstabil und kann womöglich

nicht mehr starten.

Achten Sie daher genau darauf, das Gerät in diesen Zuständen nicht abzuschalten.

Netzanschluss

Schließen Sie hier das Netzteil an.

HOLD-Schalter

Wenn Sie den

HOLD-Schalter

auf ON stellen, werden Tastenbetätigungen auf dem R-

1 wirkungslos; damit kann das Gerät bequem vor versehentlicher Bedienung geschützt

werden.

Allerdings sind mit der Stellung des

HOLD-Schalters

auf ON

Mikrofonauswahlschalter

Eingangsregler

Netzschalter

und

Lautstärkeregler

weiter bedienbar.

Lautstärkeregler

Hier wird die Lautstärke der Buchse für

Kopfhörer, Standardausgang und

Digitalausgang

eingestellt. Allerdings ist die digital ausgegebene Lautstärke

damit nicht regelbar.

Buchse für Kopfhörer, Standardausgang und Digitalausgang

Dieser Ausgang gibt Audiosignale vom R-1 zu Kopfhörer oder externen Lautsprechern.

Wenn Sie ein Digitalsignal ausgeben wollen, müssen Sie ein rundes Digitalkabel mit

Ministecker benutzen.

Auswurftaste

Drücken Sie hier, um die CompactFlash-Karte aus der

Speicherkartenaufnahme

zu entfernen.

24 25 2623

R-1_egfis1.book 76 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1

Speicherkartenaufnahme

Setzen Sie hier eine CompactFlash-Karte ein.

Das R-1 kann als Speicherkarten ausschließlich den Typ CompactFlash verwenden.

fig.panel-4

Batteriefach

Wenn Sie das R-1 netzunabhängig betreiben wollen, können Sie hier Batterien einlegen.

Beim Betrieb des R-1mit Netzteil brauchen Sie keine Batterien.

Vor einem Wechsel der Stromversorgung vom Netzteil zur Batterieversorgung und

umgekehrt müssen Sie das R-1 ausschalten.

Bitte lesen Sie vor der Benutzung des R-1

“Installing the batteries and turning on the

power”

(S. 20).

Speicherkartenabdeckung

Diese Abdeckung bietet einen Schutz vor versehentlichem Entfernen der

CompactFlash-Karte. Wenn Sie die Klappe öffnen, sehen Sie die

Speicherkartenaufnahme

und die

Auswurftaste

R-1_egfis1.book 77 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Vorbereitungen zum Einsatz des R-1

Sie müssen eine CompactFlash-Karte vor ihrem Einsatz im R-1formatieren.

Sie müssen die CompactFlash-Karte mit dem R-1 selbst formatieren. Wenden Sie dazu das auf

S. 90 bei “Systemeinstellungen (Konfigurationsmodus)“ beschriebene Verfahren an.

Mit anderen Geräten als dem R-1 formatierte CompactFlash-Karten funktionieren im R-1

möglicherweise nicht richtig.

Schalten Sie das R-1 aus.

Setzen Sie die CompactFlash-Karte in die

Kartenaufnahme

des R-1 ein.

fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps

Schalten Sie das R-1 ein.

Falls die CompactFlash-Karte keine auf

dem R-1 abspielbaren Songdateien

enthält, wird in der Anzeige „NoSong“

angezeigt. Wenn die Karte Songdateien

enthält, erscheint die Anzeige für den

PLAY-Modus.

Drücken Sie die

MENU-Taste

* Zum Abbruch des Vorgangs drücken

Sie die

EXIT-Taste

. Sie werden zur

vorherigen Anzeige zurückkehren.

fig.format-disp.eps

Stellen Sie den

VALUE-Regler

auf die Auswahl

12 Format Card

Drücken Sie die

ENTER-Taste

fig.format.eps

Wenn die hier gezeigte Anzeige

erscheint, drücken Sie die

ENTER-

Taste

fig.sure.eps

Die Anzeige fragt nach einer

Bestätigung, ob Sie die Karte

wirklich formatieren wollen.

Drücken Sie die

ENTER –Taste

um die Karte zu formatieren.

* Zum Abbruch der Kartenformatierung drücken Sie die

EXIT-Taste

. Sie werden zu Schritt 5 zurückkehren.

Entfernen Sie niemals die CompactFlash-Karte während der Formatierung.

Das kann eine Beschädigung der Karte verursachen.

fig.complete.eps

Die Formatierung ist

abgeschlossen, wenn in der

Completed!

erscheint.

Drücken Sie die

MENU-Taste

Sie werden zum Hauptanzeige des PLAY-Modus zurückkehren.

Formatieren einer CompactFlash-Karte

R-1_egfis1.book 78 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Einfache Aufnahmemethoden

Die folgende Tabelle zeigt die ungefähren Aufnahmezeiten, die Sie mit CompactFlash-

Karten aufnehmen können.

Aufnahmezeiten auf CompactFlash-Karten

ungefähre Aufnahmezeit

Einheit: Minuten

* Die oben angegebenen Zeiten sind Näherungswerte. Die tatsächlich möglichen

Aufnahmezeiten können von diesen Angaben geringfügig abweichen. Lassen Sie bitte bei

Ihren Aufnahmevorhaben eine Reserve zu.

* Formatieren Sie die CompactFlash-Karte mit dem R-1 selber.

* Benutzen Sie bei langen zusammenhängenden Aufnahmen das mitgelieferte Netzteil.

* Falls es sich um mehrere Dateien handelt, wird die tatsächliche Gesamtaufnahmezeit

geringer als die hier angezeigten Werte sein.

fig.mic-LR.eps

Das interne Mikrofon des R-1 arbeitet stereophon. Die

von der rechten Seite des R-1 empfangenen

Audiosignale werden auf dem rechten Kanal (R)

aufgenommen, die von der linken Seite auf dem linken

Kanal (L).

Schließen Sie keine Kabel an die anderen

Eingangsbuchsen an, wenn Sie das interne

Mikrofon einsetzen wollen.

Wenn ein Mikrofon oder Mikrofonkabel am

Mikrofoneingang oder am Standardeingang

angeschlossen ist, werden diesen Eingängen

Priorität eingeräumt, so dass das interne

Mikrofon nicht benutzt wird.

Das Gerät muss ausgeschaltet sein. Stellen Sie auch den

Eingangsregler

auf die

Minimumposition.

Wenn Sie den Sound während der Aufnahme mit dem Einbaumikrofon hören wollen,

schließen Sie dazu einen Kopfhörer als Monitor an den entsprechenden Anschluss an. Falls

Sie externe Lautsprecher anschließen und als Monitor zu nutzen versuchen, kommt es zu

akustischen Rückkopplungen. Versuchen Sie nicht, Lautsprecher als Monitor einzusetzen.

CompactFlash Größe

Dateityp 64 MB 256 MB 512 MB 2 GB

WAV, 24 bit/44,1 kHz

15 31 125

WAV, 16 bit/44,1 kHz

23 47 188

MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps

102 208 831

MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps

128 260 1.039

MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps

170 346 1.386

MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps

205 416 1.663

MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps

256 520 2.079

MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps

341 693 2.772

MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps

130

512 1.040 4.158

Aufnahmen mit dem Einbaumikrofon

L R

R-1_egfis1.book 79 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Einfache Aufnahmemethoden

Schalten Sie das R-1 ein, so wie in

“Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on

the power”

(S. 19) beschrieben.

Bei Aufnahme mit dem eingebauten Mikrofon stellen Sie den Mikrofontyp-

Wahlschalter auf

DYN

Berücksichtigen Sie

“Types of files that the R-1 can handle”

(S. 28) und geben

Sie den Dateityp der gewünschten Aufnahme an. Nutzen Sie für die Änderung

oder Überprüfung der gegenwärtigen Einstellung im Konfigurationsmodus

Record Mode

(S. 90).

Stellen Sie den Eingangsregler wie folgt ein.

Einstellung des Eingangsreglers

fig.rec-1.eps

1. Drücken Sie die REC-Taste.

Das R-1 geht in

Aufnahmebereitschaft. Die

Anzeige zeigt die für den

gewählten Dateityp bzw. die für

dessen Aufnahmequalität verbleibende Zeit an.

* Der während der Aufnahmebereitschaft angezeigte Songname ist der Name der Datei, die

bei Abschluss der neuen Aufnahme erzeugt werden wird.

fig.rec-2.eps

Drücken Sie die DISPLAY-Taste.

Spielen Sie den Sound, den Sie

tatsächlich aufnehmen wollen,

und positionieren Sie das interne Mikrofon des R-1 so, dass es den Sound empfangen kann.

* Wenn Sie während der Aufnahme einen Effekt auf den Sound anwenden wollen, regeln Sie den

Eingangspegel bei eingeschaltetem Effekt ein.

fig.rec-3.eps

Steigern Sie langsam die

Eingangslautstärke

während

der Sound spielt.

Stellen Sie das Niveau so ein, dass

das

■

in der Anzeige des

Eingangsniveaus das ganz rechts

außen stehende

■

nicht erreicht. (Stellung in der obigen Abbildung)

Bei zu niedrigem Aufnahmeniveau können Sie keine sehr leisen Sounds aufnehmen. Bei zu

hohem Aufnahmepegel sind laute Sounds gestört und verursachen Knarzgeräusche in der

Aufnahme.

* Falls das Aufnahmematerial gelegentliche laute Soundspitzen wie z. B. Schlagzeugeinsätze in

Bandvorführungen oder plötzliches Lachen in einem sonst ruhigen Gespräch aufweist,

empfehlen wir den Einsatz des Begrenzers (06 Limiter, S. 90). Falls dieser eingesetzt werden soll,

regeln Sie den Eingangspegel auf das allgemeine Niveau des Aufnahmematerials ein, nicht auf

die gelegentlichen lauten Soundspitzen. Wenn Sie den Begrenzer verwenden, wird der

Eingangspegel automatisch so eingestellt, dass der Toneingangspegel nicht zu hoch wird. Bei

Verwendung des Begrenzsers sollten Sie den Eingangspegel so einstellen, dass das Symbol ■ in

Stellung in der Abbildung nur gelegentlich erscheint.

Verbleibende Aufnahmezeit

R-1_egfis1.book 80 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Einfache Aufnahmemethoden

fig.rec-time.eps

Drücken Sie die

REC-Taste

Die Aufnahme beginnt.

* Sie können die Aufnahme auch mit der

PLAY/PAUSE-Taste

starten.

Wenn Sie den

Eingangsregler

während der Aufnahmebereitschaft oder

während der Aufnahme verstellen, wird sich der Eingangspegel ändern.

Achten Sie darauf, den

Eingangsregler

nicht unabsichtlich zu verstellen.

Auch bei auf ON geschaltetem

HOLD-Schalter

ist der

Eingangsregler

nicht von der sperrenden HOLD-Funktion betroffen.

Nach Abschluss der Aufnahme drücken Sie die

STOP-Taste

Wenn Sie die Aufnahme unterbrechen wollen, drücken Sie die

PLAY/PAUSE-

Taste

. Zur Beendigung der Pause und zur Fortsetzung der Aufnahme drücken Sie

die

PLAY/PAUSE-Taste

erneut.

Die Aufnahmedaten werden in einer Datei auf der CompactFlash-Karte

gespeichert. Die Anzeige zeigt den Dateinamen der Aufnahme an, und diese Datei

wird selektiert.

* Der Dateiname wird automatisch nach folgendem Schema gebildet:

R1_0001.MP3

. Die

0001

ist die Zahl, die auf die Datei mit der höchsten Zahl auf der CompactFlash-Karte folgt.

* Die Datei wird auf der Rootebene der CompactFlash-Karte erzeugt. Verzeichnisse bzw.

Ordner werden nicht erzeugt.

* Da das R-1 über keine interne Uhr verfügt, haben alle Dateien ein Erzeugungsdatum vom

1.1.2002.

Um die gerade aufgenommene Datei anzuhören, drücken Sie die

PLAY/PAUSE-

Taste

. Informationen zu anderen Wiedergabemethoden finden Sie unter

“Wiedergabemethoden”

(S. 85).

Vergangene Zeit seit

Aufnahmebeginn

Wie der Eingangepegelmesser den Signalpegel anzeigt

Anzahl von

erscheinenden ■

Anzahl von

erscheinenden ■

Keine ∞ –– -50,0 8 -21,0 –– -18,0

1 -50,0 –– -40,0 9 -18,0 –– -15,0

2 -40,0 –– -36,0 10 -15,0 –– -12,0

3 -36,0 –– -33,0 11 -12,0 –– -9,0

4 -33,0 –– -30,0 12 -9,0 –– -6,0

5 -30,0 –– -27,0 13 -6,0 –– -3,0

6 -27,0 –– -24,0 14 -3,0 –– 0,0

7 -24,0 –– -21,0 15 0,0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 81 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Einfache Aufnahmemethoden

Das R-1 kann dynamische Mikrofone und diejenigen anschlussbetriebenen

Kondensatormikrofone mit Ministecker benutzen, die für die Aufnahmebuchse eines

Mini Disk-Recorders oder der Mikrofonbuchse eines Computers vorgesehen sind.

Wenn Sie ein Kondensatormikrofon einsetzen, muss dies für den

Anschlussbetrieb geeignet sein. Wenn Sie ein falsches Mikrofon oder ein

herkömmliches Stereomikrofon mit Ministecker anschließen, kann Ihr Gerät

beschädigt werden.

fig.conmic-LR.eps

Das Gerät muss ausgeschaltet sein. Stellen Sie den

Eingangsregler

auf die

Minimumposition.

Wenn ein Gerät am

Standardeingang

(Line input) angeschlossen ist, wird

das Eingangssignal vom

Mikrofoneingang

ignoriert. Wenn Sie über den

Mikrofoneingang

aufnehmen wollen, darf am Standardeingang kein Kabel

angeschlossen sein.

Schalten Sie das R-1 ein, so wie in

“Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on

the power”

(S. 19) beschrieben.

Geben Sie den Dateityp ihrer beabsichtigten Aufnahme an, so wie in

“Types of

files that the R-1 can handle”

(S. 28) beschrieben. Sie können im

Konfigurationsmodus mit

07 Record Mode

(S. 90) die gewünschte Einstellung

vornehmen oder die aktuelle Einstellung prüfen.

Schalten Sie den

Mikrofonauswahlschalter

auf den Typ des für den

Mikrofoneingang

vorgesehenen Mikrofons. ->

“Mikrofonauswahlschalter”

(S. 75)

Aufnehmen mit externem Mikrofon

Stereomikrofon

MIRCRO TYP

EINGANGSPEGEL

MIRCRO

R-1_egfis1.book 82 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Einfache Aufnahmemethoden

Schließen Sie Ihr externes Mikrofon am

Mikrofoneingang

an.

Wenn Sie den Sound während der Aufnahme hören wollen, schließen Sie dazu einen

Kopfhörer als Monitor an den entsprechenden Anschluss an. Falls Sie externe Lautsprecher

anschließen und als Monitor zu nutzen versuchen, kommt es zu akustischen

Rückkopplungen. Versuchen Sie nicht, Lautsprecher als Monitor einzusetzen.

Stellen Sie den Eingangsregler wie folgt ein.

Eingangsniveau anpassen

fig.rec-1.eps

1. Drücken Sie die REC-Taste.

Das R-1 geht in

Aufnahmebereitschaft. Die

Anzeige zeigt die für den

gewählten Dateityp bzw. die für

dessen Aufnahmequalität verbleibende Zeit an.

* Der während der Aufnahmebereitschaft angezeigte Songname ist der Name der Datei, die

bei Abschluss der neuen Aufnahme erzeugt werden wird.

fig.rec-2.eps

Drücken Sie die DISPLAY-Taste.

3. Spielen Sie den Sound, den Sie

tatsächlich aufnehmen wollen,

und positionieren Sie das externe Mikrofon so, dass es den Sound empfangen kann.

* Wenn Sie während der Aufnahme einen Effekt auf den Sound anwenden wollen, regeln Sie den

Eingangspegel bei eingeschaltetem Effekt ein.

fig.rec-3.eps

4. Erhöhen Sie langsam die

Aufnahmelautstärke.

Stellen Sie den Pegel so ein, dass

das ■ in der Anzeige des

Eingangsniveaus das am

meisten rechts stehende ■ nicht erreicht.

(Stellung in der obigen Abbildung)

Bei zu niedrigem Aufnahmeniveau können Sie keine sehr leisen Sounds aufnehmen.

Bei zu hohem Aufnahmepegel sind laute Sound gestört und verursachen

Knarzgeräusche in der Aufnahme.

* Falls Ihr Aufnahmematerial gelegentliche laute Soundspitzen enthält, wie z. B.

Schlagzeugeinsätze einer Bandvorführung oder plötzliches lautes Lachen in einem sonst ruhigen

Gespräch, empfehlen wir den Einsatz des Begrenzers (06 Limiter, S. 90). Falls dieser eingesetzt

werden soll, regeln Sie den Eingangspegel passend für das allgemeine Soundniveau ein, und

nicht auf die gelegentlichen Soundspitzen. Wenn Sie den Begrenzer verwenden, wird der

Eingangspegel automatisch so eingestellt, dass der Toneingangspegel nicht zu hoch wird. Bei

Verwendung des Begrenzsers sollten Sie den Eingangspegel so einstellen, dass das Symbol ■ in

Stellung in der Abbildung nur gelegentlich erscheint.

Verbleibende Aufnahmezeit

R-1_egfis1.book 83 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Einfache Aufnahmemethoden

fig.rec-time.eps

Drücken Sie die

REC-Taste

Die Aufnahme beginnt.

* Sie können die Aufnahme auch mit der

PLAY/PAUSE-Taste

starten.

Wenn Sie den

Eingangsregler

während der Aufnahmebereitschaft oder

während der Aufnahme verstellen, wird sich der Eingangspegel ändern.

Achten Sie darauf, den

Eingangsregler

nicht unabsichtlich zu verstellen.

Auch bei auf ON geschaltetem

HOLD-Schalter

ist der

Eingangsregler

nicht von der sperrenden HOLD-Funktion betroffen.

Nach Abschluss der Aufnahme drücken Sie die

STOP-Taste

Wenn Sie die Aufnahme unterbrechen wollen, drücken Sie die

PLAY/PAUSE-

Taste

. Zur Beendigung der Pause und zur Fortsetzung der Aufnahme drücken Sie

die

PLAY/PAUSE-Taste

erneut.

Die Aufnahmedaten werden in einer Datei auf der CompactFlash-Karte

gespeichert. Die Anzeige zeigt den Dateinamen der Aufnahme an, und diese Datei

wird selektiert.

* Der Dateiname wird automatisch nach folgendem Schema gebildet:

R1_0001.MP3

. Die

0001

ist die nächsthöhere Nummer der höchstnummerierten Datei auf der CompactFlash-

Karte.

* Die Datei wird auf der Rootebene der CompactFlash-Karte erzeugt. Verzeichnisse bzw.

Ordner werden nicht erzeugt.

Um die gerade aufgenommene Datei anzuhören, drücken Sie die

PLAY/PAUSE-

Taste

. Informationen zu anderen Wiedergabemethoden finden Sie unter

“Wiedergabemethoden”

(S. 85).

Vergangene Zeit seit

Aufnahmebeginn

Wie der Eingangepegelmesser den Signalpegel anzeigt

Anzahl von

erscheinenden ■

Anzahl von

erscheinenden ■

Keine ∞ –– -50,0 8 -21,0 –– -18,0

1 -50,0 –– -40,0 9 -18,0 –– -15,0

2 -40,0 –– -36,0 10 -15,0 –– -12,0

3 -36,0 –– -33,0 11 -12,0 –– -9,0

4 -33,0 –– -30,0 12 -9,0 –– -6,0

5 -30,0 –– -27,0 13 -6,0 –– -3,0

6 -27,0 –– -24,0 14 -3,0 –– 0,0

7 -24,0 –– -21,0 15 0,0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 84 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Wiedergabemethoden

Das R-1 hat keine internen Lautsprecher. Darum müssen Sie für das Hören der

Wiedergabe Kopfhörer oder Lautsprecher bereithalten.

Sie können den Kopfhöreranschluss des R-1 als optischen Digitalausgang (optical out)

zur Verbindung mit einem digitalen Audiogerät oder als Standardausgang (line

output) zur Verbindung mit Ihrem analogen Audiogerät nutzen.

Bevor Sie fortfahren, stellen Sie die Verbindungen mit den für Ihr Gerät passenden

Kabeln her. Berücksichtigen Sie

“Connecting headphones”

(S. 22),

“Connecting

digital speakers (digital devices)”

(S. 23) oder

“Connecting analog speakers

(analog devices)”

(S. 24).

Wenn die Anzeige ein Bild wie in der Illustration zeigt, wählen Sie mit dem

VALUE-Regler

eine Songdatei.

Drücken Sie die

PREV-Taste

, um zur vorherigen Songdatei zu gelangen, oder die

NEXT-Taste

, um zur nächsten Songdatei zu kommen.

* Falls die CompactFlash-Karte keine auf dem R-1 abspielbaren Song-Dateien enthält, wird in

der Anzeige „NoSong“ angezeigt.

Drücken Sie die

PLAY-Taste

( ) des R-1; die angezeigte Songdatei wird

abgespielt.

Stellen Sie den

Lautstärkeregler

langsam nach rechts bis auf ein angenehmes

Hörniveau..

* Der angezeigte Songname ist der Name der Datei. Er korrespondiert nicht mit dem Tag (der

Markierung) ID3 in der MP3-Datei.

* Songnamen werden in alphabetischer Reihenfolge nach folgender Buchstabenordnung und

nicht in der Reihenfolge ihrer Aufzeichnung angezeigt.

(Leerraum) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

* Falls die CompactFlash-Karte Ordner bzw. Unterverzeichnisse enthält, werden die Dateien

auf Rootebene zuerst angezeigt, gefolgt von den Dateien aus den Ordnern

(Unterverzeichnissen).

* Dateinamen, die mit einem „.“ beginnen, werden ignoriert und nicht angezeigt.

* Dateinamen mit anderen Endungen als .mp3 und .wav werden ignoriert und nicht

angezeigt.

Mehr Informationen über Dateien, die das R-1 aufnehmen und abspielen

kann, finden Sie unter

“Types of files that the R-1 can handle”

(S. 28).

Normale Wiedergabe

R-1_egfis1.book 85 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Wiedergabemethoden

Mit dieser Funktion können Sie einen Songabschnitt bei der Wiedergabe markieren und ihn

wiederholt abspielen.

Verfahren

Drücken Sie während des Abspielens

einmal auf die

REPEAT-Taste

().

Dieser Ort wird dem Beginn der

Wiederholung zugewiesen (Punkt

Drücken Sie nochmals auf die

REPEAT-Taste

. Dieser Ort wird

dem Ende der Wiederholung

zugewiesen (Punkt

fig.repeat-a

Der von Ihnen in den Schritten 1 und 2

angegebene Abschnitt zwischen den

Punkten A und B wird wiederholt

abgespielt. Zur Rückname der

Abspielwiederholung drücken Sie die

REPEAT-Taste

erneut.

Zum Löschen dieser Funktion

• Bei angegebenen Punkten

und

löscht das Drücken der

REPEAT-Taste

( ) die

Einstellungen für die Punkte

und

• Wenn Sie nach der Angabe des Punktes

die

STOP-Taste

drücken, also bevor Sie

einen Punkt

angegeben haben, wird der Punkt

gelöscht.

• Wenn Sie sowohl die Wiedergabe stoppen als auch die Wiederholungseinstellungen löschen

wollen, drücken Sie die

STOP-Taste

. Die Wiedergabe stoppt und die

Wiederholungseinstellungen der Punkte

und

werden gelöscht.

REPEAT A-B (Wiedergabewiederholung)

Song

Hinweise

* Wenn Sie nach der Angabe des Punktes A die STOP-Taste drücken, also bevor Sie einen

Punkt B angegeben haben, wird der Punkt A gelöscht.

* Wenn Sie nach der Angabe des Punktes A die Wiedergabe bis zum Ende des Songs laufen lassen,

liegt die Wiederholung zwischen Punkt A und dem Ende des Songs.

* Wenn Sie die STOP-Taste während der Wiederholung drücken, stoppt die Wiederholung und

die Einstellung für den Abschnitt (A-B) wird gelöscht.

R-1_egfis1.book 86 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Wiedergabemethoden

Hier wird erklärt, wie Sie mit halber Geschwindigkeit abspielen können.

Verfahren

Drücken Sie während des

Abspielens oder bei STOP die

SPEED-Taste

Die untere Zeile der Anzeige zeigt

1/2

und die Wiedergabe erfolgt mit

halber

Geschwindigkeit

Wenn das R-1 gerade abspielt, wird die Wiedergabe verlangsamt.

Wenn das R-1 gerade gestoppt ist, wird die Wiedergabe mit halber

Geschwindigkeit beginnen, wenn Sie die

PLAY-Taste

drücken.

* Die Funktion verstellt die Tonhöhe der verlangsamten Wiedergabe so, dass sie der bei

normaler Wiedergabe entspricht. Dies kann einen Schwebungseffekt bei der Wiedergabe

erzeugen, der jedoch keine Fehlfunktion bedeutet.

To cancel this function

Wenn die

Wiedergabe in halber Geschwindigkeit

aktiviert ist, drücken Sie die

SPEED-Taste

zu deren Abbruch.

Wenn Sie die verlangsamte Wiedergabe nicht abbrechen, wird auch der

nächste Song verlangsamt abgespielt.

1/2 PLAY

(halbierte Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit)

R-1_egfis1.book 87 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Wiedergabemethoden

Hier können Sie die Reihenfolge und die Methode der Wiedergabe angeben.

Drücken Sie die

MENU-Taste

Sie können den PLAY-Modus während des Spielens des R-1 nicht ändern.

Sie müssen erst die

STOP-Taste

zum Anhalten der Wiedergabe drücken.

Stellen Sie am VALUE-Regler

05 Play Mode

ein.

Drücken Sie die

ENTER-Taste

Stellen Sie mit dem

VALUE-Regler

den gewünschten PLAY-Modus ein.

fig.sequential.eps

Drücken Sie nach der Auswahl des

gewünschten PLAY-Modus die

ENTER-Taste

Drücken Sie die

MENU-Taste

Sie werden zum PLAY-Modus zurückkehren.

PLAY MODE (Wiedergabemodus)

Sequential

Die Songs werden nacheinander in der Reihenfolge 001, 002, 002...009 ab-

gespielt.

* Benutzen Sie die Tasten PREV und NEXT oder den VALUE-Regler zur

Auswahl einer Songdatei.

Single

Die einzelne selektierte Songdatei wird wiederholt abgespielt.

Shuffle

Die Reihenfolge der Songs ändert sich automatisch.

* Ein unmittelbar vorher abgespielter Song wird nicht gespielt.

* Wenn Sie die Tasten PREV und NEXT oder den VALUE-Regler zur Auswahl

eines Songs benutzen, werden die Songs in der gleichen Reihenfolge angebo-

ten, wie sie auch PLAY-Modus

Sequential

erscheinen.

R-1_egfis1.book 88 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Einsatz von Effekten

Dieser Abschnitt erklärt die Anwendung eines Effekts während der Wiedergabe oder

bei Aufnahmebereitschaft. Sie können Effekteinstellungen auch vor der Wiedergabe

vornehmen oder verschiedene Einstellungen bei einer Probeaufnahme ausprobieren.

fig.effect.eps

Die Parametereinstellungen für Effekte werden bis zu Ihrer nächsten

Änderung gespeichert.

Anwenden eines Effekts

Beim Abspielen in

Aufnahmebereitschaft

Wählen Sie einen Effekt

Änderungsmodus

Wählen Sie einen Parameter

Typ -> Level 1

Editieren eines Parameters

Pop -> Dance

-> HipHop...

Den Editiermodus für

Effekte verlassen

Wiedergabe

/Aufnahme starten

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

ENTEREXIT

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

EXITEXIT

01:Eazy EQ

-> 02:For Speech...

Effektmodus an

EDIT

R-1_egfis1.book 89 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Verschiedene Einstellungen

Details zu diesen Einstellungen finden Sie in

“Procedures”

(S. 56).

* Sie können aus laufender Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe und aus der Aufnahmebereitschaft

mit der

MENU-Taste

nicht in den Konfigurationsmodus gelangen.

Systemeinstellungen (Konfigurationsmodus)

Menü/Effekt

Wert

(Voreinstellung

ist fett gedruckt)

Verfahren

LCD Contrast

Stellt den Kontrast der Anzeige ein.

1–

–10 A (S. 56)

LCD Backlight

Gibt die Zeitspanne vor, nach der die Anzeigen-

beleuchtung bei Batteriebetrieb abgeschaltet

wird.

OFF, ON,

5sec

10sec, 20sec

A (S. 56)

Delete File

Löscht eine Datei.

–– B (S. 58)

Rename File

Ändert einen Dateinamen.

–– C (S. 60)

Play Mode

Gibt die Reihenfolge vor, nach der Songs ab-

gespielt werden.

Sequential

Single, Shuffle

A (S. 56)

Limiter

Schaltet den Begrenzer für den Eingangspegel an

und aus.

* Der Begrenzer reduziert den Eingangspegel bei

zu starkem Niveau auf ein passendes Maß.

Der Schwellwert ist –9 dBFS.

OFF

, ON

A (S. 56)

Record Mode

Gibt den Dateityp der bei einer Aufnahme er-

zeugten Datei vor. Dies bestimmt die Audioqua-

lität der aufgenommenen Datei.

MP3 64kbps,

MP3 96kbps,

MP3 128kbps,

MP3 160kbps,

MP3 192kbps

MP3 256kbps,

MP3 320kbps,

WAV 16bit,

WAV 24bit

A (S. 56)

Track Splitting

Schaltet die Tracktrennungsfunktion an und aus.

* Diese Funktion spaltet die Datei automatisch

auf, wenn während der Aufnahme ein mindes-

tens drei Sekunden langes Ruheintervall auft-

ritt.

OFF

, ON

A (S. 56)

Schnitt-Niveau

Schwellwert-Niveau

Niveau des Eingangsignals

Schnittgeräusche

reduzieren und an

AD-Konverter weiterleiten

AD-N iveau

R-1_egfis1.book 90 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Verschiedene Einstellungen

Input Monitor

Schalten Sie diese Funktion ein, wenn Sie das

Eingangssignal über Kopfhörer überwachen.

Schalten Sie aus, wenn das Signal nicht über-

wacht wird.

* Während der Aufnahme kann der Sound unab-

hängig von dieser Einstellung gehört werden.

OFF

, ON A (S. 56)

Input Select

Setzen Sie diese Einstellung beim Anschluss eines

Stereomikrofons auf STEREO. Setzen Sie diese

Einstellung beim Anschluss eines Mono-Mikro-

fons auf MONO. Wenn Sie die STEREO-

Einstellung mit einem MONO-Signal nutzen,

wird nur der linke Kanal aufgenommen. Bei

MONO-Einstellung wird der Sound auf dem

rechten und linken Kanal aufgenommen.

* Die aufgenommene Datei hat auch bei MONO-

Einstellung ein STEREO-Format.

STEREO

, MONO

A (S. 56)

Sleep Timer

Gibt die Zeitspanne vor, nach der das R-1 bei Bat-

teriebetrieb in den Schlafmodus geht.

* Diese Einstellung bewirkt bei Netzbetrieb

nichts.

OFF, 1min, 2min,

3min

, 5min,

10min, 15min,

30min, 45min,

60min

A (S. 56)

Format Card

Formatiert eine CompactFlash-Karte

– D (S. 62)

Firmware Ver1.00

Erlaubt die Versionsprüfung der Firmware des R-

– E (S. 64)

About the R-1

Zeigt Informationen über das R-1 an.

– A (S. 56)

Menü/Effekt

Wert

(Voreinstellung

ist fett gedruckt)

Verfahren

R-1_egfis1.book 91 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Commandes et connecteurs

Figure panneau 1

Microphone interne

Microphone stéréo intégré

Ce microphone interne est désactivé lorsqu’un microphone ou autre appareil est

branché sur les

entrées micro

les entrées ligne

. Il convient donc de ne

rien raccorder aux connecteurs d’entrée si l’on veut utiliser le microphone interne. Pour

enregistrer à l'aide du microphone interne, placer le bouton de sélection de type de mi-

crophone à DYN.

Afficheur

Tient l’utilisateur informé de l’état d’exécution du R-1.

Touche EFFECT

Appuyer sur la

touche EFFECT

pour activer/désactiver un effet.

Cette touche s’allume lorsque l’effet est activé.

Si l’effet est activé avant lecture ou en cours de lecture, il est appliqué à l’enregistrement

lors de la lecture. S’il est activé avant enregistrement ou en cours d’enregistrement, il

est appliqué au son enregistré, c’est-à-dire que l’enregistrement intègre le traitement ré-

sultant de l’effet.

Le R-1 est doté de divers effets permettant de modifier le son en lecture ou en enregis-

trement afin de lui donner plus de présence ou d’en rendre l’écoute plus agréable. Ces

effets permettent par ailleurs de transformer complètement le son.

Touche EDIT

Cette touche donne accès au paramétrage des effets.

Pour plus d’information sur les effets, se reporter à

“Using effects”

(p. 46). Le

paramétrage des effets est possible que la

touche EFFECT

soit activée ou non.

Touche MENU

Cette touche permet de sélectionner le mode de paramétrage de l’appareil (« Setup ») :

contraste de l’afficheur à cristaux liquides (LCD), sélection de la qualité d’enregistre-

ment et divers autres réglages globaux (cf.

“Paramétrages divers”

(p. 110)).

5 6

R-1_egfis1.book 92 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Commandes et connecteurs

Touche DISPLAY

Cette touche commute les différents écrans de l’afficheur du R-1.

En mode PLAY (lecture), cette touche fait défiler les paramètres suivants : temps de lec-

ture écoulé, temps de lecture restant pour le fichier en cours, type de fichier et débit.

Appuyer sur la

touche DISPLAY

pour faire défiler les différents paramètres.

Touche PREV

Cette touche permet de revenir au début du fichier en cours ou de sélectionner le précé-

dent.

En cours de lecture d’un fichier, elle permet de revenir au début de celui-ci. Si le lecteur

est déjà calé sur le début du fichier (00:00), cette touche sélectionne le fichier précédent.

Il suffit d’appuyer longuement sur cette touche pour revenir au premier des fichiers en

mémoire.

Ces opérations sont possibles en cours de lecture ou non.

Touche NEXT

Cette touche permet de sélectionner le fichier suivant. Il suffit d’appuyer longuement

sur cette touche pour faire défiler les fichiers vers l’avant.

Ces opérations sont possibles en cours de lecture ou non.

Touche REPEAT

Permet la lecture en boucle d’une partie d’un fichier située entre deux points (A - B)

définis par l’utilisateur. Appuyer une fois sur cette touche pour définir le point “A”, et

une nouvelle fois pour définir le point “B”.

Une troisième pression sur cette touche annule la lecture en boucle et efface les points

A et B.

Figure Repeat-a

En cours de lecture, appuyer sur la

touche

REPEAT

de manière à définir le point de départ (point

) de

la boucle.

Figure Repeat-b

Appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la

touche REPEAT

pour définir le point d’arrivée (point

Figure Repeat-ab

L’appareil lit en boucle la partie du fichier située en-

tre les deux points ainsi définis aux étapes 1 et 2.

Pour annuler la lecture en boucle, appuyer une nou-

velle fois sur la

touche REPEAT

Touche SPEED

Cette touche met la lecture en mode demi-vitesse. Appuyer une nouvelle fois pour re-

passer en vitesse normale. Cette fonction permet de jouer sur un morceau de musique

au tempo trop rapide ou d’écouter dans un plus grand confort un enregistrement d’une

personne parlant très vite.

Song

R-1_egfis1.book 93 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Commandes et connecteurs

Figure panneau 2

Touche STOP

Interrompt lecture ou enregistrement.

Touche PLAY/PAUSE

Cette touche permet de lancer la lecture, mais également de mettre en mode « pause »

enregistrement ou lecture.

En cours de lecture, cette touche met l’appareil en pause, l’afficheur indiquant

PLAY-

PAUSE

. Il suffit d’appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche pour relancer la lecture.

De même, en cours d’enregistrement, cette touche permet d’interrompre brièvement ce

dernier. L’afficheur indique alors

REC-PAUSE

, et la

touche REC (enregistrement)

émet une lumière rouge clignotante.

Pour relancer l’enregistrement, appuyer de nouveau sur la

touche REC

(ou appuyer

sur la

touche PLAY/PAUSE

). La

touche REC

émet une lumière rouge clignotante

durant l’enregistrement.

Touche REC

L’appareil étant à l’arrêt, la

touche REC

le met en mode pause enregistrement (« re-

cording-standby »). L’afficheur indique alors

REC STANDBY

, et la

touche REC (en-

registrement)

émet une lumière rouge clignotante.

Pour lancer l’enregistrement à partir du mode pause enregistrement, appuyer de nou-

veau sur la

touche REC

(ou appuyer sur la

touche PLAY/PAUSE

). En cours d’enreg-

istrement, la

touche REC

émet une lumière rouge.

Molette VALUE

Cette molette sert à la sélection des fichiers, au choix des effets et à leur réglage, ainsi

qu’à la sélection des options du mode de paramétrage de l’appareil.

Touche EXIT

Cette touche permet de revenir au paramètre précédent en mode Effect Edit (réglage ef-

fets) ou Setup (paramétrage). En mode Setup, toute modification des paramètres est an-

nulée si l’on appuie sur la

touche EXIT

avant d’avoir appuyé sur la

touche ENTER

Touche ENTER

Permet de sélectionner un paramètre ou de finaliser une modification effectuée en mode

Effect Edit ou Setup.

5 6

R-1_egfis1.book 94 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Commandes et connecteurs

Connecteur d’entrée microphone

Réservé au branchement d’un microphone

Si un câble est branché sur la prise d’entrée ligne, aucun signal audio ne passe

par cette prise microphone.

Mettre le sélecteur de

type de micro (“mic type”)

sur la position correspondant

au type de microphone branché (microphone électro-dynamique ou mini-micro élec-

trostatique à alimentation fantôme).

Le connecteur prend en charge les micros stéréo ; utiliser un adaptateur stéréo de type

mini-jack. Si le microphone est de type monophonique, mettre le paramètre

10 Input

Select

(mode Setup) sur

MONO

. Pour plus d’information sur ce réglage, se reporter

“Paramétrage système (mode Setup)”

(p. 110).

Entrée ligne

Le branchement des sorties audio d’un appareil audio ou d’un instrument de musique

sur le R-1 doit se faire sur cette prise par l’intermédiaire d’un câble stéréo de type mini-

jack.

Sélecteur de type de microphone (“mic type”)

Mettre ce sélecteur sur la position correspondant au type de microphone branché sur

l’entrée

mic input

Volume d’entrée

Règle le volume d’entrée du microphone intégré ,

de l’entrée micro

de l’en-

trée ligne

Régler ce niveau selon la méthode décrite à la rubrique

“Réglage du niveau d’entrée”

(p. 100) tout en surveillant le niveau d’entrée.

Connecteur USB

Ce connecteur permet de brancher l’appareil sur un ordinateur par le biais du câble USB

fourni.

Une fois le R-1 branché sur l’ordinateur, il est possible de transférer ou copier sur ce

dernier les fichiers sons enregistrés à l’aide de l’appareil. Inversement, il est possible de

transférer ou de copier des fichiers .mp3 ou .wav présents sur l’ordinateur de manière

à les faire lire par le R-1.

Ce connecteur prend en charge la norme USB 2.0 (USB haut débit), assurant un charge-

ment rapide.

La marche à suivre pour brancher le R-1 sur un ordinateur figure à la rubrique

“Con-

necting the R-1 to your computer”

(p. 44).

Une fois le R-1 “reconnu” par l’ordinateur, l’afficheur du R-1 indique

Connected via

USB

Pour la durée de la connexion avec l’ordinateur, toutes les fonction du R-1 (in-

terrupteur de marche/arrêt excepté) sont désactivées (ses divers commu-

tateurs et touches ne fonctionnent pas).

DYN

Utiliser ce paramètre si le microphone est de type électro-dynamique.

Si le microphone interne est utilisé, régler à DYN.

CND

Utiliser ce paramètre si le micro est de type électrostatique à alimentation fantôme.

Le microphone doit impérativement nécessiter une alimentation fantôme : En ef-

fet, cette prise fournit une tension d’alimentation de 2 V.

* Si le sélecteur est sur la position CND, ne brancher aucun microphone ni aucun

autre appareil n’acceptant pas un telle alimentation fantôme, qui risquerait de les

endommager.

R-1_egfis1.book 95 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Commandes et connecteurs

Figure panneau 3

Interrupteur principal

Met l’appareil sous tension et hors tension.

Ne pas mettre l’appareil hors tension en cours de lecture ou d’enregistrement. Il faut im-

pérativement s’assurer que lecture et enregistrement sont coupés avant toute mise hors

tension.

• En cas de mise hors tension accidentelle en cours d’enregistrement, les données enreg-

istrées ne sont pas mémorisées sur la carte CompactFlash.

• Celle-ci peut se trouver endommagée en cas de mise hors tension de l’appareil alors

qu’elle subit une opération de lecture ou d’écriture de données, c’est-à-dire pendant la

lecture ou l’enregistrement audio.

• En cas de mise hors tension du R-1 alors que l’indication Now working... est affichée

(modification du paramétrage d’un effet ou sauvegarde d’un paramètre modifié), le

R-1 cesse de fonctionner correctement et peut même ne plus redémarrer.

Il convient donc de faire en sorte de ne JAMAIS le mettre hors tension dans de telles

conditions.

Prise adaptateur secteur

Connecter l’adaptateur secteur sur cette prise.

Commutateur HOLD

commutateur HOLD

étant sur la position ON, les autres touches de l’appareil sont

désactivées, ce qui évite toute fausse manœuvre.

Exceptions : lorsque le

commutateur HOLD

est sur la position ON, le

sélecteur Mic

type

, le bouton

Input volume

, l’

interrupteur marche/arrêt

et le bou-

ton

Output volume

restent opérationnels.

Niveau de sortie (Output volume)

Ce bouton permet de régler le volume sonore du signal en sortie de la prise

casque/

sortie ligne/sortie numérique

(le niveau de la sortie numérique n’est toutefois

pas réglable).

Prise casque/sortie ligne/sortie numérique (Headphone/line

output/digital output)

Prise pour casque ou enceintes externes Pour exploiter le signal numérique, brancher un

câble optique avec prise mini.

Touche EJECT

Assure l’éjection de la carte CompactFlash introduite dans l’

emplacement pour

carte mémoire

Emplacement pour carte mémoire

Introduire une carte mémoire CompactFlash dans la fente.

Le R-1 prend uniquement en charge les cartes mémoire de type CompactFlash.

24 25 2623

R-1_egfis1.book 96 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Commandes et connecteurs

Figure panneau 4

Logement des piles

Installer les piles dans leur logement si le R-1 doit fonctionner sur piles. Si l’on entend

alimenter l’appareil à l’aide de son adaptateur secteur, il est inutile d’installer les piles.

Mettre impérativement le R-1 hors tension avant de passer d’un type d’alimentation

électrique à l’autre (adapteur secteur / piles et vice-versa).

Lire la rubrique

“Installing the batteries and turning on the power”

(p. 20) avant

toute utilisation du R-1.

Couvercle de l’emplacement pour carte mémoire

Ce couvercle évite toute éjection intempestive de la carte CompactFlash. Ce couvercle

dissimule l’

emplacement de la carte

ainsi que la

touche d’éjection

R-1_egfis1.book 97 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

Préparatifs avant utilisation du R-1

Avant utilisation dans le R-1, la carte CompactFlash doit être formatée.

Cette opération doit être effectuée à l’aide du R-1, selon la marche à suivre indiquée à la page 60

(Paramètres système - mode Setup).

Les cartes CompactFlash formatées sur un autre appareil que le R-1 risquent de ne pas fonction-

ner correctement avec ce dernier.

Mettre le R-1 hors tension.

Introduire la carte CompactFlash dans

l’emplacement prévu à cet effet

Figure startup.epsFigure no-song.eps

Mettre le R-1 sous tension.

Si la carte CompactFlash ne comporte

aucun fichier pouvant être lu par le R-

1, l’indication No Song s’affiche. Dans

le cas contraire, l’écran de lecture

(“play mode”) s’affiche.

Appuyer sur la

touche MENU

* Si l’on désire annuler l’opération, il suf-

fit d’appuyer sur la

touche EXIT

L’écran précédent s’affiche à nouveau.

Figure format-disp.eps

Tourner la

molette VALUE

manière à sélectionner l’option

Format Card

Appuyer sur la

touche ENTER

Figure format.eps

Lorsque l’écran ci-contre s’affiche,

appuyer sur la

touche ENTER

Figure sure.eps

Un écran de confirmation s’affiche.

Pour lancer le formatage de la

carte, appuyer sur la

touche

ENTER

* Pour annuler l’opération (pas de formatage de la carte), appuyer sur la

touche EXIT

. L’ap-

pareil revient à l’écran illustré au point 5.

Ne jamais éjecter la carte CompactFlash en cours de formatage. Cela pourrait endom-

mager la carte.

Figure complete.eps

Le formatage est terminé lorsque le

message

Completed!

s’affiche.

Appuyer sur la

touche MENU

L’écran principal (mode Play) s’affiche à nouveau.

Formatage d’une carte CompactFlash

R-1_egfis1.book 98 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

Méthodes d’enregistrement

Le tableau ci-dessous indique les durées d’enregistrement approximatives permises par

les différentes cartes CompactFlash.

Durées d’enregistrement sur carte CompactFlash

Durée d’enregistrement (approximative)

Unité : minute

* Les durées d’enregistrement ci-dessus sont approximatives. La durée d’enregistrement effective

peut varier légèrement ; il convient donc d’en tenir compte au moment des préparatifs d’enreg-

istrement.

* Le formatage de la carte CompactFlash doit être fait à l’aide du R-1.

* Pour un enregistrement continu et de longue durée, utiliser l’adaptateur secteur fourni.

* Si l’enregistrement est fait en plusieurs fichiers, la durée d’enregistrement totale sera inférieure

à celle indiquée ci-dessus.

Figure mic-LR.eps

Le R-1 est doté d’un microphone stéréo intégré. Les sons

captés sur le côté droit du R-1 sont enregistrés sur le ca-

nal de droite (R), et les sons captés sur le côté gauche

sont enregistrés sur le canal de gauche (G).

Ne rien raccorder aux connecteurs d’entrée (mi-

cro et ligne) si l’on veut utiliser le microphone

interne.

En cas de branchement d’un microphone ou

d’un câble sur la prise microphone ou sur l’en-

trée ligne, la prise ainsi utilisée devient prior-

itaire, le microphone intégré étant alors mis

hors circuit.

S’assurer que le R-1 est hors tension (interrupteur sur OFF). Régler le

volume

d’entrée

à zéro.

Pour entendre l’enregistrement au fur et à mesure, brancher un casque sur la

prise prévue à cet effet (Phones). Ne pas tenter de contrôler l’enregistrement

par le biais d’enceintes raccordées à l’appareil sous peine de déclencher une

réaction acoustique (“effet Larsen”).

Capacité de la carte

Type de fichier 64 Mo 256 Mo 512 Mo 2 Go

.wav, 24 bits/44,1 kHz

15 31 125

.wav, 16 bits/44,1 kHz

23 47 188

.mp3, 16 bits/320 kb/s

102 208 831

.mp3, 16 bits/256 kb/s

128 260 1,039

.mp3, 16 bits/192 kb/s

170 346 1,386

.mp3, 16 bits/160 kb/s

205 416 1,663

.mp3, 16 bits/128 kb/s

256 520 2,079

.mp3, 16 bits/96 kb/s

341 693 2,772

.mp3, 16 bits/64 kb/s

130

512 1,040 4,158

Enregistrement à l’aide du micro intégré

L R

R-1_egfis1.book 99 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

100

Méthodes d’enregistrement

Mettre le R-1 sous tension comme indiqué à la rubrique

“Connecting the AC

adaptor and turning on the power”

(p. 19).

Pour enregistrer à l'aide du microphone interne, placer le bouton de sélection de

type de microphone à

DYN

Sélectionner le type de fichier à enregistrer (cf.

“Types of files that the R-1 can

handle”

(p. 28)). Pour effectuer la sélection ou contrôler le type actuellement sélec-

tionné, utiliser l’option

07 Record Mode

(p. 110) du mode Setup.

Régler le niveau d’entrée comme indiqué ci-après.

Réglage du niveau d’entrée

Figure rec-1.eps

1. Appuyer sur la touche REC.

L’appareil passe en mode pause

enregistrement (« REC STAND-

BY »). L’afficheur indique la

durée d’enregistrement possible

pour la qualité sélectionnée.

* Le nom de fichier affiché en mode pause enregistrement est celui du fichier qui sera créé en

fin d’enregistrement.

Figure rec-2.eps

Appuyer sur la touche DISPLAY.

Jouer/produire les sons à enregis-

trer et positionner le R-1 de

manière à ce que son micro intégré

puisse les capter correctement.

* Pour traiter le son à l’aide d’un effet pendant l’enregistrement, régler le niveau d’entrée après

activation de l’effet.

Figure rec-3.eps

Lancer le son à enregistrer et

accroître progressivement le

vol-

ume d’entrée

Continuer d’accroître le niveau

d’entrée, de manière à ne pas af-

ficher le dernier segment de l’in-

dicateur à barres. (Position dans l'illustration ci-dessus.)

Si le niveau d’enregistrement est trop bas, l’appareil n’enregistrera pas les sons de très

faible volume. Si le volume d’enregistrement est trop élevé, les sons les plus forts

(crêtes) sont distordus, ce qui se traduit par des craquements tout au long des pistes en-

registrées.

* Si le son à enregistrer comporte des crêtes importantes (coups de grosse caisse dans le cas d’un or-

chestre, rire soudain dans le cas d’une conversation), il est recommandé d’utiliser le limiteur (06

Limiter,p. 110). Il est ainsi possible de régler le niveau d’entrée en fonction du niveau général du

son à enregistrer, sans tenir compte du niveau des crètes. Lorsque le limiteur est utilisé, le niveau

d'entrée audio est automatiquement ajusté pour ne pas atteindre un niveau trop élevé. Lorsque le

limiteur est utilisé, il est préférable d'ajuster le niveau d'entrée pour que le symbole

■

n'apparaisse

qu'occasionnellement en position .

Durée d’enregistrement restante

R-1_egfis1.book 100 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

101

Méthodes d’enregistrement

Figure rec-time.eps

Appuyer sur la

touche REC

L’appareil commence a enregistrer.

* Le lancement de l’enregistrement peut

également se faire à l’aide de la

touche

PLAY/PAUSE

Si l’on actionne le bouton de réglage du

volume d’entrée

en mode pause en-

registrement (“REC STANDBY”) ou en cours d’enregistrement, le niveau d’en-

registrement change. Il convient donc de veiller à ne pas toucher à ce bouton

par inadvertance. En outre, il faut savoir que ce bouton reste actif même si le

commutateur HOLD

est sur la position ON.

Pour mettre fin à l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la

touche STOP

Pour interrompre temporairement l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la

touche PLAY/

PAUSE

. Pour relancer l’enregistrement, appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la

touche

PLAY/PAUSE

Les données enregistrées sont mémorisées sous forme de fichier sur la carte mém-

oire. L’afficheur indique le nom de fichier de l’enregistrement, ce fichier étant sélec-

tionné.

* Ce nom de fichier est créé automatiquement selon le format suivant :

R1_0001.MP3

. Les

quatre chiffres (

0001

) correspondent au chiffre faisant suite au numéro de fichier le plus

élevé figurant sur la carte CompactFlash.

* Le fichier est créé au niveau « racine » de la carte CompactFlash. Aucun sous-répertoire ne

peut être créé.

* L’appareil n’étant pas doté d’une horloge interne, tous les fichiers ont la même date de créa-

tion, soit le 1er janvier 2002.

Pour écouter les données qui viennent d’être enregistrées, appuyer sur la

touche

PLAY/PAUSE

. D’autres modes de lecture existent - se reporter à

“Modes de lec-

ture”

(p. 105).

Temps écoulé depuis le

lancement de l’enregistrement

Indication du niveau du signal par l'indicateur de niveau

Nombre de ■ dB Nombre de ■ dB

Aucun ∞ –– -50,0 8 -21,0 –– -18,0

1 -50,0 –– -40,0 9 -18,0 –– -15,0

2 -40,0 –– -36,0 10 -15,0 –– -12,0

3 -36,0 –– -33,0 11 -12,0 –– -9,0

4 -33,0 –– -30,0 12 -9,0 –– -6,0

5 -30,0 –– -27,0 13 -6,0 –– -3,0

6 -27,0 –– -24,0 14 -3,0 –– 0,0

7 -24,0 –– -21,0 15 0,0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 101 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

102

Méthodes d’enregistrement

Le R-1 accepte les microphones électro-dynamiques et les mini-micros électrostatiques

à alimentation fantôme conçus pour être raccordés à la prise enregistrement d’un enreg-

istreur mini-disque (MD) ou à la prise microphone d’un ordinateur.

Si l’on utilise un microphone électrostatique, celui-ci doit impérativement être

du type à alimentation fantôme. Le branchement d’un microphone (y compris

microphone stéréo classique avec mini-jack) de type erroné peut endommager

le matériel.

Figure conmic-LR.eps

S’assurer que le R-1 est hors tension (interrupteur sur OFF). Régler le

volume

d’entrée

à zéro.

Si un câble ou appareil est raccordé à l’

entrée ligne

, le système ne prend pas

en compte l’entrée

microphone

. Il convient donc de ne rien raccorder à l’en-

trée ligne si l’on désire enregistrer par le biais de la

prise microphone

Mettre le R-1 sous tension comme indiqué à la rubrique

“Connecting the AC

adaptor and turning on the power”

(p. 19).

Indiquer le type de fichier à enregistrer (cf.

“Types of files that the R-1 can han-

dle”

(p. 28)). L’option

07 Record Mode

(p. 110) du mode Setup permet de définir

le paramètre voulu ou de contrôler le paramètre en vigueur.

Régler le

sélecteur Mic type

sur le type de microphone raccordé à l

entrée

micro

. ->

“Sélecteur de type de microphone (“mic type”)”

(p. 95)

Enregistrement avec microphone externe

Microphone stéréo

MIC TYPE

(type de microphone)

INPUT LEVEL

(niveau d’entrée)

MIC

R-1_egfis1.book 102 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

103

Méthodes d’enregistrement

Brancher le microphone externe sur l’

entrée micro (prise Mic input)

Pour entendre l’enregistrement au fur et à mesure, brancher un casque sur la

prise prévue à cet effet (Phones). Ne pas tenter de contrôler l’enregistrement

par le biais d’enceintes raccordées à l’appareil sous peine de déclencher une

réaction acoustique (« effet Larsen »).

Régler le niveau d’entrée comme indiqué ci-après.

Réglage du niveau d’entrée

Figure rec-1.eps

1. Appuyer sur la touche REC.

L’appareil passe en mode pause

enregistrement (“REC STAND-

BY”). L’afficheur indique la

durée d’enregistrement possible

pour la qualité sélectionnée.

* Le nom de fichier affiché en mode pause enregistrement est celui du fichier qui sera créé en

fin d’enregistrement.

Figure rec-2.eps

Appuyer sur la touche DISPLAY.

3. Jouer/produire les sons à enreg-

istrer et positionner le micro-

phone externe de manière à ce qu’il puisse les capter correctement.

* Pour traiter le son à l’aide d’un effet pendant l’enregistrement, régler le niveau d’entrée après

activation de l’effet.

Figure rec-3.eps

4. Accroître progressivement le

niveau d’entrée.

Continuer d’accroître le niveau

d’entrée, de manière à ne pas af-

ficher le dernier segment de l’in-

dicateur à barres. (Position

dans l'illustration ci-dessus.)

Si le niveau d’enregistrement est trop bas, l’appareil n’enregistrera pas les sons de très

faible volume. Si le volume d’enregistrement est trop élevé, les sons les plus forts

(crêtes) sont distordus, ce qui se traduit par des craquements tout au long des pistes en-

registrées.

* Si le son à enregistrer comporte des crêtes importantes (coups de grosse caisse dans le cas d’un or-

chestre, rire soudain dans le cas d’une conversation), il est recommandé d’utiliser le limiteur (06

Limiter, p. 110). Il est ainsi possible de régler le niveau d’entrée en fonction du niveau général du

son à enregistrer, sans tenir compte du niveau des crêtes.

Lorsque le limiteur est utilisé, le niveau d'entrée audio est automatiquement ajusté pour ne pas at-

teindre un niveau trop élevé. Lorsque le limiteur est utilisé, il est préférable d'ajuster le niveau

d'entrée pour que le symbole

■

n'apparaisse qu'occasionnellement en position .

Durée d’enregistrement restante

R-1_egfis1.book 103 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

104

Méthodes d’enregistrement

Figure rec-time.eps

Appuyer sur la

touche REC

L’appareil commence a enregistrer.

* Le lancement de l’enregistrement peut

également se faire à l’aide de la

touche

PLAY/PAUSE

Si l’on actionne le bouton de réglage du

volume d’entrée

en mode pause en-

registrement (“REC STANDBY”) ou en cours d’enregistrement, le niveau d’en-

registrement change. Il convient donc de veiller à ne pas toucher à ce bouton

par inadvertance. En outre, il faut savoir que ce bouton reste actif même si le

commutateur HOLD

est sur la position ON.

Pour mettre fin à l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la

touche STOP

Pour interrompre temporairement l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la

touche PLAY/

PAUSE

. Pour relancer l’enregistrement, appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la

touche

PLAY/PAUSE

Les données enregistrées sont mémorisées sous forme de fichier sur la carte mém-

oire. L’afficheur indique le nom de fichier de l’enregistrement, ce fichier étant sélec-

tionné.

* Ce nom de fichier est créé automatiquement selon le format suivant :

R1_0001.MP3

. Les

quatre chiffres (

0001

) correspondent au chiffre faisant suite au numéro de fichier le plus

élevé figurant sur la carte CompactFlash.

* Le fichier est créé au niveau « racine » de la carte CompactFlash. Aucun sous-répertoire ne

peut être créé.

Pour écouter les données qui viennent d’être enregistrées, appuyer sur la

touche

PLAY/PAUSE

. D’autres modes de lecture existent - se reporter à

“Modes de lec-

ture”

(p. 105).

Temps écoulé depuis le

lancement de l’enregistrement

Indication du niveau du signal par l'indicateur de niveau

Nombre de ■ dB Nombre de ■ dB

Aucun ∞ –– -50,0 8 -21,0 –– -18,0

1 -50,0 –– -40,0 9 -18,0 –– -15,0

2 -40,0 –– -36,0 10 -15,0 –– -12,0

3 -36,0 –– -33,0 11 -12,0 –– -9,0

4 -33,0 –– -30,0 12 -9,0 –– -6,0

5 -30,0 –– -27,0 13 -6,0 –– -3,0

6 -27,0 –– -24,0 14 -3,0 –– 0,0

7 -24,0 –– -21,0 15 0,0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 104 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

105

Modes de lecture

Le R-1 n’est pas doté de hauts-parleurs intégrés. Il convient donc d’y raccorder un

casque ou des enceintes.

La prise casque de l’appareil tient lieu tant de sortie numérique (Optical) pour brancher

un appareil numérique que de sortie ligne pour connecter un appareil analogique.

Avant toute chose, effectuer les branchements à l’aide du type de câble voulu. Se rap-

porter à

“Connecting headphones”

(p. 22),

“Connecting digital speakers (digital

devices)”

(p. 23), ou encore à

“Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)”

(p.

24).

L’écran de l’afficheur correspondant à celui de l’illustration ci-dessus, tourner la

molette VALUE

pour sélectionner le fichier audio voulu.

Appuyer sur la

touche PREV

pour passer au fichier précédent ou sur la

touche

pour passer au suivant.

* Si la mention “No Song” s’affiche, cela veut dire que la carte CompactFlash ne recèle aucun

fichier pouvant être lu par le R-1.

Appuyer sur la

touch PLAY

( ) ; l’appareil entame la lecture du fichier dont le

nom est affiché.

Tourner progressivement le bouton de

volume

vers la droite de manière à régler

ce dernier à un niveau confortable pour l’oreille.

* Le nom de fichier affiché par l’appareil est celui du fichier en cours de lecture. Il ne corre-

spond pas aux données ID3 du fichier .mp3.

* Les noms de fichiers sont affichés par ordre alphabétique, sur la base de la liste de caractères

ci-dessous, et non pas dans l’ordre dans lequel ils ont été enregistrés.

(espace) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

* Si la carte mémoire recèle des sous-répertoires, l’appareil affiche d’abord tous les fichiers

situés au niveau « racine », puis les fichiers présents dans les sous-répertoires.

* L’appareil ne tient pas compte de tout nom de fichier commençant par un point (« . »), et ne

l’affiche donc pas.

* Il en va de même de tout fichier dont l’extension est autre que « .mp3 » ou « .wav ».

Pour en savoir davantage sur les types de fichiers que le R-1 peut enregistrer

et lire, se reporter à

“Types of files that the R-1 can handle”

(p. 28).

Lecture normale

R-1_egfis1.book 105 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

106

Modes de lecture

Cette fonction permet de définir une zone d’un fichier devant être lue en boucle.

Marche à suivre

En cours de lecture, appuyer sur la

touche REPEAT

()

pour définir le point de départ de la

boucle (point

Appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la

touche REPEAT

pour définir le

point d’arrivée (point

Figure Repeat-a

L’appareil lit en boucle la zone ainsi

définie (située entre les points A et B

que l’on vient de créer).

Une troisième pression sur la

tou-

che REPEAT

annule la lecture en

boucle.

Annulation de la lecture en boucle

• Les points

étant définis, appuyer sur la

touche REPEAT

( ) pour

annuler la boucle (point

et point

• Si, après avoir défini le point

, on appuie sur la

touche STOP

avant d’avoir

défini le point

, le point

est supprimé.

• Pour couper la lecture et annuler simultanément la boucle, appuyer sur la

touche STOP

La lecture s’interrompt et la boucle (points

) sont supprimés.

REPEAT A-B (lecture en boucle)

Song

Remarques

* Si, après avoir défini le point A, on appuie sur la touche STOP avant d’avoir défini le point

B, le point A est supprimé.

* Si, après avoir défini le point A, on laisse la lecture se dérouler jusqu’au bout du fichier, l’ap-

pareil lit en boucle la zone située entre le point A et la fin du fichier.

* Si l’on appuie sur la touche STOP en cours de lecture en boucle, la lecture s’interrompt et

la boucle (A-B) est supprimée.

R-1_egfis1.book 106 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

107

Modes de lecture

L’appareil permet également une lecture à demi-vitesse.

Marche à suivre

À l’arrêt ou en cours de lecture,

appuyer sur la

touche SPEED

La ligne inférieure de l’afficheur in-

dique

1/2 PLAY

Si le R-1 est en train de lire un fichier, la vitesse de lecture est réduite de moitié.

Si le R-1 est à l’arrêt, la lecture à demi-vitesse commence dès que l’on appuie sur la

touche PLAY

* Cette fonction comprend en outre un ajustement automatique de la hauteur du son visant à

préserver la hauteur normale. On constate alors éventuellement un effet de pleurage qui est

une conséquence normale de ce traitement.

Annulation de la lecture en boucle

Si la fonction de

lecture à demi-vitesse

est active, appuyer sur la

touche SPEED

pour

la désactiver.

La lecture du fichier suivant se fait également à demi-vitesse tant que l’on

ne désactive pas cette fonction.

1/2 PLAY (lecture en mode demi-vitesse)

R-1_egfis1.book 107 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

108

Modes de lecture

Marche à suivre pour sélectionner le mode de lecture voulu

Appuyer sur la

touche MENU

Il n’est pas possible de passer d’un mode de lecture à un autre alors que le R-1 est

en cours de lecture.

Il faut donc commencer par appuyer sur la

touche STOP

Sélectionner

05 Play Mode

à l’aide de la molette VALUE.

Appuyer sur la

touche ENTER

Sélectionner le mode de lecture voulue à l’aide de la

molette VALUE

Figure sequential.eps

Après sélection du mode de lecture

voulu, appuyer sur la

touche

ENTER

Appuyer sur la

touche MENU

L’appareil revient à l’écran Setup Select - 05:PLAY MODE.

PLAY MODE (modes de lecture)

Sequential

(lecture

séquentielle)

L’appareil lit les fichiers par ordre numérique (001, 002, 003, etc.).

* Sélectionner le fichier voulu à l’aide des touches PREV et NEXT ou de la

molette VALUE.

Single

(fichier unique)

L’appareil lit indéfiniment le seul fichier sélectionné.

Shuffle (mode

aléatoire)

L’ordre de lecture des fichiers change automatiquement.

* Chaque fichier est lu une fois et une seule.

* Il reste possible de sélectionner un fichier à l’aide des touches PREV /

NEXT ou de la molette VALUE, les noms de fichier défilant dans le même

ordre qu’en mode

Sequential

R-1_egfis1.book 108 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

109

Utilisation des effets

Ce chapitre explique comment appliquer un effet en cours de lecture ou en mode pause

enregistrement. Il est également possible de paramétrer un effet avant de lancer la lec-

ture, et d’essayer divers réglages d’effets en effectuant un enregistrement test.

Figure effect.eps

Le paramétrage effectué est conservé tel quel jusqu’à modification ultérieure.

Application d’un effet

En cours de lecture

/En mode pause

enregistrement

Choix d’un effet

Mode Edit (modification)

Sélectionner un type

de paramètre -> Level1

Modification du paramètre

Pop -> Dance

-> HipHop...

Sortie du mode Edit

Lancement lecture

/enregistrement

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

ENTEREXIT

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

EXITEXIT

01:Eazy EQ

-> 02:For Speech...

Mode effets ON (activé)

EDIT

R-1_egfis1.book 109 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

110

Paramétrages divers

La marche à suivre pour ce type de paramétrage est décrite à la rubrique

“Procedures”

(p. 56).

* Lorsque l’appareil est en mode lecture, enregistrement ou pause enregistrement (“REC

STANDBY”), la

touche MENU

ne donne pas accès au mode Setup.

Paramétrage système (mode Setup)

Menu/effet

Valeur (valeur par

défaut en car-

actères gras)

Marche à

suivre

LCD Contrast

Réglage du contraste de l’affichage

1–

–10 A (p. 56)

LCD Backlight

Définition du délai après lequel le rétro-éclairage

de l’afficheur se coupe en cas d’alimentation sur

piles.

OFF, ON,

5 sec-

ondes

, 10 sec-

ondes, 20 secondes

A (p. 56)

Delete File

Suppression d’un fichier

–– B (p. 58)

Rename File

Modification du nom d’un fichier

–– C (p. 60)

Play Mode

Mode de lecture - détermine l’ordre de lecture des

fichiers.

Sequential

(ordre

numérique),

Single (lecture en

boucle d’un fichi-

er), Shuffle (lecture

par ordre aléa-

toire)

A (p. 56)

Limiter

Activation & désactivation du limiteur de niveau

d’entrée

* Le limiteur réduit le niveau d’entrée lorsqu’il at-

teint un seuil donné (niveau d’entrée excessif).

Ce seuil est de -9 dBFS.

OFF

, ON

A (p. 56)

Record Mode

Définition du type de fichier créé à l’enregistre-

ment Détermine la qualité audio du fichier enreg-

istré.

MP3 64 kb/s,

MP3 96 kb/s,

MP3 128 kb/s,

MP3 160 kb/s,

MP3 192 kb/s

MP3 256 kb/s,

MP3 320 kb/s,

WAV 16 bits,

WAV 24 bits

A (p. 56)

Seuil de distorsion

Seuil de limitation

Niveau d’entrée

Réduit la distorsion

et transmet le signal

au convertisseur A/N

Niveau A/N

R-1_egfis1.book 110 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

111

Paramétrages divers

Track Splitting

Activation et & désactivation de la fonction de di-

vision de fichier

* Cette fonction divise automatiquement en deux

fichiers tout enregistrement présentant un si-

lence d’au moins trois secondes (lors de l’enreg-

istrement).

OFF

, ON A (p. 56)

Input Monitor

Activer cette fonction lorsque l’on désire con-

trôler au casque le signal en entrée avant enregis-

trement. Dans le cas contraire, la désactiver.

* En cours d’enregistrement, l’écoute est possible

que cette fonction soit activée ou non.

OFF

, ON

A (p. 56)

Input Select

Sélectionner STEREO si le microphone raccordé

est stéréophonique. Sélectionner MONO si le mi-

crophone est monophonique. Si le paramètre

sélectionné est STEREO alors que le signal est

monophonique, l’enregistrement se fait unique-

ment sur le canal gauche (“L”). Si le paramètre

MONO est sélectionné, l’enregistrement se fait

sur les deux canaux (“L” & “R”)

* Le fichier est stéréophonique même si le

paramètre sélectionné est MONO.

STEREO

, MONO A (p. 56)

Sleep Timer

Minuterie de veille - définit le délai au bout du-

quel le R-1 entre en mode veille (alimentation

piles).

* Cette fonction est inopérante si l’appareil est

branché sur son adaptateur secteur.

OFF, 1 min, 2 min,

3 min

, 5 min, 10

min, 15 min, 30

min, 45 min, 60

min

A (p. 56)

Format Card

Formatage d’une carte CompactFlash

– D (p. 62)

Firmware Ver1.00

Permet de contrôler la version du système d’ex-

ploitation du R-1.

– E (p. 64)

About the R-1

Affichage de divers renseignements sur le R-1.

– A (p. 56)

Menu/effet

Valeur (valeur par

défaut en car-

actères gras)

Marche à

suivre

R-1_egfis1.book 111 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

112

Controlli e connettori dell’R-1

fig.panel-1

Microfono interno

È un microfono stereo integrato nell’R-1. Non è possibile utilizzare il microfono interno

se sono collegati un microfono o altri dispositivi ai

jack del microfono

o ai

jack di

ingresso di linea

. Se si desidera utilizzare il microfono interno, non effettuare

alcun collegamento agli altri jack di ingresso. Quando si registra attraverso il microfono

interno, impostare il tipo di microfono a DYN.

Display

Vengono visualizzate varie informazioni sullo stato di funzionamento dell’R-1.

Pulsante EFFECT

Premere il

pulsante EFFECT

per attivare/disattivare l’effetto.

Questo pulsante si illumina di rosso quando l’effetto è attivo.

Se viene attivato prima o durante la riproduzione, l'effetto è applicato al suono in

riproduzione. Se viene attivato prima o durante la registrazione, l’effetto è applicato al

suono immesso; in altre parole, viene registrato il suono elaborato dall’effetto.

L’R-1 mette a disposizione svariati effetti grazie ai quali è possibile modificare il suono

riprodotto o registrato, rendendo il suono più incisivo o l’ascolto più piacevole. È anche

possibile trasformare il suono fino a dotarlo di un carattere completamente nuovo.

Pulsante EDIT

Utilizzare questo pulsante per effettuare l’impostazione degli effetti.

Per maggiori informazioni sugli effetti, fare riferimento alla sezione

“Using effects”

(p.46). È possibile effettuare l’impostazione degli effetti a prescindere dallo stato del

pulsante EFFECT

Pulsante MENU

Questo pulsante seleziona il Setup mode, in cui è possibile eseguire varie impostazioni

dell’R-1. È possibile regolare il contrasto LCD, specificare la qualità di registrazione ed

effettuare varie altre impostazioni generiche dell’R-1. Per ulteriori informazioni, fare

riferimento alla sezione

“Impostazioni”

(p.130).

5 6

R-1_egfis1.book 112 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

113

Controlli e connettori dell’R-1

Pulsante DISPLAY

Cambia il contenuto di ciò che viene visualizzato sul display dell’R-1.

In PLAY mode, questo pulsante consente di passare dal tempo di riproduzione, al

tempo di riproduzione rimanente della canzone (file) attuale, al tipo di canzone (file), al

bit rate.

Premere il

pulsante DISPLAY

per cambiare il contenuto del display.

Pulsante PREV

Utilizzare questo pulsante per passare all’inizio della canzone oppure per selezionare

la canzone precedente.

Se si preme questo pulsante a metà di una canzone, si passa all’inizio di quella canzone.

Se si è già all’inizio (00:00) della canzone e si preme questo pulsante, si passa alla

canzone precedente. È possibile premere questo pulsante e tenerlo premuto per il

riavvolgimento rapido.

Queste operazioni sono disponibili durante la riproduzione o in fase inattiva.

Pulsante NEXT

Utilizzare questo pulsante per selezionare la canzone successiva. È possibile premere

questo pulsante e tenerlo premuto per l’avanzamento veloce.

Queste operazioni sono disponibili durante la riproduzione o in fase inattiva.

Pulsante REPEAT

Questo pulsante consente di effettuare la riproduzione ripetuta della parte di una

canzone fra due punti (A – B) prestabiliti. Premere questo pulsante una volta per

determinare il punto “A” e premerlo nuovamente per indicare il punto “B”.

Per annullare la riproduzione ripetuta, premere di nuovo il

pulsante REPEAT

Quando si annulla la riproduzione ripetuta, i punti A e B vengono eliminati.

fig.repeat-a

Durante la riproduzione, premere una volta il

pulsante REPEAT

Quel punto sarà l’inizio (punto

) della

riproduzione ripetuta.

fig.repeat-b

Premere il

pulsante REPEAT

ancora una volta.

Quel punto sarà la fine (punto

) della

riproduzione ripetuta.

fig.repeat-ab

La riproduzione dell’intervallo specificato nei passi

1 e 2 avrà luogo ripetutamente. Per annullare la

riproduzione ripetuta, premere ancora una volta il

pulsante REPEAT

Pulsante SPEED

Questo pulsante dimezza la velocità di riproduzione. Premerlo nuovamente per tornare

alla velocità normale. Questo pulsante è utile quando si suona con una musica ad un

tempo troppo veloce oppure quando si ascolta un discorso pronunciato rapidamente.

Song

R-1_egfis1.book 113 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

114

Controlli e connettori dell’R-1

fig.panel-2

Pulsante STOP

Questo pulsante arresta la riproduzione o la registrazione.

Pulsante PLAY/PAUSE

Questo pulsante avvia la riproduzione. Mette anche in pausa la registrazione o la

riproduzione.

Se si preme questo pulsante durante la riproduzione, la riproduzione viene messa in

pausa e il display dell’R-1 indica

PLAY-PAUSE

. Premere di nuovo il

pulsante PLAY/

PAUSE

per riprendere la riproduzione.

Allo stesso modo, se si preme questo pulsante durante la registrazione, la registrazione

viene messa in pausa. Il display dell’R-1 indica

REC-PAUSE

e il

pulsante REC

lampeggia con una luce rossa.

Per riprendere la registrazione dalla condizione di Rec Standby, premere di nuovo il

pulsante REC

(o premere il

pulsante PLAY/PAUSE

). Il

pulsate REC

si illumina di

rosso durante la registrazione.

Pulsante REC

In fase inattiva, premere il pulsante REC porta l’R-1 in modo standby di registrazione.

Il display dell’R-1 indica

REC STANDBY

e il

pulsante REC

lampeggia con una luce

rossa.

Per avviare la registrazione dal modo standby di registrazione, premere di nuovo il

pulsante REC

(o premere il

pulsante PLAY/PAUSE

). Il

pulsate REC

si illumina di

rosso durante la registrazione.

Potenziometro VALUE

Utilizzare questo potenziometro per selezionare le canzoni, per specificare i tipi e i

valori degli effetti e per selezionare le voci in Setup mode.

Pulsante EXIT

Utilizzare questo pulsante per tornare alla voce precedente in Effect edit o Setup mode.

In Setup mode, le modifiche ai valori vengono annullate se si preme il

pulsante EXIT

prima di premere il

pulsante ENTER

Pulsante ENTER

Utilizzare questo pulsante per selezionare una voce o per completare una modifica in

Effect Edit o in Setup mode.

5 6

R-1_egfis1.book 114 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

115

Controlli e connettori dell’R-1

Jack di ingresso del microfono

È possibile collegarvi un microfono.

Se al jack di ingresso di linea è collegato un cavo, il segnale audio non viene

acquisito attraverso il jack di ingresso del microfono.

Impostare l’

interruttore di selezione Mic Type

nella posizione appropriata in

base al microfono collegato, che può essere un microfono dinamico oppure un

microfono a condensatore in miniatura plug-in alimentato.

I microfoni stereo sono supportati; utilizzare un cavo stereo tipo mini per eseguire i

collegamenti. Se si utilizza un microfono monofonico, impostare

“10 Input Select”

Setup mode su

MONO

. Per maggiori informazioni su questa impostazione, fare

riferimento alla sezione

“Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode)”

(p.130).

Jack di ingresso di linea

Se si desidera immettere nell’R-1 un segnale audio da un dispositivo audio o da uno

strumento musicale elettronico, utilizzare un cavo stereo mini plug per il collegamento

a questo jack.

Interruttore di selezione Mic Type

Impostare questo interruttore nella posizione appropriata in base al tipo di microfono

collegato al

jack di ingresso del microfono

Volume di ingresso

Regola il volume di ingresso del suono proveniente dai microfoni integrati , dai

jack

di ingresso del microfono

o dal

jack di ingresso di linea

Utilizzare la procedura descritta nella sezione

“Regolazione del livello di ingresso”

(p.120) per regolarlo mentre si controlla il livello di ingresso.

Connettore USB

È possibile utilizzare il cavo USB incluso per collegare questo connettore al computer.

Se l’R-1 è collegato al computer, i file delle canzoni registrati possono essere trasferiti o

copiati sul computer. È anche possibile trasferire o copiare file MP3 o WAV dal

computer all’R-1, in modo da poterli riprodurre sull’R-1.

Questo connettore supporta l’USB 2.0 (USB ad alta velocità), che consente il

trasferimento veloce dei file.

Se si desidera collegare l’R-1 al computer, fare riferimento alla sezione

“Connecting the

R-1 to your computer”

(p.44).

Quando il computer ha riconosciuto correttamente l’R-1, il display dell’R-1 indica

Connected via USB

Quando l’R-1 è collegato ad un computer, tutte le funzioni dell’R-1 (diverse

dall’interruttore di alimentazione) sono disabilitate; l’azionamento dei

pulsanti e degli interruttori non produce alcun effetto.

DYN

Utilizzare questa impostazione se si collega un microfono dinamico.

Se si utilizza il microfono interno, impostarlo a DYN.

CND

Utilizzare questa impostazione se si collega un microfono a condensatore in

miniatura che richiede alimentazione elettrica. È necessario utilizzare un

microfono “plug-in alimentato”. Questo jack fornisce una tensione di 2 V.

* Se questo interruttore è impostato su CND, non collegare alcun microfono o altro

dispositivo diverso da un microfono "plug-in alimentato". Qualsiasi microfono o

dispositivo di altro tipo potrebbe risultare danneggiato.

R-1_egfis1.book 115 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

116

Controlli e connettori dell’R-1

fig.panel-3

Interruttore di alimentazione

Accende/spegne l’apparecchio.

Non spegnere l’apparecchio durante la riproduzione o la registrazione. È necessario

assicurarsi che la riproduzione o la registrazione siano terminate prima di spegnere

l’apparecchio.

• Se l’apparecchio viene spento accidentalmente durante la registrazione, i dati in

registrazione non vengono salvati sulla scheda CompactFlash.

• La scheda CompactFlash potrebbe risultare danneggiata se si spegne l’R-1 durante la

lettura o la scrittura di dati, come in fase di riproduzione o registrazione.

• Se si spegne l’R-1 mentre è visualizzata la scritta “Now working…” durante l’editing

di un effetto o durante il salvataggio di un’impostazione modificata, l’R-1 diventa

instabile e potrebbe non riavviarsi.

Si raccomanda vivamente di non spegnere l'apparecchio quando sta eseguendo queste

operazioni.

Jack dell’adattatore AC

Collegare l’adattatore AC incluso a questa presa.

Interruttore HOLD

Se si imposta l’

interruttore HOLD

in posizione ON, l'azionamento dei pulsanti dell’R-

1 non produce alcun effetto; è un modo utile per impedire che l’R-1 venga azionato

accidentalmente.

Tuttavia, anche quando l’

interruttore HOLD

è su ON, l’

interruttore di selezione

Mic Type

, il

volume di ingresso

, l’

interruttore di alimentazione

volume di uscita

sono azionabili.

Volume di uscita

Regola il volume del segnale in uscita dal

jack delle cuffie/di uscita di linea/di

uscita digitale

. Tuttavia, il volume dell’uscita digitale non è regolabile.

Jack delle cuffie/di uscita di linea/di uscita digitale

Questo jack trasmette il segnale audio dall’R-1 alle cuffie o ai diffusori esterni. Se si

desidera trasmettere un segnale digitale, utilizzare un cavo digitale ottico tondo tipo

mini.

Pulsante Eject

Premere questo pulsante per fare uscire la scheda CompactFlash inserita

nell’

alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria

Alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria

Inserire una scheda CompactFlash in questo alloggiamento.

CompactFlash è l’unico tipo di scheda di memoria supportata dall’R-1.

24 25 2623

R-1_egfis1.book 116 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

117

Controlli e connettori dell’R-1

fig.panel-4

Vano batterie

Se si desidera alimentare l’R-1 mediante batterie, inserire le batterie in questo vano. Se

si utilizza l’R-1 con l’apposito adattatore AC, non è necessario inserire le batterie.

È necessario spegnere l’R-1 prima di passare dal funzionamento con l’adattatore AC al

funzionamento con le batterie oppure dal funzionamento con le batterie al

funzionamento con l’adattatore AC.

Consultare la sezione

“Installing the batteries and turning on the power”

(p.20)

prima di utilizzare l’R-1.

Coperchio dell’alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria

Questo coperchio impedisce la rimozione accidentale della scheda CompactFlash. Una

volta aperto il coperchio, si possono vedere l’

alloggiamento della scheda di

memoria

e il

pulsante eject

R-1_egfis1.book 117 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

118

Preparazione all’utilizzo dell’R-1

È possibile formattare una scheda CompactFlash prima di utilizzarla con l’R-1.

È necessario utilizzare l’R-1 per formattare la scheda CompactFlash. Seguire la procedura

illustrata a pagina 60 di “Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode)”

Le schede CompactFlash formattate da un dispositivo diverso dall’R-1 potrebbero non

funzionare correttamente con l’R-1.

Spegnere l’R-1.

Inserire la scheda CompactFlash nell’

alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria

dell’R-1.

fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps

Accendere l’R-1.

Se la scheda CompactFlash non

contiene canzoni (file) che l’R-1 è in

grado di riprodurre, il display

visualizza la scritta No Song. Se la

scheda contiene canzoni (file),

compare la schermata della modalità

di riproduzione.

Premere il

pulsante MENU

* Se si desidera annullare la procedura,

premere il

pulsante EXIT

. Si torna

quindi alla schermata precedente.

fig.format-disp.eps

Ruotare il

potenziometro VALUE

per selezionare

12 Format Card

Premere il

pulsante [ENTER]

fig.format.eps

Quando viene visualizzata la

schermata riportata a sinistra,

premere il

pulsante ENTER

fig.sure.eps

Viene richiesta la conferma per la

formattazione della scheda. Per

formattare la scheda, premere il

pulsante ENTER

* Se non si desidera formattare la scheda, premere il

pulsante EXIT

. Si torna quindi alla fase 5.

Non rimuovere la scheda CompactFlash durante la formattazione. Questa

operazione potrebbe danneggiare la scheda CompactFlash.

fig.complete.eps

La formattazione è completa

quando viene visualizzata la scritta

Completed!

Premere il

pulsante MENU

Si torna quindi alla schermata principale (modalità di riproduzione).

Formattazione di una scheda CompactFlash

R-1_egfis1.book 118 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

119

Metodi di registrazione di base

La seguente tabella illustra la durata di registrazione approssimativa delle schede

CompactFlash.

Tempi di registrazione su una scheda CompactFlash

Tempi di registrazione (approssimativi)

Unità: minuti

* I tempi di registrazione elencati qui sopra sono approssimativi. La durata di registrazione

effettiva potrebbe essere leggermente differente rispetto a quella riportata qui. Si consiglia quindi

di includere un margine di sicurezza nei programmi di registrazione.

* Utilizzare l’R-1 per formattare la scheda CompactFlash.

* Utilizzare l’adattatore AC incluso per registrare ininterrottamente per un periodo prolungato.

* In presenza di più file, il tempo di registrazione complessivo sarà inferiore a quello riportato qui

sopra.

fig.mic-LR.eps

Il microfono interno dell’R-1 è stereofonico. I suoni che

arrivano al microfono sul lato destro dell'R-1 sono

registrati sul canale destro (R), mentre i suoni captati dal

microfono di sinistra sono registrati sul canale sinistro

(L).

Se si desidera utilizzare il microfono interno,

non effettuare alcun collegamento al jack di

ingresso del microfono o al jack di ingresso di

linea.

Se si collega un microfono o un cavo al jack di

ingresso del microfono o al jack di ingresso di

linea, questi ingressi hanno la priorità e il

microfono interno non viene utilizzato.

Assicurarsi che l’R-1 sia spento. Impostare anche il

volume di ingresso

minimo.

Se si desidera ascoltare (monitorare) il suono durante la registrazione dal

microfono interno, collegare delle cuffie al jack delle cuffie per il monitoraggio. Se

si collegano diffusori esterni al fine di utilizzarli per il monitoraggio, si verifica un

ritorno acustico, quindi non eseguire il monitoraggio attraverso i diffusori.

Dimensioni CompactFlash

Tipo di file 64 MB 256 MB 512 MB 2 GB

WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz

15 31 125

WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz

23 47 188

MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps

102 208 831

MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps

128 260 1,039

MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps

170 346 1,386

MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps

205 416 1,663

MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps

256 520 2,079

MP3, 16 bit/96 kbps

341 693 2,772

MP3, 16 bit/64 kbps

130

512 1,040 4,158

Registrazione mediante il microfono interno

L R

R-1_egfis1.book 119 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

120

Metodi di registrazione di base

Accendere l’R-1 come descritto nella sezione

“Connecting the AC adaptor and

turning on the power”

(p.19).

Se si registra con il microfono interno, impostare il tipo di microfono a

DYN

Consultare la sezione

“Types of files that the R-1 can handle”

(p.28) e specificare

il tipo di file da registrare. Per effettuare la selezione o per verificare la selezione

attuale, utilizzare

07 Record Mode

(p. 130) in Setup mode.

Regolare il livello di ingresso come segue.

Regolazione del livello di ingresso

fig.rec-1.eps

1. Premere il pulsante REC.

L’R-1 entra in modo standby di

registrazione.

Il display visualizza la durata di

registrazione rimanente dell’R-1

per il tipo di file (qualità di

registrazione) selezionato.

* Il nome della canzone visualizzato in Record Standby mode è il nome del file che viene creato

quando termina la registrazione.

fig.rec-2.eps

2. Premere il pulsante DISPLAY.

3. Riprodurre (o eseguire) i suoni

da registrare e posizionare il

microfono interno dell’R-1 dove può captarli.

* Se si desidera applicare un effetto ai suoni durante la registrazione, regolare il livello di

ingresso mentre l’effetto è attivo (ovvero applicato).

fig.rec-3.eps

4. Durante la riproduzione dei

suoni, aumentare gradualmente

il volume di ingresso.

Regolare il livello in modo che gli

indicatori del livello di ingresso

■ visualizzati sul display non

raggiungano il ■ più a destra. (Posizione nell’illustrazione sopra)

Se il livello di registrazione è troppo basso, non è possibile registrare i suoni molto

bassi. Se il livello di registrazione è troppo alto, i suoni forti risultano distorti e

provocano crepitio nel suono registrato.

* Se il materiale che si registra contiene a volte suoni forti improvvisi, come l’attacco di una

batteria nell’esecuzione di un gruppo musicale o una risata improvvisa durante una

conversazione tranquilla, si raccomanda di utilizzare il Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 130). Nel fare

questo, regolare il livello di ingresso in modo opportuno per il tipo principale di suono che si

sta registrando, non per i suoni forti improvvisi che si verificano occasionalmente. Quando

si usa il limitatore, il livello di ingresso viene regolato automaticamente così che il livello di

ingresso audio non diventi eccessivamente elevato. Quando si utilizza il limitatore, si

dovrebbe regolare il livello di ingresso in modo che il simbolo ■ alla posizione

nell’illustrazione appaia soltanto occasionalmente.

Tempo di registrazione rimanente

R-1_egfis1.book 120 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

121

Metodi di registrazione di base

fig.rec-time.eps

Premere il

pulsante REC

Viene avviata la registrazione.

* È anche possibile avviare la registrazione

premendo il

pulsante PLAY/PAUSE

Se si sposta il

controllo del volume di ingresso

in Record Standby mode

oppure durante la registrazione, il livello di ingresso viene modificato. Fare

attenzione a non azionare inavvertitamente il controllo del

volume di

ingresso

. Anche se l’

interruttore HOLD

è impostato su ON, la funzione

HOLD non incide sul

volume di ingresso

Al termine della registrazione, premere il

pulsante STOP

Se si desidera mettere in pausa la registrazione, premere il

pulsante PLAY/

PAUSE

. Se si desidera terminare la pausa e riprendere la registrazione, premere di

nuovo il

pulsante PLAY/PAUSE

I dati registrati vengono salvati in un file sulla scheda CompactFlash. Il display

visualizza il nome del file dei dati registrati; quel file è selezionato.

* Il nome del file viene creato automaticamente nel seguente formato:

R1_0001.MP3

. La

parte

0001

è il numero che segue il file con il numero più elevato esistente nella scheda

CompactFlash.

* Il file è creato a livello di root della scheda CompactFlash. Non vengono create cartelle

(directory).

* Dal momento che l’R-1 non dispone di un orologio interno, tutti i file hanno la stessa data

di creazione: 1 gennaio 2002.

Per ascoltare i dati appena registrati, premere il

pulsante PLAY/PAUSE

. Per gli

altri metodi di riproduzione, fare riferimento alla sezione

“Metodi di

riproduzione”

(p.125).

Tempo trascorso dall’inizio

della registrazione

Come il controllo del livello di ingresso indica il livello del signale

Numero di ■’s dB Numero di ■’s dB

Nessuno ∞ –– -50,0 8 -21,0 –– -18,0

1 -50,0 –– -40,0 9 -18,0 –– -15,0

2 -40,0 –– -36,0 10 -15,0 –– -12,0

3 -36,0 –– -33,0 11 -12,0 –– -9,0

4 -33,0 –– -30,0 12 -9,0 –– -6,0

5 -30,0 –– -27,0 13 -6,0 –– -3,0

6 -27,0 –– -24,0 14 -3,0 –– 0,0

7 -24,0 –– -21,0 15 0,0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 121 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

122

Metodi di registrazione di base

L’R-1 può utilizzare microfoni dinamici e microfoni a condensatore in miniatura plug-

in alimentati progettati per essere collegati al jack di registrazione di un registratore MD

(Mini Disc) o ai jack del microfono di un computer.

Se si utilizza un microfono a condensatore, è necessario utilizzarne uno plug-

in alimentato. Se si collega un tipo di microfono sbagliato o un comune

microfono stereo mini plug, l’apparecchio potrebbe risultare danneggiato.

fig.conmic-LR.eps

Assicurarsi che l’R-1 sia spento. Impostare il

volume di ingresso

al minimo.

Se qualcosa è collegato al

jack di ingresso di linea

, il segnale in ingresso

dal

jack di ingresso del microfono

viene ignorato. Se si desidera registrare

attraverso il

jack di ingresso

del microfono, non effettuare alcun

collegamento al jack di ingresso di linea.

Accendere l’R-1 come descritto nella sezione

“Connecting the AC adaptor and

turning on the power”

(p.19).

Specificare il tipo di file da registrare, come descritto nella sezione

“Types of files

that the R-1 can handle”

(p.28). È possibile utilizzare

07 Record Mode

(p. 130) in

Setup mode per specificare l’impostazione desiderata oppure per verificare

l’impostazione attuale.

Impostare l’

interruttore di selezione Mic Type

in base al tipo di microfono collegato al

jack di ingresso del microfono

. ->

“Interruttore di selezione Mic Type”

(p.115)

Registrazione mediante un microfono esterno

Microfono stereo

MIC TYPE

INPUT LEVEL

MIC

R-1_egfis1.book 122 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

123

Metodi di registrazione di base

Collegare il microfono esterno al

jack di ingresso del microfono

Se si desidera ascoltare (monitorare) il suono durante la registrazione,

collegare delle cuffie al jack delle cuffie per il monitoraggio. Se si collegano

diffusori esterni al fine di utilizzarli per il monitoraggio, si verifica un ritorno

acustico, quindi non eseguire il monitoraggio attraverso i diffusori.

Regolare il livello di ingresso come segue.

Regolazione del livello di ingresso

fig.rec-1.eps

1. Premere il pulsante REC.

L’R-1 entra in modo standby di

registrazione. Il display

visualizza la durata di

registrazione rimanente dell’R-1

per il tipo di file (qualità di

registrazione) selezionato.

* Il nome della canzone visualizzato in Record Standby mode è il nome del file che viene creato

quando termina la registrazione.

fig.rec-2.eps

2. Premere il pulsante DISPLAY.

3. Riprodurre (o eseguire) i suoni

da registrare e posizionare il

microfono esterno dove può captarli.

* Se si desidera applicare un effetto ai suoni durante la registrazione, regolare il livello di ingresso

mentre l’effetto è attivo (ovvero applicato).

fig.rec-3.eps

4. Aumentare gradualmente il

volume di ingresso.

Regolare il livello in modo che gli

indicatori del livello di ingresso

■ visualizzati sul display non

raggiungano il ■ più a destra.

(Posizione nell’illustrazione sopra)

Se il livello di registrazione è troppo basso, non è possibile registrare i suoni molto

bassi. Se il livello di registrazione è troppo alto, i suoni forti risultano distorti e

provocano crepitio nel suono registrato.

* Se il materiale che si registra contiene a volte suoni forti improvvisi, come l’attacco di una

batteria nell’esecuzione di un gruppo musicale o una risata improvvisa durante una

conversazione tranquilla, si raccomanda di utilizzare il Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 130).

Nel fare questo, regolare il livello di ingresso in modo opportuno per il tipo principale di suono

che si sta registrando, non per i suoni forti improvvisi che si verificano occasionalmente.

Quando si usa il limitatore, il livello di ingresso viene regolato automaticamente così che il livello

di ingresso audio non diventi eccessivamente elevato. Quando si utilizza il limitatore, si dovrebbe

regolare il livello di ingresso in modo che il simbolo ■ alla posizione nell’illustrazione appaia

soltanto occasionalmente.

Tempo di registrazione rimanente

R-1_egfis1.book 123 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

124

Metodi di registrazione di base

fig.rec-time.eps

Premere il

pulsante REC

Viene avviata la registrazione.

* È anche possibile avviare la

registrazione premendo il

pulsante

PLAY/PAUSE

Se si sposta il

controllo del volume di ingresso

in Record Standby mode

oppure durante la registrazione, il livello di ingresso viene modificato. Fare

attenzione a non azionare inavvertitamente il controllo del

volume di

ingresso

. Anche se l’

interruttore HOLD

è impostato su ON, la funzione

HOLD non incide sul

volume di ingresso

Al termine della registrazione, premere il

pulsante STOP

Se si desidera mettere in pausa la registrazione, premere il

pulsante PLAY/

PAUSE

. Se si desidera terminare la pausa e riprendere la registrazione, premere di

nuovo il

pulsante PLAY/PAUSE

I dati registrati vengono salvati in un file sulla scheda CompactFlash. Il display

visualizza il nome del file dei dati registrati; quel file è selezionato.

* Il nome del file viene creato automaticamente nel seguente formato:

R1_0001.MP3

. La

parte

0001

è il numero che segue il file con il numero più elevato esistente nella scheda

CompactFlash.

* Il file è creato a livello di root della scheda CompactFlash. Non vengono create cartelle

(directory).

Per ascoltare i dati appena registrati, premere il

pulsante PLAY/PAUSE

. Per gli

altri metodi di riproduzione, fare riferimento alla sezione

“Metodi di

riproduzione”

(p.125).

Tempo trascorso dall’inizio

della registrazione

Come il controllo del livello di ingresso indica il livello del signale

Numero di ■’s dB Numero di ■’s dB

Nessuno ∞ –– -50,0 8 -21,0 –– -18,0

1 -50,0 –– -40,0 9 -18,0 –– -15,0

2 -40,0 –– -36,0 10 -15,0 –– -12,0

3 -36,0 –– -33,0 11 -12,0 –– -9,0

4 -33,0 –– -30,0 12 -9,0 –– -6,0

5 -30,0 –– -27,0 13 -6,0 –– -3,0

6 -27,0 –– -24,0 14 -3,0 –– 0,0

7 -24,0 –– -21,0 15 0,0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 124 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

125

Metodi di riproduzione

L'R-1 non dispone di diffusori interni. Per ascoltare la riproduzione, è necessario

munirsi di cuffie o diffusori.

È possibile utilizzare il jack delle cuffie dell’R-1 come uscita digitale (uscita optical) per

il collegamento ad un dispositivo audio digitale o come uscita di linea per il

collegamento ad un dispositivo audio analogico.

Prima di proseguire, eseguire i collegamenti mediante il tipo di cavo adatto al

dispositivo. Fare riferimento a

“Connecting headphones”

(p.22),

“Connecting digital

speakers (digital devices)”

(p.23) o

“Connecting analog speakers (analog

devices)”

(p.24).

Mentre il display visualizza una schermata come quella nell’illustrazione, ruotare

potenziometro VALUE

per selezionare una canzone (file).

Premere il

pulsante PREV

per passare alla canzone (file) precedente oppure il

pulsante NEXT

per passare alla canzone (file) successiva.

* Se il display indica No Song, la scheda CompactFlash non contiene alcun file che l’R-1 sia

in grado di riprodurre.

Premere il

pulsante PLAY

dell’R-1 ( ); viene avviata la riproduzione della

canzone (file) visualizzata sul display.

Ruotare gradualmente il controllo del

volume di uscita

verso destra per regolare

il volume ad un livello di ascolto soddisfacente.

* Il nome della canzone visualizzato sul display è il nome del file. Non corrisponde al ID3 tag

all’interno del file MP3.

* I nomi delle canzoni sono visualizzati in ordine alfabetico in base al seguente elenco di

caratteri; non sono visualizzati nell’ordine cronologico di registrazione.

(spazio) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

* Se la scheda CompactFlash contiene subdirectory (cartelle), tutti i file a livello di root sono

visualizzati per primi, seguiti dai file nelle subdirectory (cartelle).

* I nomi dei file che iniziano per "." vengono ignorati e non sono visualizzati.

* I file con estensioni diverse da .mp3 e .wav vengono ignorati e non sono visualizzati.

Per maggiori informazioni sui file che l'R-1 è in grado di registrare e

riprodurre, fare riferimento alla sezione

“Types of files that the R-1 can

handle”

(p.28).

Riproduzione normale

R-1_egfis1.book 125 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

126

Metodi di riproduzione

Questa funzione consente di specificare una parte della canzone durante la riproduzione, in modo

da riprodurla ripetutamente.

Procedura

Durante la riproduzione, premere

una volta il

pulsante REPEAT

().

Quella posizione viene fissata come

inizio della ripetizione (punto

Premere il

pulsante REPEAT

ancora una volta. Quella posizione

viene fissata come termine della

ripetizione (punto

fig.repeat-a

La parte specificata nelle fasi 1 e 2 (la

parte tra i punti A e B) viene

riprodotta ripetutamente.

Per annullare la riproduzione

ripetuta, premere di nuovo il

pulsante REPEAT

Per annullare questa funzione

• Dopo avere specificato i punti

, premere il

pulsante REPEAT

( ) per annullare

l’impostazione dei punti

• Se dopo avere specificato un punto

si preme il

pulsante STOP

prima di specificare il

punto

, l’impostazione del punto

viene annullata.

• Se si desidera arrestare la riproduzione e annullare le impostazioni di ripetizione, premere il

pulsante STOP

. La riproduzione si arresta e le impostazioni di riproduzione ripetuta (punti

) vengono annullate.

REPEAT A-B (Riproduzione ripetuta)

Song

Note

* Se dopo avere specificato un punto A, si preme il pulsante STOP prima di specificare il punto

B, l’impostazione del punto A viene annullata.

* Se dopo avere specificato il punto A, si fa proseguire la riproduzione fino alla fine della canzone,

la riproduzione viene ripetuta dal punto A alla fine della canzone.

* Se si preme il pulsante STOP durante la riproduzione ripetuta, la riproduzione si arresta e le

impostazioni della parte ripetuta (A-B) vengono annullate.

R-1_egfis1.book 126 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

127

Metodi di riproduzione

Di seguito sono riportate le istruzioni per effettuare la riproduzione a metà della

velocità normale.

Procedura

In fase inattiva o di riproduzione,

premere il

pulsante SPEED

La riga più bassa del display

visualizza la scritta

1/2

e la riproduzione viene eseguita a

velocità dimezzata

Se l’R-1 è in fase di riproduzione, la riproduzione rallenta.

Se l’R-1 è in fase inattiva, alla pressione del

pulsante PLAY

viene avviata la

riproduzione a velocità dimezzata.

* Questa funzione regola il tono della riproduzione a velocità dimezzata, in modo che rimanga

lo stesso del tono normale. Ciò potrebbe causare un effetto tremolante nella riproduzione;

non si tratta di un malfunzionamento.

Per annullare questa funzione

Se la

riproduzione a velocità dimezzata

è attiva, premere il

pulsante SPEED

per

annullarla.

Se la riproduzione a velocità dimezzata non viene annullata, anche la

canzone successiva viene riprodotta a velocità dimezzata.

1/2 PLAY (Riproduzione a velocità dimezzata)

R-1_egfis1.book 127 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

128

Metodi di riproduzione

Di seguito sono riportate le istruzioni su come determinare l'ordine e il metodo di

riproduzione.

Premere il

pulsante MENU

Non è possibile cambiare la modalità di riproduzione durante la riproduzione

dell’R-1.

Come prima cosa è necessario premere il

pulsante STOP

per arrestare la

riproduzione.

Utilizzare il potenziometro VALUE per selezionare

05 Play Mode

Premere il

pulsante [ENTER]

Utilizzare il

potenziometro VALUE

per selezionare la modalità di riproduzione

desiderata.

fig.sequential.eps

Dopo aver selezionato la modalità di

riproduzione desiderata, premere il

pulsante ENTER

Premere il

pulsante MENU

Si torna quindi alla modalità di riproduzione.

PLAY MODE (Modalità riproduzione)

Sequential

Le canzoni sono riprodotte nell’ordine 001, 002, 003…009

* Utilizzare i pulsanti PREV e NEXT oppure il potenziometro VALUE per

selezionare un file (canzone).

Single

Viene riprodotto ripetutamente solamente il file (canzone) selezionato.

Shuffle

L’ordine di riproduzione delle canzoni cambia automaticamente.

* Le canzoni riprodotte in precedenza non vengono riprodotte.

* Se si utilizzano i pulsanti PREV / NEXT oppure il potenziometro VALUE per

selezionare un file (canzone), i nomi dei file (canzoni) sono visualizzati nello

stesso ordine di quando viene selezionata la modalità di riproduzione

Sequential

R-1_egfis1.book 128 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

129

Utilizzo degli effetti

Questa sezione descrive come applicare un effetto durante la riproduzione oppure

durante il modo standby di registrazione. È anche possibile effettuare l’impostazione

dell’effetto prima di iniziare la riproduzione oppure provare varie impostazioni

dell’effetto durante una registrazione di prova.

fig.effect.eps

Le impostazioni dei parametri dell'effetto eseguite sono effettive fino alla

modifica successiva.

Applicazione di un effetto

Durante la

riproduzione In standby

di registrazione

Scegliere un effetto

Edit mode

Selezionare un parametro

Type -> Level1

Modificare il parametro

Pop -> Dance

-> HipHop...

Uscire da Effect

Edit mode

Avviare

la riproduzione

/registrazione

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

ENTEREXIT

EXITEXIT

ENTERENTER

EXITEXIT

01:Eazy EQ

-> 02:For Speech...

Effect mode ON

EDIT

R-1_egfis1.book 129 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

130

Impostazioni

Per ulteriori informazioni su queste impostazioni, consultare la sezione

“Procedures”

(p.56).

* Durante la riproduzione o lo standby di registrazione, non è possibile entrare in Setup mode

premendo il

pulsante MENU

Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode)

Menu/Effetto

Valore (valore

predefinito in

neretto)

Procedura

LCD Contrast

Regola il contrasto del display.

1–

–10 A (p. 56)

LCD Backlight

Specifica l’intervallo trascorso il quale la

retroilluminazione del display si spegne in

modalità batterie.

OFF, ON,

5sec

10sec, 20sec

A (p. 56)

Delete File

Cancella un file.

–– B (p. 58)

Rename File

Modifica il nome di un file.

–– C (p. 60)

Play Mode

Specifica l’ordine di riproduzione delle canzoni.

Sequential

Single, Shuffle

A (p. 56)

Limiter

Attiva/disattiva il limiter del livello di ingresso.

* Il limiter diminuisce il livello di ingresso in

modo adeguato quando il livello di ingresso è

eccessivo.

Il livello soglia è -9 dBFS.

OFF

, ON

A (p. 56)

Record Mode

Specifica il tipo di file creato in fase di

registrazione. Determina la qualità audio del file

registrato.

MP3 64kbps,

MP3 96kbps,

MP3 128kbps,

MP3 160kbps,

MP3 192kbps

MP3 256kbps,

MP3 320kbps,

WAV 16bit,

WAV 24bit

A (p. 56)

Track Splitting

Attiva/disattiva la funzione Track splitting.

* Questa funzione divide automaticamente il file

quando c'è un intervallo di silenzio di tre

secondi o più durante la registrazione.

OFF

, ON

A (p. 56)

Livello picchi distorti

Livello soglia

Livello del segnale in ingresso

Ridurre la distorsione

di clipping e passare

al convertitore AD

Livello AD

R-1_egfis1.book 130 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

131

Impostazioni

Input Monitor

Attivare questa funzione se si desidera

monitorare il segnale in ingresso mediante le

cuffie. Disattivarla se non si desidera monitorare

il segnale.

* Durante la registrazione, il suono è udibile

indipendentemente dallo stato di questa

funzione.

OFF

, ON

A (p. 56)

Selezione ingresso

Impostare questa funzione su STEREO se si

collega un microfono stereo. Impostare questa

funzione su MONO se si collega un microfono

monofonico. Se si utilizza l’impostazione

STEREO con un segnale monofonico, viene

registrato solamente il canale L (sinistro). Se è

impostata su MONO, il suono viene registrato da

entrambi i canali L e R.

* Il file registrato sarà stereo anche se questa

funzione è impostata su MONO.

STEREO

, MONO

A (p. 56)

Sleep Timer

Specifica l’intervallo trascorso il quale l’R-1 entra

in Sleep mode in modalità batterie.

* Questa impostazione non produce alcun effetto

se si utilizza l’adattatore AC.

OFF, 1min, 2min,

3min

, 5min,

10min, 15min,

30min, 45min,

60min

A (p. 56)

Format Card

Formatta una scheda CompactFlash.

– D (p. 62)

Firmware Ver1.00

Consente di verificare la versione del software

dell’R-1.

– E (p. 64)

About the R-1

Visualizza informazioni sull’R-1.

– A (p. 56)

Menu/Effetto

Valore (valore

predefinito in

neretto)

Procedura

R-1_egfis1.book 131 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

132

Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1

fig.panel-1

Micrófono interno

Se trata de un micrófono estéreo incorporado en la unidad R-1.

El usuario no puede utilizar el micrófono interno si un micrófono u otro dispositivo está

conectado a los

jacks de entrada de micrófono

o a los

jacks de entrada de línea

Si desea utilizar el micrófono interno, no conecte ningún dispositivo a los otros jacks de entrada.

Al grabar mediante el micrófono interno, ajuste el interruptor selector de tipo de micrófono a

DYN.

Pantalla

En la pantalla se muestra la información relativa al estado de funcionamiento de la unidad R-1.

Botón EFFECT (EFECTO)

Pulse el

botón EFFECT

(EFECTO) para activar y desactivar la función de efecto.

Cuando la función de efecto esté activa, este botón se encenderá en rojo.

Si activa esta función antes o durante la reproducción, el efecto se aplicará al sonido

reproducido en ese momento. Si activa esta función antes o durante la grabación, el efecto se

aplicará al sonido que entra en la unidad en ese momento, es decir, que se grabará el sonido

procesado con el efecto.

La unidad R-1 ofrece varios efectos que permiten al usuario modificar el sonido reproducido o

grabado, para que el sonido sea más impactante o la escucha más cómoda. También puede

transformar el sonido para que sea totalmente diferente.

Botón EDIT (EDITAR)

Utilice este botón para definir los parámetros del efecto.

Para obtener información sobre los efectos, consulte

“Using effects”

(pág. 46). Puede establecer

los parámetros del efecto independientemente de si el

botón EFFECT (EFECTO)

está activado

o desactivado.

Botón MENU (MENÚ)

Este botón activa el modo Setup (Configuración), en el que puede definir diversos parámetros

de la unidad R-1. En este modo puede ajustar el contraste de la pantalla de cristal líquido (LCD),

especificar la calidad de grabación y definir diversos parámetros generales de la unidad R-1. Si

desea obtener información detallada, consulte

“Algunos parámetros”

(pág. 150).

5 6

R-1_egfis1.book 132 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

133

Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1

Botón DISPLAY (PANTALLA)

Con este botón se cambia el contenido de la pantalla de la unidad R-1.

En el modo PLAY (REPRODUCCIÓN), pulse este botón repetidas veces para mostrar

sucesivamente el tiempo de reproducción, el tiempo de reproducción restante de la

canción (archivo), el tipo de canción (archivo) y la velocidad de bits.

Pulse el

botón DISPLAY (PANTALLA)

para cambiar el contenido de la pantalla.

Botón PREV (ANT)

Utilice este botón para desplazarse hasta el inicio de la canción o para seleccionar la

canción anterior.

Si pulsa este botón durante la reproducción de una canción, se desplazará hasta el inicio

de esa canción. Si ya se encuentra al principio (00:00) de la canción y pulsa este botón,

se desplazará hasta el inicio de la canción anterior. Para retroceder, pulse y mantenga

pulsado este botón.

Estas acciones están disponibles durante la reproducción y cuando ésta está detenida.

Botón NEXT (SIG)

Utilice este botón para seleccionar la canción siguiente. Para avanzar, pulse y mantenga

pulsado este botón.

Estas acciones están disponibles durante la reproducción y cuando ésta está detenida.

Botón REPEAT (REPETIR)

Este botón permite al usuario reproducir repetidamente el fragmento de la canción

comprendido entre dos puntos (A - B) especificados por el usuario. Pulse este botón una

vez para marcar el punto A; a continuación, púlselo de nuevo para marcar el punto B.

Para cancelar la repetición de la reproducción, pulse de nuevo el

botón REPEAT

(REPETIR). Si cancela la repetición de la reproducción, los puntos A y B marcados

también se cancelarán.

fig.repeat-a

Durante la reproducción, pulse el

botón REPEAT

(REPETIR) una vez.

Ese punto constituirá el principio (punto

) del

fragmento de la reproducción repetida.

fig.repeat-b

Pulse de nuevo el

botón REPEAT

(REPETIR). Ese

punto constituirá el final (punto

) del fragmento

de la reproducción repetida.

fig.repeat-ab

Se repetirá la reproducción del fragmento

especificado en los pasos 1 y 2. Para cancelar la

repetición de la reproducción, pulse de nuevo el

botón REPEAT

(REPETIR).

Botón SPEED (VELOCIDAD)

Este botón ralentiza la reproducción (a la mitad de la velocidad). Púlselo de nuevo para

recuperar la velocidad normal. Esta función resulta útil si acompaña la música con un

instrumento y el tempo es demasiado rápido, o si escucha un discurso pronunciado

demasiado rápido.

Song

R-1_egfis1.book 133 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

134

Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1

fig.panel-2

Botón STOP (DETENER)

Este botón detiene la reproducción o la grabación.

Botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA)

Este botón inicia la reproducción. Además, sirve para interrumpir la grabación o la

reproducción.

Si utiliza este botón durante la reproducción, ésta se interrumpirá y la pantalla de la unidad R-

1 mostrará el mensaje

PLAY-PAUSE

(REPRODUCCIÓN-PAUSA). Pulse de nuevo el

botón

PLAY/PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA) para reanudar la reproducción.

Del mismo modo, si pulsa este botón durante la grabación, ésta se interrumpirá. La pantalla de

la unidad R-1 mostrará el mensaje

REC-PAUSE

(GRABACIÓN-PAUSA) y el botón

REC

(GRABAR)

parpadeará en rojo.

Para reanudar la grabación a partir del estado de grabación interrumpida, pulse de nuevo el

botón REC

(GRABAR), o pulse el

botón PLAY/PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). El

botón

REC

(GRABAR) permanece encendido en rojo durante la grabación.

Botón REC (GRABAR)

Si la unidad R-1 está detenida y pulsa el

botón REC

(GRABAR), la unidad entrará en el modo

de grabación interrumpida. La pantalla de la unidad R-1 mostrará el mensaje

REC STANDBY

(GRABACIÓN INTERRUMPIDA) y el

botón REC

(GRABAR) parpadeará en rojo.

Para iniciar la grabación a partir del estado de grabación interrumpida, pulse de nuevo el

botón

REC

(GRABAR), o pulse el

botón PLAY/PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Durante la

grabación, el

botón REC

(GRABAR) parpadeará en rojo.

Mando VALUE (VALOR)

Utilice este mando para seleccionar canciones, especificar tipos y valores de efecto y seleccionar

elementos del modo Setup (Configuración).

Botón EXIT (SALIR)

Utilice este botón para regresar al elemento anterior en el modo Effect Edit (Edición de efecto)

o Setup (Configuración). En el modo Setup (Configuración), los cambios realizados en los

valores se cancelan si pulsa el

botón EXIT

(SALIR) antes de pulsar el

botón ENTER

(INTRO).

Botón ENTER (INTRO)

Utilice este botón para seleccionar este elemento o aceptar un cambio realizado en el modo

Effect Edit (Edición de efecto) o Setup (Configuración).

5 6

R-1_egfis1.book 134 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

135

Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1

Jack de entrada de micrófono

Permite la conexión de un micrófono.

Si hay algún cable conectado al jack de entrada de línea, el sonido no saldrá a

través del jack de entrada de micrófono.

Sitúe el

interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono

en la posición

adecuada, en función de si el micrófono conectado es un micrófono dinámico o un

micrófono condensador miniatura con enchufe para la red eléctrica.

Los micrófonos estéreos también son compatibles; para realizar la conexión, utilice un

cable estéreo mini. Si utiliza un micrófono monoaural, defina el parámetro del modo

Setup (Configuración)

10 Input Select

(10 Selección de entrada) en

MONO

. Para

obtener información sobre este parámetro, consulte

“Configuración del sistema

(modo Setup (Configuración))”

(pág. 150).

Jack de entrada de línea

Si desea dirigir la señal de audio de un dispositivo de audio o de un instrumento

musical electrónico a la unidad R-1, utilice un cable estéreo mini para conectar el

dispositivo a este jack.

Interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono

Sitúe este interruptor en la posición adecuada, en función del tipo de micrófono

conectado al

jack de entrada de micrófono

Volumen de entrada

Ajusta el volumen de entrada del sonido de los micrófonos incorporados , el

jack

de entrada de micrófono

o el

jack de entrada de línea

Utilice el procedimiento descrito en

“Ajuste del nivel de entrada”

(pág. 140) para

ajustarlo mientras ve el nivel de entrada.

Conector USB

Puede utilizar el cable USB proporcionado para conectar la unidad a su PC.

Si la unidad R-1 está conectada al PC, podrá transferir o copiar en el PC los archivos de

música que grabe. También puede transferir y copiar archivos MP3 y WAV del PC a la

unidad R-1, para poder reproducir los archivos en la unidad R-1.

Este conector es compatible con USB 2.0 (USB de alta velocidad), que permite la

transferencia rápida de archivos.

Si desea conectar la unidad R-1 al PC, consulte

“Connecting the R-1 to your

computer”

(pág. 44).

Una vez que el PC ha reconocido correctamente la unidad R-1, la pantalla de la unidad

R-1 muestra el mensaje

Connected via USB

(Conectado a través de USB).

Mientras la unidad R-1 permanece conectada a un PC, todas las funciones de

la unidad R-1 (excepto el interruptor de alimentación) están desactivadas; por

tanto, la manipulación de los botones e interruptores de la unidad no tendrá

ningún efecto.

DYN

(DIN)

Sitúe el interruptor en esta posición si ha conectado un micrófono dinámico.

Si usa el micrófono interno, ajústelo a DYN.

CND

Sitúe el interruptor en esta posición si ha conectado un micrófono condensador

miniatura que requiere una fuente de alimentación. Debe utilizar un micrófono

“con enchufe para la red eléctrica”. Este jack proporciona un voltaje de 2 V.

* Si el interruptor se sitúa en la posición CND, no conecte ningún micrófono ni otro

dispositivo que no sea un micrófono “con enchufe para la red eléctrica”. Si lo hace,

pueden producirse daños en el micrófono o el dispositivo conectado.

R-1_egfis1.book 135 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

136

Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1

fig.panel-3

Interruptor de alimentación

Este interruptor se utiliza para encender y apagar la unidad.

No apague la unidad durante la reproducción ni la grabación. Antes de apagar la

unidad, debe asegurarse de que la reproducción o la grabación se ha detenido.

• Si, de forma accidental, apaga la unidad durante la grabación, los datos no se

guardarán en la tarjeta CompactFlash.

• Pueden producirse daños en la tarjeta CompactFlash si apaga la unidad R-1 mientras

los datos se leen o escriben, por ejemplo, durante la reproducción y la grabación.

• Si apaga la unidad R-1 mientras se muestra el mensaje “Now working...”

(Funcionando...) durante la edición de efectos o mientras se guarda un parámetro

modificado, la unidad R-1 será inestable y es posible que no pueda iniciarse.

Tenga mucho cuidado de no apagar nunca la unidad mientras se encuentre en los

estados descritos.

Jack del adaptador de CA

Conecte el adaptador de CA proporcionado a este jack.

Interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEAR)

Si sitúa el

interruptor HOLD

(BLOQUEAR) en la posición ON (ACTIVAR), las

funciones de los botones de la unidad R-1 se desactivarán; esto resulta muy práctico

para evitar el funcionamiento accidental de la unidad R-1.

Sin embargo, incluso si el

interruptor HOLD

(BLOQUEAR) está en la posición ON

(ACTIVAR), el

interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono

, el

volumen

de entrada

, el

interruptor de alimentación

y el

volumen de salida

continúan estando operativos.

Volumen de salida

Ajusta el volumen enviado desde el

jack del auricular/salida de línea/salida

digital

. Sin embargo, el volumen de la salida digital no puede ajustarse.

Jack del auricular/salida de línea/salida digital

A través de este jack, sale el audio de la unidad R-1 hacia el auricular o los altavoces

externos. Si desea que salga una señal digital, utilice un cable digital óptico redondo

mini.

Botón de expulsión

Pulse este botón para expulsar la tarjeta CompactFlash insertada en la

ranura de la

tarjeta de memoria

Ranura de la tarjeta de memoria

Inserte una tarjeta CompactFlash en esta ranura.

CompactFlash es el único tipo de tarjeta de memoria que puede utilizar en la unidad R-

24 25 2623

R-1_egfis1.book 136 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

137

Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1

fig.panel-4

Compartimento de las pilas

Si desea utilizar la unidad R-1 con pilas, instálelas aquí. Si está utilizando la unidad R-

1 con el adaptador de CA, no es preciso que instale pilas.

Antes de pasar del funcionamiento mediante el adaptador de CA al funcionamiento

mediante pilas o viceversa, debe apagar la unidad R-1.

Consulte

“Installing the batteries and turning on the power”

(pág. 20) antes de

utilizar la unidad R-1.

Cubierta de la ranura de la tarjeta de memoria

Esta cubierta impide que la tarjeta CompactFlash se extraiga de forma accidental.

Cuando abra esta cubierta, verá la

ranura de la tarjeta de memoria

y el

botón

de expulsión

R-1_egfis1.book 137 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

138

Preparación para el uso de la unidad R-1

Debe formatear la tarjeta CompactFlash antes de utilizarla con la unidad R-1.

Es preciso utilizar la unidad R-1 para formatear la tarjeta CompactFlash. Siga el procedimiento

descrito en la página 150 de “Configuración del sistema (modo Setup (Configuración))”.

Es posible que las tarjetas CompactFlash formateadas con un dispositivo distinto a la unidad R-

1 no funcionen correctamente con la unidad R-1.

Apague la unidad R-1.

Inserte la tarjeta CompactFlash en la

ranura de la tarjeta de memoria

de la unidad R-1.

fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps

Encienda la unidad R-1.

Si la tarjeta CompactFlash no contiene

ninguna canción (archivo) que la

unidad R-1 pueda reproducir, la

pantalla mostrará el mensaje No Song

(Ninguna canción). Por el contrario, si

la tarjeta contiene canciones (archivos),

aparecerá la pantalla correspondiente

al modo de reproducción.

Pulse el

botón MENU

(MENÚ).

* Si decide cancelar el proceso, pulse el

botón EXIT

(SALIR). Esto le

devolverá a la pantalla anterior.

fig.format-disp.eps

Gire el

mando VALUE

(VALOR)

para seleccionar

12 Format Card

(12 Formatear tarjeta).

Pulse el

botón ENTER

(INTRO).

fig.format.eps

Cuando aparezca esta pantalla,

pulse el

botón ENTER

(INTRO).

fig.sure.eps

La pantalla le solicitará que confirme si

realmente desea formatear la tarjeta.

Para formatear la tarjeta, pulse el

botón ENTER

(INTRO).

* Si decide no formatear la tarjeta, pulse

botón EXIT

(SALIR). Volverá al paso 5.

No extraiga nunca la tarjeta CompactFlash mientras el formateado esté en curso. Si lo

hace, pueden producirse daños en la tarjeta CompactFlash.

fig.complete.eps

El formateado se completa cuando

aparece en la pantalla el mensaje

Completed!

(Finalizado).

Pulse el

botón MENU

(MENÚ).

Esto le devolverá a la pantalla principal (modo reproducción).

Formateado de una tarjeta CompactFlash

R-1_egfis1.book 138 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

139

Métodos básicos de grabación

En la tabla siguiente se indican los tiempos aproximados de grabación que permiten las

tarjetas CompactFlash.

Duración de la grabación de una tarjeta CompactFlash

Duración de la grabación (aproximada)

Unidades: minutos

* Las duraciones de la grabación enumeradas son aproximadas. La duración real de la grabación puede

variar ligeramente con respecto a la indicada en esta tabla; por este motivo, es conveniente incluir

cierto margen en los planes de grabación.

* Utilice la unidad R-1 para formatear la tarjeta CompactFlash.

* Si se dispone a grabar de forma continua durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, utilice el

adaptador de CA proporcionado.

* Si desea grabar varios archivos, el tiempo total de grabación real será inferior al indicado en la tabla.

fig.mic-LR.eps

El micrófono interno de la unidad R-1 es estéreo. Los

datos de audio que entran a través del micrófono

situado en el lateral derecho de la unidad R-1 se graban

en el canal derecho (R); por su parte, los datos de audio

recogidos por el micrófono situado en el lateral

izquierdo se graban en el canal izquierdo (L).

Si desea utilizar el micrófono interno, no

conecte ningún dispositivo al jack de entrada de

micrófono ni al jack de entrada de línea.

En caso de que haya un micrófono o un cable

conectado al jack de entrada de micrófono o al

jack de entrada de línea, estas entradas tendrán

prioridad y el micrófono interno no se utilizará.

Asegúrese de que la unidad R-1 está apagada. Asimismo, defina el

volumen de

entrada

en la posición mínima.

Si desea escuchar (controlar) el sonido a medida que se graba mediante el micrófono

interno, conecte un par de auriculares al jack de auriculares y utilícelos para controlar

la grabación. Si conecta altavoces externos con la intención de utilizarlos para controlar

la grabación, se producirá retorno acústico; por este motivo, no trate de controlar la

grabación mediante altavoces.

Tamaño de la tarjeta CompactFlash

Tipo de archivo 64 MB 256 MB 512 MB 2 GB

WAV, 24 bits/44,1 kHz

15 31 125

WAV, 16 bits/44,1 kHz

23 47 188

MP3, 16 bits/320 kbps

102 208 831

MP3, 16 bits/256 kbps

128 260 1,039

MP3, 16 bits/192 kbps

170 346 1,386

MP3, 16 bits/160 kbps

205 416 1,663

MP3, 16 bits/128 kbps

256 520 2,079

MP3, 16 bits/96 kbps

341 693 2,772

MP3, 16 bits/64 kbps

130

512 1,040 4,158

Grabación con el micrófono interno

L R

R-1_egfis1.book 139 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

140

Métodos básicos de grabación

Encienda la unidad R-1 tal como se describe en

“Connecting the AC adaptor and

turning on the power”

(pág. 19).

Si graba mediante el micrófono interno, ajuste el interruptor selector de tipo de

micrófono a

DYN

Consulte

“Types of files that the R-1 can handle”

(pág. 28) y especifique el tipo

de archivo que desea grabar. Para realizar la selección o para comprobar la

selección actual, utilice el parámetro del modo Setup (Configuración)

07 Record

Mode

(07 Modo de grabación) (pág. 150).

Ajuste el nivel de entrada del modo que se describe a continuación.

Ajuste del nivel de entrada

fig.rec-1.eps

1. Pulse el botón REC (GRABAR).

La unidad R-1 entra en el modo

de grabación interrumpida. La

pantalla indica la cantidad de

tiempo restante que la unidad R-

1 puede grabar para el tipo de

archivo (calidad de la grabación) seleccionado por el usuario.

* El nombre de la canción que se muestra en el modo de grabación interrumpida es el nombre

del archivo que se creará en primer lugar cuando finalice la grabación.

fig.rec-2.eps

2. Pulse el botón DISPLAY

(PANTALLA).

3. Emita (o realice) los sonidos que desea grabar y sitúe el micrófono interno de la unidad

R-1 donde pueda recoger el sonido.

* Si desea aplicar algún efecto al sonido a medida que lo graba, ajuste el nivel de entrada mientras

se activa el efecto (es decir, mientras se aplica).

fig.rec-3.eps

4. Mientras se emite el sonido,

aumente gradualmente el

volumen de entrada.

Ajuste el nivel de manera que los

indicadores del nivel de entrada

■ que aparecen en la pantalla no

alcancen el extremo derecho ■.

(Posición en la ilustración de arriba)

Si el nivel de grabación es demasiado bajo, no podrá grabar sonidos muy tenues. Si el

nivel de la grabación es demasiado alto, los sonidos muy altos se distorsionarán, lo que

provocará crujidos en el sonido grabado.

* Si el material que se dispone a grabar contiene sonidos altos repentinos, como la entrada de un

tambor en una interpretación orquestal o una risa inesperada durante una conversación calmada, es

conveniente utilizar el limitador (06 Limiter (06 Limitador), pág. 150). Si lo utiliza, ajuste el nivel

de entrada de la forma adecuada al tipo de sonido predominante en la grabación (no la adecuada al

sonido alto repentino que aparece de forma ocasional). Al usar el limitador, el nivel de entrada se

ajusta automáticamente de manera que el nivel de entrada de audio no sea excesivamente alto. Al

usar el limitador, deberá ajustar el nivel de entrada de manera que el símbolo

■

en la posición

en la ilustración aparezca sólo ocasionalmente.

Tiempo de grabación restante

R-1_egfis1.book 140 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

141

Métodos básicos de grabación

fig.rec-time.eps

Pulse el

botón REC

(GRABAR).

Se iniciará la grabación.

* Si lo prefiere, también puede iniciar la

grabación pulsando el

botón PLAY/

PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA).

Si mueve el

control del volumen de entrada

en el modo de grabación

interrumpida o durante la grabación, el nivel de entrada cambiará. Tenga

cuidado de no manipular el control del

volumen de entrada

sin darse

cuenta. Incluso si el

interruptor HOLD

(BLOQUEO) está en la posición ON

(ACTIVAR), el

volumen de entrada

no se ve afectado por la función HOLD

(BLOQUEO).

Una vez que haya terminado de grabar, pulse el

botón STOP

(DETENER).

Si desea interrumpir la grabación, pulse el

botón PLAY/PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/

PAUSA). Si desea cancelar la pausa y reanudar la grabación, pulse de nuevo el

botón PLAY/PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA).

Los datos grabados se guardarán como un archivo en la tarjeta CompactFlash. La

pantalla indicará el nombre del archivo que contiene los datos grabados, y el

archivo se seleccionará.

* El nombre de archivo se crea de forma automática, empleando el formato siguiente:

R1_0001.MP3

. La parte del nombre

0001

corresponde al número que sigue a la

numeración de archivo más alta contenida en la tarjeta CompactFlash.

* El archivo se crea en el nivel raíz de la tarjeta CompactFlash. No se crean carpetas

(directorios).

* Puesto que la unidad R-1 no dispone de reloj interno, todos los archivos tendrán la misma

fecha de creación (1 de enero de 2002).

Para oír los datos que acaba de grabar, pulse el

botón PLAY/PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Si desea conocer otros métodos de reproducción,

consulte

“Métodos de reproducción”

(pág. 145).

Tiempo transcurrido desde

el inicio de la grabación

Cómo el medidor de nivel de entrada indica el nivel de señal

Número de ■'s dB Número de ■'s dB

Ninguno ∞ –– -50,0 8 -21,0 –– -18,0

1 -50,0 –– -40,0 9 -18,0 –– -15,0

2 -40,0 –– -36,0 10 -15,0 –– -12,0

3 -36,0 –– -33,0 11 -12,0 –– -9,0

4 -33,0 –– -30,0 12 -9,0 –– -6,0

5 -30,0 –– -27,0 13 -6,0 –– -3,0

6 -27,0 –– -24,0 14 -3,0 –– 0,0

7 -24,0 –– -21,0 15 0,0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 141 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

142

Métodos básicos de grabación

La unidad R-1 puede utilizar micrófonos dinámicos y los micrófonos condensadores

miniatura con enchufe para la red eléctrica diseñados para conectarlos al jack de

grabación de un grabador MD (Mini Disc) o al jack de entrada de micrófono de un PC.

Si utiliza un micrófono condensador, debe utilizar uno con enchufe a la red

eléctrica. Si conecta el tipo erróneo de micrófono o un micrófono mini estéreo

convencional, pueden producirse daños en el equipo.

fig.conmic-LR.eps

Asegúrese de que la unidad R-1 está apagada. Defina el

volumen de entrada

la posición mínima.

Si hay algún dispositivo conectado al

jack de entrada de línea

, la unidad

omitirá la entrada a través del

jack de entrada de micrófono

. Si desea

grabar a través del

jack de entrada de micrófono

, no conecte ningún

dispositivo al jack de entrada de línea.

Encienda la unidad R-1 tal como se describe en

“Connecting the AC adaptor and

turning on the power”

(pág. 19).

Especifique el tipo de archivo que desea grabar, tal como se describe en

“Types of

files that the R-1 can handle”

(pág. 28). Puede utilizar el parámetro del modo

Setup (Configuración)

07 Record Mode

(07 Modo de grabación) (pág. 150) para

especificar el parámetro que desee o para comprobar el parámetro actual.

Coloque el

interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono

en la posición

correspondiente al tipo de micrófono que ha conectado al

jack de entrada de

micrófono

. ->

“Interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono”

(pág. 135)

Grabación con un micrófono externo

Micrófono estéreo

TIPO DE MICRÓFONO

NIVEL DE ENTRADA

MICRÓFONO

R-1_egfis1.book 142 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

143

Métodos básicos de grabación

Conecte el micrófono externo al

jack de entrada de micrófono

Si desea escuchar (controlar) el sonido a medida que se graba, conecte un par de

auriculares al jack de auriculares y utilícelos para controlar la grabación. Si conecta

altavoces externos con la intención de utilizarlos para controlar la grabación, se

producirá retorno acústico; por este motivo, no trate de controlar la grabación

mediante altavoces.

Ajuste el nivel de entrada del modo que se describe a continuación.

Ajuste del nivel de entrada

fig.rec-1.eps

1. Pulse el botón REC (GRABAR).

La unidad R-1 entra en el modo

de grabación interrumpida. La

pantalla indica la cantidad de

tiempo restante que la unidad R-

1 puede grabar para el tipo de

archivo (calidad de la grabación) seleccionado por el usuario.

* El nombre de la canción que se muestra en el modo de grabación interrumpida es el nombre del

archivo que se creará en primer lugar cuando finalice la grabación.

fig.rec-2.eps

2. Pulse el botón DISPLAY

(PANTALLA).

3. Emita (o realice) los sonidos que desea grabar y sitúe el micrófono externo donde

pueda recoger el sonido.

* Si desea aplicar algún efecto al sonido a medida que lo graba, ajuste el nivel de entrada mientras

se activa el efecto (es decir, mientras se aplica).

fig.rec-3.eps

4. Aumente de forma gradual el

volumen de entrada.

Ajuste el nivel de manera que los

indicadores del nivel de entrada

■ que aparecen en la pantalla no

alcancen el extremo derecho ■.

(Posición en la ilustración de arriba)

Si el nivel de grabación es demasiado bajo, no podrá grabar sonidos muy tenues. Si el

nivel de la grabación es demasiado alto, los sonidos muy altos se distorsionarán, lo que

provocará crujidos en el sonido grabado.

Si el material que se dispone a grabar contiene sonidos altos repentinos, como la entrada de un

tambor en una interpretación orquestal o una risa inesperada durante una conversación calmada,

es conveniente utilizar el limitador (06 Limiter (06 Limitador), pág. 150). Si lo utiliza, ajuste el

nivel de entrada de la forma adecuada al tipo de sonido predominante en la grabación (no la

adecuada al sonido alto repentino que aparece de forma ocasional).

Al usar el limitador, el nivel de entrada se ajusta automáticamente de manera que el nivel de entrada

de audio no sea excesivamente alto. Al usar el limitador, deberá ajustar el nivel de entrada de manera

que el símbolo

■

en la posición en la ilustración aparezca sólo ocasionalmente.

Tiempo de grabación restante

R-1_egfis1.book 143 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

144

Métodos básicos de grabación

fig.rec-time.eps

Pulse el

botón REC

(GRABAR).

Se iniciará la grabación.

* Si lo prefiere, también puede iniciar la

grabación pulsando el

botón PLAY/

PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA).

Si mueve el

control del volumen de entrada

en el modo de grabación

interrumpida o durante la grabación, el nivel de entrada cambiará. Tenga

cuidado de no manipular el control del

volumen de entrada

sin darse

cuenta. Incluso si el

interruptor HOLD

(BLOQUEO) está en la posición ON

(ACTIVAR), el

volumen de entrada

no se ve afectado por la función HOLD

(BLOQUEO).

Una vez que haya terminado de grabar, pulse el

botón STOP

(DETENER).

Si desea interrumpir la grabación, pulse el

botón PLAY/PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/

PAUSA). Si desea cancelar la pausa y reanudar la grabación, pulse de nuevo el

botón PLAY/PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA).

Los datos grabados se guardarán como un archivo en la tarjeta CompactFlash. La

pantalla indicará el nombre del archivo que contiene los datos grabados, y el

archivo se seleccionará.

* El nombre de archivo se crea de forma automática, empleando el formato siguiente:

R1_0001.MP3

La parte del nombre

0001

corresponde al número que sigue a la numeración de archivo más alta

contenida en la tarjeta CompactFlash.

* El archivo se crea en el nivel raíz de la tarjeta CompactFlash. No se crean carpetas (directorios).

Para oír los datos que acaba de grabar, pulse el

botón PLAY/PAUSE

(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Si desea conocer otros métodos de reproducción,

consulte

“Métodos de reproducción”

(pág. 145).

Tiempo transcurrido desde

el inicio de la grabación

Cómo el medidor de nivel de entrada indica el nivel de señal

Número de ■'s dB Número de ■'s dB

Ninguno ∞ –– -50,0 8 -21,0 –– -18,0

1 -50,0 –– -40,0 9 -18,0 –– -15,0

2 -40,0 –– -36,0 10 -15,0 –– -12,0

3 -36,0 –– -33,0 11 -12,0 –– -9,0

4 -33,0 –– -30,0 12 -9,0 –– -6,0

5 -30,0 –– -27,0 13 -6,0 –– -3,0

6 -27,0 –– -24,0 14 -3,0 –– 0,0

7 -24,0 –– -21,0 15 0,0 –– (Clip)

R-1_egfis1.book 144 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

145

Métodos de reproducción

La unidad R-1 no dispone de altavoces internos. Para oír la reproducción, es preciso que

conecte un par de auriculares o altavoces.

Puede utilizar el jack de auriculares de la unidad R-1 como una salida digital (salida

digital) para conectar la unidad a un dispositivo de audio digital, o como una salida de

línea, para conectarla a un dispositivo de audio analógico.

Antes de continuar, realice las conexiones con el tipo de cable adecuado para el

dispositivo. Consulte

“Connecting headphones”

(pág. 22),

“Connecting digital

speakers (digital devices)”

(pág. 23) o

“Connecting analog speakers (analog

devices)”

(pág. 24).

Cuando la pantalla muestre el mensaje indicado en la ilustración, gire el

mando

VALUE

(VALOR) para seleccionar una canción (archivo).

Pulse el

botón PREV

(ANT) para desplazarse a la canción anterior (archivo), o el

botón NEXT

(SIG) para desplazarse a la canción siguiente (archivo).

* Si la pantalla indica No Song (Ninguna canción), esto significa que la tarjeta CompactFlash

no contiene ningún archivo que la unidad R-1 pueda reproducir.

Pulse el

botón PLAY

(REPRODUCIR) ( ); a continuación, se inicia la

reproducción de la canción (archivo) indicada en la pantalla.

Gire lentamente el control del

volumen de salida

hacia la derecha para ajustar

el volumen y establecerlo en un nivel de audición agradable.

* El nombre de la canción que aparece en la pantalla es el nombre del archivo. No corresponde

a la etiqueta ID3 contenida en el archivo MP3.

* Los nombres de las canciones se muestran en orden alfabético, según la siguiente lista de

caracteres; no se muestran en el orden en que fueron grabadas.

(espacio) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

* Si la tarjeta CompactFlash contiene subdirectorios (carpetas), todos los archivos guardados

en el nivel raíz se mostrarán en primer lugar, seguidos de los archivos guardados en los

subdirectorios (carpetas).

* La unidad ignora los nombres de archivo que empiezan con un punto (“.”) y no los incluye

en la lista.

* La unidad ignora los archivos que tienen una extensión diferente a .mp3 o .wav y no los

incluye en la lista.

Si desea obtener más información acerca de los archivos que la unidad R-1

puede grabar y reproducir, consulte

“Types of files that the R-1 can

handle”

(pág. 28).

Reproducción normal

R-1_egfis1.book 145 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

146

Métodos de reproducción

Esta función permite al usuario especificar un fragmento de la canción durante la reproducción de

ésta a fin de reproducirlo repetidamente.

Procedimiento

Durante la reproducción, pulse el

botón REPEAT

(REPETIR) ( )

una vez.

Ese punto se determinará como el

principio de la repetición (punto

Pulse de nuevo el

botón REPEAT

(REPETIR). Ese punto se

determinará como el final de la

repetición (punto

fig.repeat-a

El fragmento especificado en los

pasos 1 y 2 (es decir, el fragmento

entre los puntos A y B) se

reproducirá repetidamente.

Para cancelar la repetición de la

reproducción, pulse de nuevo el

botón REPEAT

(REPETIR).

Para cancelar esta función

• Si una vez especificados los puntos

pulsa el

botón REPEAT

(REPETIR) ( ), se

cancelará la definición de los puntos

• Si después de especificar el punto

pulsa el

botón STOP

(DETENER) antes de

especificar el punto

, se cancelará la definición del punto

• Si además de cancelar la definición de la repetición desea detener la reproducción, pulse el

botón STOP

(DETENER). La reproducción se detendrá y la definición de la repetición de la

reproducción (puntos

) también se cancelará.

REPETICIÓN A-B (repetición de la reproducción)

Song

Notas

* Si después de especificar el punto A pulsa el botón STOP (DETENER) antes de especificar

el punto B, se cancelará la definición del punto A.

* Si una vez especificado el punto A continúa la reproducción hasta el final de la canción, se

repetirá la reproducción del fragmento comprendido entre el punto A y el final de la canción.

* Si pulsa el botón STOP (DETENER) durante la repetición de la reproducción, la

reproducción se detendrá y la definición del fragmento que debe repetirse (A-B) se cancelará.

R-1_egfis1.book 146 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

147

Métodos de reproducción

A continuación se describe cómo reproducir a la mitad de la velocidad normal.

Procedimiento

Mientras la unidad esté detenida o

durante la reproducción, pulse el

botón SPEED

(VELOCIDAD).

La línea inferior de la pantalla indicará

1/2

, y el sonido se reproducirá a la

mitad de

la velocidad normal

Si la unidad R-1 está reproduciendo en ese momento, la reproducción se ralentizará.

Si la unidad R-1 está detenida en ese momento, la reproducción a la mitad de la

velocidad normal se iniciará cuando pulse el

botón PLAY

(REPRODUCIR).

* Esta función ajusta el tono de la reproducción a la mitad de velocidad de manera que el

sonido conserva el tono de la reproducción normal. Esto puede producir un efecto de

ondulación en la reproducción que en ningún caso puede considerarse un problema de

funcionamiento.

Para cancelar esta función

Si la función de

reproducción a la mitad de velocidad

está activa, pulse el

botón

SPEED

para cancelarla.

Si no cancela la función de reproducción a la mitad de velocidad, la

siguiente canción también se reproducirá a la mitad de velocidad.

REPRODUCCIÓN 1/2

(reproducción a la mitad de velocidad)

R-1_egfis1.book 147 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

148

Métodos de reproducción

En este modo puede especificar el orden y el método de reproducción.

Pulse el

botón MENU

(MENÚ).

Si lo desea, puede cambiar el modo de reproducción durante la reproducción con la

unidad R-1.

En primer lugar pulse el

botón STOP

(DETENER) para detener la reproducción.

A continuación, utilice el mando VALUE (VALOR) para seleccionar

05 Play Mode

(05 Modo de reproducción).

Pulse el

botón ENTER

(INTRO).

Utilice el

mando VALUE

(VALOR) para seleccionar el modo de reproducción que

desee.

fig.sequential.eps

Una vez que haya seleccionado el

modo de reproducción que desee,

pulse el

botón ENTER

(INTRO).

Pulse el

botón MENU

(MENÚ).

Volverá al modo de reproducción.

PLAY MODE (Modo de reproducción)

Sequential

(Secuencial)

Las canciones se reproducirán en el orden: 001, 002, 003... 009

* Utilice los botones PREV (ANT) y NEXT (SIG) o el mando VALUE

(VALOR) para seleccionar un archivo (canción).

Single

(Único)

La unidad repetirá la reproducción del archivo (canción) seleccionado

únicamente.

Shuffle

(Aleatorio)

El orden de reproducción de las canciones varía de forma automática.

* Las canciones reproducidas una vez no volverán a reproducirse.

* Si utiliza los botones PREV (ANT) y NEXT (SIG) o el mando VALUE

(VALOR) para seleccionar un archivo (canción), los nombres de los

archivos (canciones) aparecerán en el mismo orden que si se selecciona el

modo de reproducción

Sequential

(Secuencial).

R-1_egfis1.book 148 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

149

Utilización de los efectos

En esta sección se describe cómo aplicar un efecto durante la reproducción o mientras

la unidad se encuentra en el modo de grabación interrumpida. Si lo desea, también

puede definir parámetros del efecto antes de iniciar la reproducción o probar diferentes

parámetros del efecto a medida que realiza grabaciones de prueba.

fig.effect.eps

La unidad memoriza los parámetros del efecto que defina hasta que los

modifique.

Aplicación de un efecto

Durante la reproducción

en modo de grabación

interrumpida

Seleccione un efecto

Modo de edición

Seleccione un parámetro

Tipo -> Nivel1

Edite el parámetro

Pop -> Dance

-> HipHop...

Salga del modo

de edición del efecto

Inicie la reproducción

o grabación

SALIRSALIR

INTROINTRO

SALIRSALIR

INTROINTRO

SALIRSALIR

01:Easy EQ (01:EQ fácil)

-> 02:For Speech...

(02:Discurso...)

Modo de efecto ACTIVADO

EDITAR

R-1_egfis1.book 149 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

150

Algunos parámetros

Si desea obtener información detallada acerca de cómo definir los parámetros, consulte

“Procedures”

(pág. 56).

* Durante la reproducción, la grabación y mientras la unidad se encuentra en el modo de

grabación interrumpida, puede activar el modo Setup (Configuración) pulsando el

botón

(MENÚ).

Configuración del sistema (modo Setup (Configuración))

Menú/efecto

Valor

(predeterminado

en negrita)

Procedimi

ento

LCD Contrast (Contraste de LCD)

Ajusta el contraste de la pantalla.

1–

–10 A (pág. 56)

LCD Backlight (Luz de fondo de LCD)

Especifica el tiempo que tiene que transcurrir

antes de que la luz de fondo de la pantalla se

apague (cuando la unidad funciona con pilas).

OFF

(DESACTIVADO),

ON (ACTIVADO),

5sec

(5 seg.), 10sec

(10 seg), 20sec (20

seg)

A (pág. 56)

Delete File (Eliminar archivo)

Elimina un archivo.

–– B (pág. 58)

Rename File (Cambiar nombre al archivo)

Cambia el nombre de un archivo.

–– C (pág. 60)

Play Mode (Modo de reproducción)

Especifica el orden en el que se reproducirán las

canciones.

Sequential

(Secuencial),

Single (Único),

Shuffle (Aleatorio)

A (pág. 56)

Limiter (Limitador)

Activa y desactiva el limitador del nivel de

entrada.

* El limitador reduce el nivel de entrada de

manera apropiada cuando éste es excesivo.

El valor umbral es -9 dBFS.

OFF

(DESCATIVADO),

ON (ACTIVADO)

A (pág. 56)

Record Mode (Modo de grabación)

Especifica el tipo de archivo creado durante la

grabación. Determinará la calidad de audio del

archivo grabado.

MP3 64kbps,

MP3 96kbps,

MP3 128kbps,

MP3 160kbps,

MP3 192kbps

MP3 256kbps,

MP3 320kbps,

WAV 16bit,

WAV 24bit

A (pág. 56)

Nivel de corte

Nivel umbral

Nivel de señal de entrada

Reducir el ruido

de corte y pasar

el convertidor de AD

Nivel de AD

R-1_egfis1.book 150 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

EnglishDeutschFrançaisItalianoEspañol

151

Algunos parámetros

Track Splitting (Separación de pistas)

Activa y desactiva la función de separación de

pistas.

* Esta función divide de forma automática el

archivo siempre que haya un intervalo de tres o

más segundos de silencio durante la grabación.

OFF

(DESCATIVADO),

ON (ACTIVADO)

A (pág. 56)

Input Monitor (Control de entrada)

Active esta función si desea controlar la señal de

entrada mediante auriculares. Desactívela si no

desea controlar la señal.

* Durante la grabación, el sonido se oirá tanto si

esta función está activada como si está

desactivada.

OFF

(DESCATIVADO),

ON (ACTIVADO)

A (pág. 56)

Input Select (Selección de entrada)

Defina esta función en STEREO (ESTÉREO) si ha

conectado un micrófono estéreo. Defina esta

función en MONO si ha conectado un micrófono

monoaural. Si utiliza el parámetro STEREO

(ESTÉREO) con una señal monoaural, sólo se

grabará el canal izquierdo (L). Si se define en

MONO, el sonido se grabará en ambos canales,

izquierdo y derecho (L y R).

* El archivo grabado será estéreo incluso si el

parámetro se define en MONO.

STEREO

(ESTÉREO),

MONO

A (pág. 56)

Sleep Timer (Temporizador de suspensión)

Especifica el tiempo que tiene que transcurrir

para que la unidad R-1 entre en el modo Sleep

(Suspensión) (cuando la unidad funciona con

pilas).

* Este parámetro no tiene efecto si utiliza el

adaptador de CA.

OFF

(DESCATIVADO),

1min, 2min,

3min

5min, 10min,

15min, 30min,

45min, 60min

A (pág. 56)

Format Card (Formatear tarjeta)

Formatea una tarjeta CompactFlash.

– D (pág. 62)

Firmware Ver1.00 (Firmware ver 1.00)

Permite comprobar la versión del programa de la

unidad R-1.

– E (pág. 64)

About the R-1 (Acerca de la unidad R-1)

Muestra información relativa a la unidad R-1.

– A (pág. 56)

Menú/efecto

Valor

(predeterminado

en negrita)

Procedimi

ento

R-1_egfis1.book 151 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

152

Main specifications

Recorder Part

●

Tracks

2 (stereo)

●

Signal Processing

AD/DA conversion: 24 bits, 96 kHz

●

Data Type

<For recording> * Stereo only

<For playback> * All sampling frequencies are converted to 44.1 kHz for playback

●

Memory Card

CompactFlash (supports 32 MB–2 GB)

Recordable times

Units: minutes

* These recording times are approximate. Your actual results may vary somewhat.

* Use a CompactFlash card that has been formatted on the R-1.

* If more than one recorded file exists, the total recordable time will be less than this.

Format

MPEG 1, Audio Layer 3 (MP3)

Sampling Rate

44.1 kHz

Bit Rates

64/96/128/160/192/256/320 kbps

Format

WAV

Sampling Rate

44.1 kHz

Bit Depth

16/24 bits

Format

MPEG 1, Audio Layer 3 (MP3)

Sampling Rates

8/11.025/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz

Bit Rates

8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/144/160/192/224/256/

320 kbps or VBR (Variable Bit Rate)

Format

WAV

Sampling Rates

8/11.025/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz

Bit Depth

8/16/24 bits

File type 64 MB 256 MB 512 MB 2 GB

WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz

3 15 31 125

WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz

5 23 47 188

MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps

26 102 208 831

MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps

32 128 260 1,039

MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps

43 170 346 1,386

MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps

52 205 416 1,663

MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps

65 256 520 2,079

MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps

86 341 693 2,772

MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps

130 512 1,040 4,158

R-1_egfis1.book 152 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

153

Main specifications

Input and Output

●

Audio Inputs

Internal mic (stereo)

Mic input jack (stereo miniature phone

type, plug-in power supported)

Line input jack (stereo miniature phone

type)

* The mic input jack and line input jack

cannot be used simultaneously (line input

takes priority)

●

Audio Outputs

Headphone jack (stereo miniature phone

type)

Digital output jack (optical miniature

phone type)

Line output jack (stereo miniature phone

type)

* Headphones, digital output, and line

output share the same jack

●

Nominal Input Level

(adjustable)

-10 dBu (input level set to maximum)

●

Input Impedance

Mic input:6.8 k ohms

Line input:100 k ohms

●

Maximum Output Level

(adjustable)

9 dBu (output volume set to maximum)

●

Recommended Load

Impedance

32 ohms

●

Frequency Response

20 Hz–20 kHz

●

USB Interface

Mini-B type connector

* USB 1.1/2.0 mass storage device class

compatible

Effects

●

Effect Types

01: Easy EQ

02: For Speech

03: Voice Perform

04: Editable EQ

05: Noise Reducer

06: Hum Noise Cut

07: Reverb

08: Int-Mic Rec

09: Ext-Mic Rec

10: Mastering

11: Center Cancel

12: Tuner

13: Metronome

Others

●

Display

20 characters, 2 lines (backlit LCD)

●

Dimensions

99.3 (W) x 134 (D) x 30.2 (H) mm

●

Weight

260 g

* With batteries and CompactFlash card

●

Power Supply

AC Adaptor, Alkaline dry battery LR6

(AA) type x 2, or Nickel Hydrogen

battery (HR15/51) x 2

●

Accessories

Owner’s manual

AC adaptor (PSB-6U)

CompactFlash (64 M bytes)

USB cable (Mini-B type)

Carrying case

* In the interest of product improvement, the

specifications and/or appearance of this unit are

subject to change without prior notice.

R-1_egfis1.book 153 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

154

Index

AC adaptor ................................................................. 8, 19

AC adaptor jack .............................................................. 16

batteries ..................................................................... 20–21

Battery compartment ..................................................... 17

battery compartment cover .......................................... 20

Battery life ....................................................................... 21

bit depth .......................................................................... 28

Bit Rate ............................................................................. 28

Bit rate ........................................................................ 28, 44

Carrying case .................................................................... 8

Center Cancel ........................................................... 48, 51

Clipping ........................................................................... 46

CND ................................................................................. 15

CompactFlash ................................................................. 25

CompactFlash card .............................................. 8, 27, 44

CompactFlash cards ...................................................... 29

Completed ....................................................................... 27

Delete File ........................................................................ 54

digital output jack .................................................... 16, 23

Display ............................................................................. 12

DISPLAY button .......................................... 13, 30, 33, 36

DYN ................................................................................. 15

dynamic microphone .................................................... 32

Easy EQ ..................................................................... 47, 49

EDIT button .............................................................. 12, 53

Editable EQ ............................................................... 47, 49

EFFECT button ......................................................... 12, 53

Eject button ..................................................................... 16

eject button ...................................................................... 26

ENTER button ...................... 14, 43, 53, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65

EXIT button ....................................... 14, 53, 57, 59, 61, 63

external mic ..................................................................... 67

Ext-Mic Rec. .............................................................. 47, 50

factory settings ............................................................... 65

Firmware ......................................................................... 55

For Speech ................................................................. 47, 49

format .............................................................................. 27

Format Card .............................................................. 27, 55

hardware devices ........................................................... 45

Headphone jack .............................................................. 16

headphone jack ............................................................... 22

headphones ..................................................................... 22

HOLD .............................................................................. 34

HOLD switch ......................................... 16, 31, 34, 37, 66

Hum Noise Cut ........................................................ 47, 50

Input Monitor ................................................................ 54

Input Select ..................................................................... 55

Input volume .................................................................. 15

input volume ............................................................ 29, 35

input volume control ........................................ 31, 34, 37

Inserting .......................................................................... 26

internal ............................................................................ 29

Internal mic .................................................................... 12

internal mic ..................................................................... 67

internal microphone ...................................................... 29

Int-Mic Rec. .............................................................. 47, 50

LCD Backlight ................................................................ 54

LCD backlight ................................................................ 20

LCD Contrast ................................................................. 54

Limiter ............................................................................. 54

Line input jack ............................................................... 15

line input jack ........................................................... 35–36

line output jack ........................................................ 16, 24

Mastering .................................................................. 48, 50

memory ........................................................................... 26

memory card .................................................................. 25

Memory card slot .......................................................... 16

memory card slot ........................................................... 27

Memory card slot cover ................................................ 17

memory card slot cover ................................................ 26

MENU button .................................. 13, 43, 57, 59, 61, 63

Metronome ............................................................... 48, 51

Mic input jack ................................................................. 15

mic input jack ........................................................... 32–33

Mic type select switch ................................................... 15

mic type select switch ................................................... 32

miniature plug-in powered condenser microphones 32

MP3 .................................................................................. 28

NEXT button ................................................ 13, 38–39, 61

No Card .................................................................... 44, 68

NO NAME ................................................................ 44–45

No Song .................................................................... 38, 59

Noise Reducer .......................................................... 47, 49

Output volume .............................................................. 16

output volume ............................................................... 38

Owner’s manual .............................................................. 8

R-1_egfis1.book 154 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

155

Index

PAUSE button .............................................. 14, 31, 34, 37

PLAY button ............................... 14, 31, 34, 37–38, 42, 61

Play Mode ....................................................................... 54

Playback .......................................................................... 28

Power switch .................................................................. 16

power switch .................................................................. 19

PREV button ................................................. 13, 38–39, 61

REC button .................................. 14, 30–31, 33–34, 36–37

Record Mode .................................................................. 54

Record Standby .............................................................. 31

Recording ........................................................................ 28

recording-standby .......................................................... 30

Recording-standby mode ............................................. 66

recording-standby mode ............................................... 67

remain .............................................................................. 66

Removing ........................................................................ 26

Rename File .................................................................... 54

REPEAT button ........................................................ 13, 40

Reverb ........................................................................ 47, 50

Safely Remove Hardware ............................................. 45

Sampling frequency ................................................. 28, 44

Sequential ........................................................................ 43

Shuffle .............................................................................. 43

Single ............................................................................... 43

Sleep Timer ..................................................................... 55

SPEED .............................................................................. 42

SPEED button ........................................................... 13, 42

stereo ................................................................................ 28

STOP ................................................................................ 37

STOP button ............................... 14, 31, 34, 37, 41, 43, 61

Stop Hardware Device .................................................. 45

Track Splitting ................................................................ 54

Tuner .......................................................................... 48, 51

USB 2.0 ............................................................................. 15

USB cable ..................................................................... 8, 44

USB connector ................................................................ 15

USB Mass Storage Device ............................................. 45

VALUE dial ................................. 14, 43, 53, 57, 59, 61, 63

VBR .................................................................................. 28

Voice Perform ........................................................... 47, 49

WAV ................................................................................ 28

R-1_egfis1.book 155 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

R-1_egfis1.book 156 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

R-1_egfis1.book 157 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

R-1_egfis1.book 158 ページ２００５年１１月１１日　金曜日　午後５時１３分

001

• Before using this unit, make sure to

read the instructions below, and the

Owner’s Manual.

..................................................................................................

002c

• Do not open (or modify in any way)

the unit or its AC adaptor.

..................................................................................................

003

• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or

replace parts within it (except when

this manual provides specific instruc-

tions directing you to do so). Refer all

servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland

Service Center, or an authorized Roland

distributor, as listed on the “Information”

page.

..................................................................................................

004

• Never use or store the unit in places

that are:

• Subject to temperature extremes

(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed

vehicle, near a heating duct, on top

of heat-generating equipment); or are

• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet

floors); or are

• Humid; or are

• Exposed to rain; or are

• Dusty; or are

• Subject to high levels of vibration.

..................................................................................................

007

• Make sure you always have the unit

placed so it is level and sure to remain

stable. Never place it on stands that

could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.

..................................................................................................

008c

• Be sure to use only the AC adaptor

supplied with the unit. Also, make

sure the line voltage at the installation

matches the input voltage specified on the AC

adaptor’s body. Other AC adaptors may use a

different polarity, or be designed for a

different voltage, so their use could result in

damage, malfunction, or electric shock.

..................................................................................................

008e

• Use only the attached power-supply

cord. Also, the supplied power cord

must not be used with any other

device.

..................................................................................................

009

• Do not excessively twist or bend the

power cord, nor place heavy objects

on it. Doing so can damage the cord,

producing severed elements and short

circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock

hazards!

..................................................................................................

Used for instructions intended to alert

the user to the risk of injury or material

damage should the unit be used

improperly.

* Material damage refers to damage or

other adverse effects caused with

respect to the home and all its

furnishings, as well to domestic

animals or pets.

Used for instructions intended to alert

the user to the risk of death or severe

injury should the unit be used

improperly.

The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be

carried out. The specific thing that must be done is

indicated by the design contained within the circle. In

the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-

cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

The symbol alerts the user to important instructions

or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is

determined by the design contained within the

triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for

general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.

The symbol alerts the user to items that must never

be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that

must not be done is indicated by the design contained

within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it

means that the unit must never be disassembled.

IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.

BLUE:

BROWN:

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying

the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.

NEUTRAL

LIVE

For the U.K.

This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.

For EU Countries

For Canada

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

NOTICE

AVIS

For the USA

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee

that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.

This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

For the USA

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Compliance Information Statement

Model Name :

Type of Equipment :

Responsible Party :

Address :

Telephone :

R-1

WAVE/MP3 RECORDER

Roland Corporation U.S.

5100 S. Eastern Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938

(323) 890 3700

*03892123- 03*

Owner’s Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Mode d’emploi

Manuale d’uso

Manual del usuario

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled:

“USING THE UNIT SAFELY” and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 2;

p. 5). These sections provide important information concerning

the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel

assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature

provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in

its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a

convenient reference.

any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.

As of December 10, 2005 (EDIROL-1)

Information When you need repair service, call your nearest EDIROL/Roland Service Center or authorized

EDIROL/Roland distributor in your country as shown below.

EUROPE

EDIROL (Europe) Ltd.

Studio 3.4 114 Power Road

London W4 5PY

U. K.

TEL: +44 (0)20 8747 5949

FAX:+44 (0)20 8747 5948

http://www.edirol.com/europe

Deutschland

TEL: 0700 33 47 65 20

France

TEL: 0810 000 371

Italia

TEL: 02 93778329

CANADA

Roland Canada Music Ltd.

(Head Office)

5480 Parkwood Way Richmond

B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA

TEL: (604) 270 6626

Roland Canada Music Ltd.

(Toronto Office)

170 Admiral Boulevard

Mississauga On L5T 2N6

CANADA

TEL: (905) 362 9707

U. S. A.

Roland Corporation U.S.

5100 S. Eastern Avenue

Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,

U. S. A.

TEL: (323) 890 3700

EGYPT

Al Fanny Trading Office

9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany

Street,

ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,

Cairo 11341, EGYPT

TEL: 20-2-417-1828

REUNION

Maison FO - YAM Marcel

25 Rue Jules Hermann,

Chaudron - BP79 97 491

Ste Clotilde Cedex,

REUNION ISLAND

TEL: (0262) 218-429

SOUTH AFRICA

Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.

Royal Cape Park, Unit 24

Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800

Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA

TEL: (021) 799 4900

CHINA

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co.,Ltd.

5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road

Shanghai 200090, CHINA

TEL: (021) 5580-0800

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co.,Ltd.

(BEIJING OFFICE)

10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili

Chaoyang District Beijing

100011 CHINA

TEL: (010) 6426-5050

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co.,Ltd.

(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)

2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie

Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,

Guangzhou 510600, CHINA

TEL: (020) 8736-0428

HONG KONG

Parsons Music Ltd.

8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39

Chatham Road South, T.S.T,

Kowloon, HONG KONG

TEL: 2333 1863

INDIA

Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.

409, Nirman Kendra

Mahalaxmi Flats Compound

Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,

Mumbai-400011, INDIA

TEL: (022) 2493 9051

INDONESIA

PT Citra IntiRama

J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150

Jakarta Pusat

INDONESIA

TEL: (021) 6324170

KOREA

Cosmos Corporation

1461-9, Seocho-Dong,

Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA

TEL: (02) 3486-8855

MALAYSIA/

SINGAPORE

Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.

45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,

Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling

Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA

TEL: (03) 7805-3263

PHILIPPINES

G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue

Makati, Metro Manila 1200,

PHILIPPINES

TEL: (02) 899 9801

TAIWAN

ROLAND TAIWAN

ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.

Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung

Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,

TAIWAN, R.O.C.

TEL: (02) 2561 3339

THAILAND

Theera Music Co. , Ltd.

330 Soi Verng NakornKasem,

New Road, Sumpantawongse,

Bangkok 10100, THAILAND

TEL: (02) 224-8821

VIETNAM

SAIGON MUSIC

DISTRIBUTOR

(TAN DINH MUSIC)

138 Tran Quang Khai Street

Dist. 1, Ho Chi Minh City

VIETNAM

TEL: (08) 848-4068

AUSTRALIA/

NEW ZEALAND

Roland Corporation

Australia Pty.,Ltd.

38 Campbell Avenue

Dee Why West. NSW 2099

AUSTRALIA

For Australia

Tel: (02) 9982 8266

For New Zealand

Tel: (09) 3098 715

ARGENTINA

Instrumentos Musicales S.A.

Av.Santa Fe 2055

(1123) Buenos Aires

ARGENTINA

TEL: (011) 4508-2700

BARBADOS

A&B Music Supplies LTD

12 Webster Industrial Park

Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados

TEL: (246)430-1100

BRAZIL

Roland Brasil Ltda.

Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B

Parque Industrial San Jose

Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL

TEL: (011) 4615 5666

CHILE

Comercial Fancy II S.A.

Rut.: 96.919.420-1

Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor

Santiago - Centro, CHILE

TEL: (02) 688-9540

COLOMBIA

Centro Musical Ltda.

Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9

Medellin, Colombia

TEL: (574)3812529

CURACAO

Zeelandia Music Center Inc.

Orionweg 30

Curacao, Netherland Antilles

TEL:(305)5926866

DOMINICAN REPUBLIC

Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez

Calle Proyecto Central No.3

Ens.La Esperilla

Santo Domingo,

Dominican Republic

TEL:(809) 683 0305

ECUADOR

Mas Musika

Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma

Guayaquil - Ecuador

TEL:(593-4)2302364

GUATEMALA

Casa Instrumental

Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11

Ciudad de Guatemala

Guatemala

TEL:(502) 599-2888

HONDURAS

Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.

BO.Paz Barahona

3 Ave.11 Calle S.O

San Pedro Sula, Honduras

TEL: (504) 553-2029

MARTINIQUE

Musique & Son

Z.I.Les Mangle

97232 Le Lamantin

Martinique F.W.I.

TEL: 596 596 426860

Gigamusic SARL

10 Rte De La Folie

97200 Fort De France

Martinique F.W.I.

TEL: 596 596 715222

MEXICO

Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.

Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar

de los Padres 01780 Mexico

D.F. MEXICO

TEL: (55) 5668-6699

NICARAGUA

Bansbach Instrumentos

Musicales Nicaragua

Altamira D'Este Calle Principal

de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida

1 Cuadra al Lago.#503

Managua, Nicaragua

TEL: (505)277-2557

IRELAND

Roland Ireland

G2 Calmount Park, Calmount

Avenue, Dublin 12

Republic of IRELAND

TEL: (01) 4294444

ITALY

Roland Italy S. p. A.

Viale delle Industrie 8,

20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY

TEL: (02) 937-78300

NORWAY

Roland Scandinavia Avd.

Kontor Norge

Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95

Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo

NORWAY

TEL: 2273 0074

POLAND

MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.

UL. Gibraltarska 4.

PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND

TEL: (022) 679 44 19

PORTUGAL

Roland Iberia, S.L.

Portugal Office

Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto

4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL

TEL: 22 608 00 60

ROMANIA

FBS LINES

Piata Libertatii 1,

535500 Gheorgheni,

ROMANIA

TEL: (266) 364 609

RUSSIA

MuTek

Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6

117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA

TEL: (095) 981-4967

SPAIN

Roland Iberia, S.L.

Paseo García Faria, 33-35

08005 Barcelona SPAIN

TEL: 93 493 91 00

SWEDEN

Roland Scandinavia A/S

SWEDISH SALES OFFICE

Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.

S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN

TEL: (0)8 702 00 20

SWITZERLAND

Roland (Switzerland) AG

Landstrasse 5, Postfach,

CH-4452 Itingen,

SWITZERLAND

TEL: (061) 927-8383

UKRAINE

TIC-TAC

Mira Str. 19/108

P.O. Box 180

295400 Munkachevo,

UKRAINE

TEL: (03131) 414-40

UNITED KINGDOM

Roland (U.K.) Ltd.

Atlantic Close, Swansea

Enterprise Park, SWANSEA

SA7 9FJ,

UNITED KINGDOM

TEL: (01792) 702701

BAHRAIN

Moon Stores

No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,

P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,

State of BAHRAIN

TEL: 17 211 005

PERU

Audionet

Distribuciones Musicales SAC

Juan Fanning 530

Miraflores

Lima - Peru

TEL: (511) 4461388

TRINIDAD

AMR Ltd

Ground Floor

Maritime Plaza

Barataria Trinidad W.I.

TEL: (868)638 6385

URUGUAY

Todo Musica S.A.

Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771

C.P.: 11.800

Montevideo, URUGUAY

TEL: (02) 924-2335

VENEZUELA

Instrumentos Musicales

Allegro,C.A.

Av.las industrias edf.Guitar

import

#7 zona Industrial de Turumo

Caracas, Venezuela

TEL: (212) 244-1122

AUSTRIA

Roland Elektronische

Musikinstrumente HmbH.

Austrian Office

Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,

A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA

TEL: (0512) 26 44 260

BELGIUM/FRANCE/

HOLLAND/

LUXEMBOURG

Roland Central Europe N.V.

Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel

(Westerlo) BELGIUM

TEL: (014) 575811

CZECH REP.

K-AUDIO

Kardasovska 626.

CZ-198 00 Praha 9,

CZECH REP.

TEL: (2) 666 10529

DENMARK

Roland Scandinavia A/S

Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,

DK-2100 Copenhagen

DENMARK

TEL: 3916 6200

FINLAND

Roland Scandinavia As, Filial

Finland

Elannontie 5

FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND

TEL: (0)9 68 24 020

GERMANY

Roland Elektronische

Musikinstrumente HmbH.

Oststrasse 96, 22844

Norderstedt, GERMANY

TEL: (040) 52 60090

GREECE

STOLLAS S.A.

Music Sound Light

155, New National Road

Patras 26442, GREECE

TEL: 2610 435400

HUNGARY

Roland East Europe Ltd.

Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83

H-2046 Torokbalint,

HUNGARY

TEL: (23) 511011

CYPRUS

Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.

17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,

CYPRUS

TEL: (022) 66-9426

IRAN

MOCO INC.

No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,

Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad

Tehran, IRAN

TEL: (021) 285-4169

ISRAEL

Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons

Ltd.

8 Retzif Ha’aliya Hashnya St.

Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL

TEL: (03) 6823666

JORDAN

MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.

FREDDY FOR MUSIC

P. O. Box 922846

Amman 11192 JORDAN

TEL: (06) 5692696

KUWAIT

EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI

& SONS CO.

Abdullah Salem Street,

Safat, KUWAIT

TEL: 243-6399

LEBANON

Chahine S.A.L.

Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine

Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-

5857

Beirut, LEBANON

TEL: (01) 20-1441

OMAN

TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.

Malatan House No.1

Al Noor Street, Ruwi

SULTANATE OF OMAN

TEL: 2478 3443

QATAR

Badie Studio & Stores

P.O. Box 62,

Doha, QATAR

TEL: 423554

SAUDI ARABIA

aDawliah Universal

Electronics APL

Corniche Road, Aldossary

Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,

SAUDI ARABIA

P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952

SAUDI ARABIA

TEL: (03) 898 2081

SYRIA

Technical Light & Sound

Center

Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.

Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,

Damascus, SYRIA

TEL: (011) 223-5384

TURKEY

ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.

Galip Dede Cad. No.37

Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY

TEL: (0212) 249 85 10

U.A.E.

Zak Electronics & Musical

Instruments Co. L.L.C.

Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,

No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,

U.A.E.

TEL: (04) 3360715

ASIA

AFRICA

AUSTRALIA/

NEW ZEALAND

EUROPE

CENTRAL/LATIN

AMERICA

MIDDLE EAST

NORTH AMERICA

03892123 ’05-11-4N

Owner’s Manual

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual edienungsanleitung Mode d’emploi Manuale d’uso Manual del usuario efore using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: USING THE UNIT SAFELY” and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 2; 5). These sections provide important information concerning e proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel ssured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature ovided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in s entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a onvenient reference. Copyright © 2004 ROLAND CORPORATION ights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION. 010 • This unit, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should immediately stop using the unit, and consult an audiologist. .................................................................................................. 011 • Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit. .................................................................................................. 012b • Immediately turn the power off, remove the AC adaptor from the outlet, and request servicing by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Edirol/Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page when: • The AC adaptor, the power-supply cord, or the plug has been damaged; or • If smoke or unusual odor occurs • Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto the unit; or • The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has become wet); or • The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance. 015 • Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be especially careful when using extension cords—the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating (watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through. .................................................................................................. 016 • Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Edirol/Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page. .................................................................................................. 019 • Batteries must never be recharged, heated, taken apart, or thrown into fire or water. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. 013 • In households with small children, an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit. .................................................................................................. 014 • Protect the unit from strong impact. (Do not drop it!) .................................................................................................. 3 101b • The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation. .................................................................................................. 102c • Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit. 110b • Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area, disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. .................................................................................................. 111: Selection • If used improperly, batteries may explode or leak and cause damage or injury. In the interest of safety, please read and observe the following precautions (P. 20). 1 • Carefully follow the installation instructions for batteries, and make sure you observe the correct polarity. .................................................................................................. 103b • At regular intervals, you should unplug the AC adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time. Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire. 2 • Avoid using new batteries together with used ones. In addition, avoid mixing different types of batteries. 3 • Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time. 5 • If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of cloth or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the discharge from the battery compartment. Then install new batteries. To avoid inflammation of the skin, make sure that none of the battery discharge gets onto your hands or skin. Exercise the utmost caution so that none of the discharge gets near your eyes. Immediately rinse the affected area with running water if any of the discharge has entered the eyes. .................................................................................................. 104 • Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children. .................................................................................................. 106 • Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit. .................................................................................................. 107c • Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit. .................................................................................................. 108b • Before moving the unit, disconnect the AC adaptor and all cords coming from external devices. .................................................................................................. 109b • Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet (P. 19). .................................................................................................. 4 6 • Never keep batteries together with metallic objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces, hairpins, etc. .................................................................................................. 112 • Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with whatever regulations for their safe disposal that may be observed in the region in which you live. .................................................................................................. IMPORTANTS NOTES 291a In addition to the items listed under “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on page 5, please read and observe the following: Power Supply 301 • Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet. 302 • The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is not a cause for concern. 303a • Since this device draws a relatively large amount of electrical current, we recommend that you use it with the AC adaptor unless AC power is unavailable. Should you prefer to use batteries, please use the alkaline type. 304a • When installing or replacing batteries, always turn off the power on this unit and disconnect any other devices you may have connected. This way, you can prevent malfunction and/ or damage to speakers or other devices. 307 • Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers or other devices. Placement 351 • Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away from the source of interference. 352a • This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers. 352b • Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch them off. 354a • Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit. 355b • When moved from one location to another where the temperature and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation has completely evaporated. Maintenance 401a • For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth. 402 • Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation. Repairs and Data 452 • Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should always be written down on paper (when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data. 5 IMPORTANTS NOTES Additional Precautions Before Using Cards • Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit’s memory on a hard disk. Using DATA Cards 551 704 • Carefully insert the DATA card all the way in—until it is firmly in place. fig.M512-Insert 552 • Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on a memory card once it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data. CompactFlash™ Reverse Side 553 • Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions. 554 • Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display. 555 • A small amount of noise may be heard from the display during normal operation. 556 • When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal elements. 558a • To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially when it is late at night). 559a • When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box (including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent packaging materials. 562 • Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some other make of connection cable, please note the following precautions. • Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of the cable. • Depending on the conditions in which you use the R-1, you may notice a slight sensation of discomfort or roughness when touching the R-1 itself or a metal part of a connected mic. This is due to an extremely small electrical charge which poses absolutely no danger to the human body. If this bothers you, you can use the R-1 on battery power as desired. 6 705 • Never touch the terminals of the DATA card. Also, avoid getting the terminals dirty. 707 • This unit’s memory card slot accepts CompactFlash memory cards. Microdrive storage media are not compatible. 708 • CompactFlash cards are constructed using precision components; handle the cards carefully, paying particular note to the following. • To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity, be sure to discharge any static electricity from your own body before handling the cards. • Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the contact portion of the cards. • Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or vibration. • Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles, or other such locations (storage temperature: -25 to 85˚ C). • Do not allow cards to become wet. • Do not disassemble or modify the cards. IMPORTANTS NOTES Copyright 851 • Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or in part, of a work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public performance, or the like) whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law. 852b • When transmitting audio signals to an external device via a digital connection, this device is able to transmit data without being subjected to certain restrictions of the Serial Copy Management System (SCMS). This is because the unit is intended solely for musical production, and is designed not to be subject to restrictions as long as it is used to record works (such as your own compositions) that do not infringe on the copyrights of others. (SCMS is a feature that prohibits secondgeneration and later copying through a digital connection. It is built into MD recorders and other consumer digital-audio equipment as a copyright-protection feature.) 853 • Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through your use of this unit. 204 * Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. 206j * Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® operating system.” 209 * Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. 234 * CompactFlash and Flash association. are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation and licensed by Compact- 235 * Roland Corporation is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash™ and CF logo ( trademarks. ) add * PortalPlayer and the PortalPlayer logo are trademarks owned by PortalPlayer, Inc. add * MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. 7 Checking the included items The R-1 comes with the following items. Immediately after opening the package, please check that you have all of these items. If any items are missing, please contact the dealer where you purchased the R-1. ■ R-1 fig.r-1 ■ AC adaptor This AC adaptor is designed specifically for the R-1. Do not attempt to use any other adaptor with the R-1. “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (p. 19) ■ USB cable (mini B type: 1 meter) You can use this cable to connect the R-1 to the USB connector of your computer. “Connecting the R-1 to your computer” (p. 44) * If the AC adaptor or USB cable becomes damaged or if you need a replacement for any reason, please contact one of the Service Centers listed in the “Information” section at the end of this manual. 8 ■ CompactFlash card (64 MB) You can use this memory card to carry out recording and playback on the R-1. “Memory card handling” (p. 25) ■ Carrying case You can use this case to protect the R-1 while it is being transported or stored. ■ Owner’s manual This is the document you’re reading. Keep it at hand for easy reference. Contents Checking the included items 8 The R-1’s controls and connectors 12 Getting ready to use the R-1 18 Basic connections ...................................................................................................... 18 Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power............................... 19 Installing the batteries and turning on the power ........................................ 20 Connecting headphones ................................................................................... 22 Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)................................................ 23 Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)............................................... 24 Memory card handling ............................................................................................ 25 Types of files that the R-1 can handle .................................................................... 28 Basic recording methods 29 Recording with the internal microphone .............................................................. 29 Recording with an external microphone............................................................... 32 Recording from a cassette tape or CD ................................................................... 35 Playback methods 38 Normal playback ...................................................................................................... 38 REPEAT A-B (Repeat playback) ............................................................................. 40 1/2 PLAY (Half-speed playback) ........................................................................... 42 PLAY MODE (Playback mode) .............................................................................. 43 Using the R-1 with your computer 44 Connecting the R-1 to your computer ................................................................... 44 Disconnecting the R-1 from your computer ......................................................... 45 Using effects 46 Effect list..................................................................................................................... 47 Applying an effect .................................................................................................... 52 Various settings 54 System settings (Setup mode) ................................................................................. 54 Restoring the factory settings.................................................................................. 65 List of messages 66 Troubleshooting 67 Problems with recording ......................................................................................... 67 Problems with playback .......................................................................................... 69 Other problems ......................................................................................................... 70 9 Contents Deutsch Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1 72 Vorbereitungen zum Einsatz des R-1 78 Formatieren einer CompactFlash-Karte ......................................................... 78 Einfache Aufnahmemethoden 79 Aufnahmen mit dem Einbaumikrofon .................................................................. 79 Aufnehmen mit externem Mikrofon...................................................................... 82 Wiedergabemethoden 85 Normale Wiedergabe ............................................................................................... 85 REPEAT A-B (Wiedergabewiederholung)............................................................ 86 1/2 PLAY (halbierte Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit) ............................................ 87 PLAY MODE (Wiedergabemodus)........................................................................ 88 Einsatz von Effekten 89 Anwenden eines Effekts .......................................................................................... 89 Verschiedene Einstellungen 90 Systemeinstellungen (Konfigurationsmodus) ...................................................... 90 Français Commandes et connecteurs 92 Préparatifs avant utilisation du R-1 98 Formatage d’une carte CompactFlash ............................................................ 98 Méthodes d’enregistrement 99 Enregistrement à l’aide du micro intégré.............................................................. 99 Enregistrement avec microphone externe........................................................... 102 Modes de lecture 105 Lecture normale ...................................................................................................... 105 REPEAT A-B (lecture en boucle) .......................................................................... 106 1/2 PLAY (lecture en mode demi-vitesse).......................................................... 107 PLAY MODE (modes de lecture) ......................................................................... 108 Utilisation des effets 109 Application d’un effet ............................................................................................ 109 Paramétrages divers 110 Paramétrage système (mode Setup)..................................................................... 110 10 Contents Italiano Controlli e connettori dell’R-1 112 Preparazione all’utilizzo dell’R-1 118 Formattazione di una scheda CompactFlash............................................... 118 Metodi di registrazione di base 119 Registrazione mediante il microfono interno ..................................................... 119 Registrazione mediante un microfono esterno................................................... 122 Metodi di riproduzione 125 Riproduzione normale ........................................................................................... 125 REPEAT A-B (Riproduzione ripetuta)................................................................. 126 1/2 PLAY (Riproduzione a velocità dimezzata) ................................................ 127 PLAY MODE (Modalità riproduzione) ............................................................... 128 Utilizzo degli effetti 129 Applicazione di un effetto ..................................................................................... 129 Impostazioni 130 Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode) .............................................................. 130 Español Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1 132 Preparación para el uso de la unidad R-1 138 Formateado de una tarjeta CompactFlash ................................................... 138 Métodos básicos de grabación 139 Grabación con el micrófono interno..................................................................... 139 Grabación con un micrófono externo .................................................................. 142 Métodos de reproducción 145 Reproducción normal............................................................................................. 145 REPETICIÓN A-B (repetición de la reproducción) ........................................... 146 REPRODUCCIÓN 1/2 (reproducción a la mitad de velocidad) ..................... 147 PLAY MODE (Modo de reproducción)............................................................... 148 Utilización de los efectos 149 Aplicación de un efecto.......................................................................................... 149 Algunos parámetros 150 Configuración del sistema (modo Setup (Configuración))............................... 150 Main specifications 152 Index 154 11 The R-1’s controls and connectors fig.panel-1 1 2 14 3 4 5 15 6 7 8 16 9 10 11 12 1 13 Internal mic This is a stereo microphone that’s built into the R-1. You can’t use the internal microphone if a microphone or other device is connected to the mic jacks 18 or line input jacks 19 . If you want to use the internal microphone, don’t connect anything to the other input jacks. When recording via the internal microphone, set the mic type select switch to DYN. 2 Display Various information about the R-1’s operating state is shown here. 3 EFFECT button Press the EFFECT button to switch the effect on/off. This button will light red when the effect is on. If you turn this on before or during playback, the effect will be applied to the sound that is being played back. If you turn this on before or during recording, the effect will be applied to the sound that is being input; i.e., the sound that has been processed by the effect will be recorded. The R-1 provides various effects that let you modify the sound being played back or recorded, giving the sound more impact or allowing more comfortable listening. You can also transform the sound to give it a totally new character. 4 EDIT button Use this button to make effect settings. For details on the effects, refer to “Using effects” (p. 46). You can make effect settings regardless of whether the EFFECT button is on or off. 12 The R-1’s controls and connectors 5 MENU button This button selects Setup mode, where you can make various settings for the R-1. Here you can adjust the LCD contrast, specify the recording quality, and make various other overall settings for the R-1. For details, refer to “Various settings” (p. 54) DISPLAY button English 6 This switches the contents of the R-1’s display. In PLAY mode, this button will cycle through the playback time, the remaining playback time in the current song (file), the type of song (file), and the bit rate. Press the DISPLAY button to switch the contents of the display. 7 PREV button 8 Deutsch Use this button to move to the beginning of the song or to select the preceding song. Pressing this button in the middle of a song will move to the beginning of that song. If you are already at the beginning (00:00) of the song, pressing this button will take you to the preceding song. You can press and hold down this button to rewind. These operations are available while playing or stopped. NEXT button 9 Français Use this button to select the next song. You can press and hold down this button to fastforward. These operations are available while playing or stopped. REPEAT button This button lets you play repeatedly between two points (A - B) you specify in the song. Press this button once to mark point “A” and press it again to mark point “B.” To cancel repeat playback, press the REPEAT button once again. When you cancel repeat playback, points A and B will both be cancelled. fig.repeat-a 1. During playback, press the REPEAT button once. Song A Italiano That point will be the beginning (point A) of the repeated playback. fig.repeat-b 2. Press the REPEAT button once again. That point A B A B Song Español will be the end (point B) of the repeated playback. fig.repeat-ab Playback will occur repeatedly over the range you specified in steps 1 and 2. To cancel repeat playback, press the REPEAT button once again. 10 Song SPEED button This button slows the playback to half-speed. Press it once again to return to normal speed. This is useful when you are playing along with music at an uncomfortably fast tempo, or when listening to rapid speech. 13 The R-1’s controls and connectors fig.panel-2 1 17 2 18 19 14 3 20 4 5 15 6 7 8 21 9 10 11 12 11 16 13 STOP button This button stops playback or recording. 12 PLAY/PAUSE button This button starts playback. It also pauses recording or playback. If you press this button while playing, playback will pause, and the R-1’s display will indicate PLAY-PAUSE. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button once again to resume playback. Similarly, if you press this button while recording, recording will pause. The R-1’s display will indicate REC-PAUSE, and the REC button will blink red. To resume recording from the Rec Standby condition, press the REC button once again (or press the PLAY/PAUSE button). The REC button lights red during recording. 13 REC button When stopped, pressing the REC button will put the R-1 in recording-standby mode. The R-1's display will indicate REC STANDBY, and the REC button will blink red. To begin recording from recording-standby mode, press the REC button once again (or press the PLAY/PAUSE button). During recording, the REC button will light red. 14 VALUE dial Use this dial to select songs, to specify effect types and values, and to select setup mode items. 15 EXIT button Use this button to return to the previous item in Effect Edit or Setup mode. In Setup mode, your value changes will be cancelled if you press the EXIT button before pressing the ENTER button. 16 ENTER button Use this button to select an item or finalize a change in Effect Edit or Setup mode. 14 The R-1’s controls and connectors 17 Mic input jack Accepts connection of a microphone. If a cable is plugged into the line input jack, audio will not be input through the mic input jack. 18 English Set the mic type select switch 19 to the appropriate position depending on whether the connected microphone is a dynamic microphone or a plugin-powered miniature condenser microphone. Stereo microphones are supported; use a stereo mini-type cable to make connections. If you use a monaural microphone, set the Setup mode “10 Input Select” setting to MONO. For details on this setting, refer to “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54). Line input jack 19 Deutsch If you want to input an audio signal from an audio device or electronic musical instrument into the R-1, use a stereo mini-plug cable to connect it to this jack. Mic type select switch 20 DYN Use this setting if you’ve connected a dynamic microphone. If you’re using the internal microphone, set this to DYN. CND Use this setting if you’ve connected a miniature condenser microphone that requires a power supply. You must use a “plug-in powered” microphone. This jack supplies a voltage of 2 V. * If this switch is set to CND, do not connect any microphone or device other than a “plug-in powered” microphone. Any other type of microphone or device may be damaged. Français Set this switch to the appropriate position according to the type of microphone you’ve connected to the mic input jack 17 . Input volume USB connector You can use the included USB cable to connect this connector to your computer. If the R-1 is connected to your computer, the song files you record can be transferred or copied to your computer. You can also transfer or copy MP3 or WAV files from your computer to the R-1 so that these files can be played on the R-1. This connector supports USB 2.0 (hi-speed USB), allowing files to be transferred rapidly. If you want to connect the R-1 to your computer, please refer to “Connecting the R-1 to your computer” (p. 44). When your computer has correctly recognized the R-1, the R-1’s display will indicate Connected via USB. Español 21 Italiano This adjusts the input volume of the sound from the built-in mics 1 , mic input jack 17 , or line input jack 18 . Use the procedure described in “Adjusting the input level” (p. 30) to adjust this while watching the input level. While the R-1 is connected to a computer, all functionality of the R-1 (other than its power switch) is disabled; operating the buttons or switches will not do anything. 15 The R-1’s controls and connectors fig.panel-3 1 22 23 22 24 25 26 27 28 Power switch This turns the power on/off. Do not turn off the power during playback or recording. You must make sure that playback or recording is stopped before you turn off the power. • If you accidentally turn off the power during recording, the data being recorded will not be saved to the CompactFlash card. • The CompactFlash card may be damaged if you turn off the R-1’s power while data is being read or written, such as during playback or recording. • If you turn off the R-1’s power while the “Now working...” indication is shown during effect editing or while saving a setting you’ve changed, the R-1 will become unstable, and may become unable to start up. Be very careful to never turn off the power when the unit is in such states. 23 AC adaptor jack Connect the included AC adaptor to this jack. 24 HOLD switch If you set the HOLD switch to the ON position, button presses on the R-1 will be disabled; this is a convenient way to prevent the R-1 from being operated accidentally. However, even when the HOLD switch is ON, the mic type select switch 19 , input volume 20 , power switch 22 , and output volume 25 will still be operable. 25 Output volume This adjusts the volume that is sent from the headphone/line output/digital output jack 26 . However, the volume of the digital output is not adjustable. 26 Headphone/line output/digital output jack This jack outputs audio from the R-1 to headphones or external speakers. If you want to output a digital signal, use a round optical mini-type digital cable. 27 Eject button Press this to eject the CompactFlash card inserted in the memory card slot 28 Memory card slot Insert a CompactFlash card into this slot. CompactFlash is the only type of memory card that the R-1 can use. 16 28 . The R-1’s controls and connectors English fig.panel-4 Deutsch 29 30 29 Battery compartment Memory card slot cover Italiano This cover prevents the CompactFlash card from being removed accidentally. When you open the cover, you will see the memory card slot 28 and eject button 27 . Español 30 Français If you want to operate the R-1 on batteries, install the batteries here. If you are operating the R-1 with its AC adaptor, you don’t need to install batteries. You must switch off the R-1’s power before changing from AC adaptor operation to battery operation, or from battery operation to AC adaptor operation. Please read “Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (p. 20) before you use the R-1. 17 Getting ready to use the R-1 Basic connections * Before making connections with other equipment, you must minimize the volume and turn off the power of all of your equipment in order to prevent malfunction and/or speaker damage. * If you use a cable with a built-in resistor, the volume of the device connected to the line input jack (LINE IN) may be too low. If so, you should use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor. fig.basic_50 MD player or similar for recording DIGITAL IN Headphones AC adaptor Stereo mic PHONES (OPTICAL) DC IN MIC LINE IN USB LINE OUT USB CD/MD player for playback Computer The R-1 does not have built-in speakers. In order to hear the playback, you will need to provide headphones or speakers. You can use the R-1’s headphone jack as a digital output (optical out) for connection to a digital device, or as a line output for connection to an analog device. Use the appropriate cable for your device. For details, refer to“Connecting headphones” (p. 22), “Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)” (p. 23), or “Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)” (p. 24). * Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by: 1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s). 2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers. 3. Lowering volume levels. 18 Getting ready to use the R-1 Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power 941 English * Once the connections have been completed (p. 18), turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices. 942 * This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally. 1 Deutsch * If batteries are installed and the AC adaptor is also connected, the power will be supplied from the AC adaptor. Turn off the R-1’s power switch. Français fig.off OFF 2 Connect the DC plug of the AC adaptor to the DC IN jack on the rear panel of the R-1. * Use only the AC adaptor supplied with the R-1. 3 4 Italiano Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. Turn on the R-1’s power switch. Español fig.on-off ON * If batteries are installed and the AC adaptor is also connected, the power will be supplied from the AC adaptor. 19 Getting ready to use the R-1 Installing the batteries and turning on the power Types of batteries you can use: • • AA alkaline batteries (LR6) AA nickel metal hydride batteries (HR15/51) * The R-1 itself is not able to charge nickel metal hydride batteries; you will need to use a separate battery charger. fig.battery 1 2 3 4 Turn off the R-1’s power switch. Detach the battery compartment cover located on the bottom panel of the R-1. Insert two AA batteries into the battery compartment, making sure to observe the correct polarity (+ and indications). Close the battery compartment cover. fig.on-2 5 Turn on the R-1’s power switch. ON Note when using the R-1 on batteries 20 • We recommend using alkaline batteries which have a longer life. • Don’t mix new batteries with used batteries or batteries of different types. • If you won’t be using the R-1 for an extended period of time, you should remove the batteries to prevent them from leaking and damaging the unit. • If the R-1 is running on batteries, the display may turn off (the Sleep function) or the LCD backlight may turn off to save power. If you want to change these settings, proceed as described in “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54). If you’re using the AC adaptor, these settings are not used. • When connecting the R-1 to your computer via a USB cable, you must use the AC adaptor to prevent the batteries from running down while connected. Getting ready to use the R-1 About the remaining battery capacity English When the batteries run low, a battery icon ( ) is displayed blinking in the upper right of the display. When this message appears, replace the batteries as soon as possible. If you continue using the unit when the batteries have run low, the following screen will appear, and all of the R-1’s functionality will stop. fig.battery.eps Turn off the power switch and replace the batteries with fresh ones. Battery life Continuous playback approximately 5.5 hours Continuous recording approximately 2 hours Deutsch (When using alkaline batteries, MP3 192 kbps, and a 256 MB CompactFlash card) * The battery life indicated above is approximate. Battery life will vary depending on the environment in which you are using the R-1 and your method of use. Español Italiano Français * The battery life will be shorter if you allow display backlighting to remain on or if you use numerous effects. 21 Getting ready to use the R-1 Connecting headphones Here’s how to connect headphones. fig.phones Output volume Headphone jack Headphones 1 2 3 Turn off the power of the R-1. Turn the output volume all the way toward the left to minimize the volume. Connect your headphones to the headphone jack. Now you can use the R-1 to record or play back as described in “Basic recording methods” (p. 29) or “Playback methods” (p. 38). Even if the song (file) was recorded at an appropriate recording level, you may hear distortion or crackling during loud passages of the song if the output volume is too high. 22 Getting ready to use the R-1 Connecting digital speakers (digital devices) Here’s how to connect amplified speakers that have digital input jacks. fig.speaker Optical cable English Digital output jack Round optical mini-plug Rectangular optical plug Deutsch DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL) Français Amplified speakers 2 Turn off the power of the R-1. Italiano 1 Set the volume of the speakers to the minimum setting. * If you’re using a digital connection, the R-1’s output volume control will not affect the volume. * The digital output has a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. 3 Connect the digital output jack to your digital-compatible amplified speakers. Español Use a cable with a round optical mini-plug to connect to the R-1’s digital output jack. Cables are not included; you will need to provide them separately. Now you can use the R-1 to record or play back as described in “Basic recording methods” (p. 29) or “Playback methods” (p. 38). 4 Gradually raise the speaker volume to an appropriate listening level. If you’re using a digital connection, the R-1’s output volume control will not affect the volume. 23 Getting ready to use the R-1 Connecting analog speakers (analog devices) fig.analog Output volume Line output jack Audio cable Amplified speakers 1 2 3 LINE IN Turn off the power of the R-1. Turn the output volume all the way toward the left to minimize the volume. Connect the R-1’s line output jack to your amplified speakers. You will need an audio cable for connection to the R-1's line output jack. Cables are not included; you will need to provide them separately. Now you can use the R-1 for recording or playback as described in “Basic recording methods” (p. 29) or “Playback methods” (p. 38). 4 Gradually turn the output volume toward the right to increase the volume. You can also adjust the volume of your speakers. 24 Getting ready to use the R-1 Memory card handling The R-1 uses CompactFlash memory cards. • • CompactFlash cards of up to 4 GB (Gigabytes) in size can be used. Even when using a high-capacity CompactFlash card, recording will stop when the file being recorded reaches 2 GB in size. The file will automatically be saved, and recording will end. Depending on the manufacturer or model, some CompactFlash cards may not be capable of successful recording or playback on the R-1. Micro Drives cannot be used. If you inadvertently use a Micro Drive, we can take no responsibility for any damage or malfunctions that may occur to the Micro Drive or to the R-1. Deutsch • English Types of CompactFlash that you can use 930 * Never insert or remove a CompactFlash card while this unit’s power is on. Doing so may corrupt the unit’s data or the data on the CompactFlash card. 931 * Carefully insert the CompactFlash card all the way in-until it is firmly in place. Français Recordable times on a CompactFlash card The following table shows the approximate lengths of time you can record using CompactFlash cards. Recordable times (approximate) CompactFlash size 256 MB 512 MB 2 GB WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz 3 15 31 125 WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps 5 26 MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps 32 43 MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps 52 65 86 130 23 102 128 170 205 256 341 512 47 208 260 346 416 520 693 1,040 188 831 1,039 1,386 1,663 2,079 2,772 4,158 Italiano 64 MB Español File type Units: minutes * The recording times listed above are approximate. The actual length of time you are able to record may be slightly different than shown here, so please allow some leeway in your recording plans. * Use the R-1 itself to format the CompactFlash card. * Use the included AC adaptor when recording continuously for an extended time. * If there are multiple files, the total time that can actually be recorded will be less than the time shown above. * The R-1 can handle up to 255 files. Once the number of files in the CompactFlash card reaches 255, you won’t be able to make any more recordings. 25 Getting ready to use the R-1 Inserting and removing a card fig.CFslot Inserting 1 Turn off the power of the R-1. 2 Open the memory card slot cover, and insert the CompactFlash card with its back side facing upward. Push the CompactFlash card all the way into the slot. 3 Close the memory card slot cover. * With a CompactFlash card, the reverse side is the side that has a raised lip when you’re looking at the edge not containing the terminals. To insert a CompactFlash card, position it so its reverse side faces upwards, and gently push the card into the slot. If you attempt to forcibly insert the card in the wrong direction, you may damage the R-1 or the CompactFlash card. Please use caution. With the back of the CompactFlash card facing upward, push it all the way into the slot Insert this way Removing fig.CFslot2 1 2 3 26 Turn off the power of the R-1. Open the memory card slot cover. Push the eject button and remove the CompactFlash card. Push the eject button Getting ready to use the R-1 Formatting a CompactFlash card 1 English You must format a CompactFlash card before you can use it with the R-1. You must use the R-1 itself to format the CompactFlash card. Follow the procedure explained on page 60 of “System settings (Setup mode).” CompactFlash cards formatted by a device other than the R-1 may not work correctly with the R-1. Turn off the power of the R-1. 2 Insert the CompactFlash card into the R-1’s memory card slot. fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps 3 4 Deutsch Turn on the power of the R-1. If the CompactFlash card contains no songs (files) that the R-1 is able to play, the display will indicate No Song. If the card contains songs (files), the play mode screen will appear. Français Press the MENU button. * If you decide to cancel the procedure, press the EXIT button. You will return to the previous screen. fig.format-disp.eps 5 Turn the VALUE dial to select 12 Format Card. 6 Italiano Press the ENTER button. fig.format.eps 7 When the display shown here appears, press the ENTER button. fig.sure.eps The screen will ask you to confirm that you really want to format the card. To format the card, press the ENTER button. Español 8 * If you decide not to format the card, press the EXIT button. You will return to step 5. Never remove the CompactFlash card while formatting is in progress. Doing so may damage the CompactFlash card. fig.complete.eps Formatting is completed when the display indicates Completed! 9 Press the MENU button. You will return to the main screen (play mode). 27 Getting ready to use the R-1 Types of files that the R-1 can handle The R-1 can handle the following types of files. Choose the type of file that is appropriate for your needs, depending on whether audio quality or recording time is more important for your situation. MP3 Playback Recording Sampling frequency (kHz) 8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 * All converted to 44.1 kHz for playback 44.1 Sampling frequency (kHz) WAV Playback Recording 8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 * All converted to 44.1 kHz for playback 44.1 Bit rate (kbps) 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, VBR 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 bit depth (bits) 8, 16, 24 16, 24 * Recording is always in stereo. WAV files are not compressed; they capture all of the information in the recorded sound. This means that they will have better audio quality than MP3 files. However, WAV files are also much larger than MP3 files. What is Bit Rate? Bit Rate indicates the speed at which data is transferred. This is given in units of “bps” (bits per second). Higher bit rates will deliver better audio quality. A higher bit rate conveys more information, meaning that the sound will be represented more accurately; but this also means that the file size will increase. With a lower bit rate, the audio quality will be lower but the file size will also be smaller. What is VBR? VBR stands for Variable Bit Rate. This means that the bit rate is varied according to the type of sound at each moment in the recording. A higher bit rate is used when there is a larger amount of sonic information to be captured, and a lower bit rate is used when there is a lesser amount. 28 Basic recording methods The following table shows the approximate lengths of time you can record using CompactFlash cards. Recordable times (approximate) English Recordable times on a CompactFlash card Units: minutes File type WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz 64 MB 3 5 MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps 26 32 MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps 43 MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps 256 MB 15 512 MB 31 2 GB 125 23 47 188 102 208 831 128 170 260 346 1,039 1,386 52 205 416 1,663 65 256 520 2,079 86 130 341 512 693 1,040 2,772 4,158 Deutsch CompactFlash size * The recording times listed above are approximate. The actual length of time you are able to record may be slightly different than shown here, so please allow some leeway in your recording plans. Français * Use the R-1 itself to format the CompactFlash card. * Use the included AC adaptor when recording continuously for an extended time. * If there are multiple files, the total time that can actually be recorded will be less than the time shown above. Recording with the internal microphone If you want to use the internal microphone, don’t connect anything to the mic input jack or line input jack. If a microphone or cable is connected to the mic input jack or line input jack, these inputs will take priority, and the internal microphone will not be used. 1 L R Español The R-1’s internal microphone is stereo. Audio entering the microphone at the right side of the R-1 is recorded on the right (R) channel, while the audio picked up by the left microphone is recorded on the left (L) channel. Italiano fig.mic-LR.eps Make sure that the R-1’s power is turned off. Also set the input volume to the minimum position. If you want to hear (monitor) the sound while recording from the internal microphone, connect a set of headphones to the phones jack and use them for monitoring. If you connect external speakers and attempt to use them for monitoring, acoustic feedback will occur, so don’t attempt to monitor through speakers. 29 Basic recording methods 2 3 4 5 Turn on the R-1’s power as described in “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (p. 19). If you're recording via the internal microphone, set the mic type select switch to DYN. Refer to “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28), and specify the type of file that you want to record. To make your selection or to check the current selection, use Setup mode 07 Record Mode (p. 54). Adjust the input level as follows. Adjusting the input level fig.rec-1.eps 1. Press the REC button. The R-1 enters recordingstandby mode. The display indicates the remaining amount of time that the R-1 can record for the type of file (recording quality) you’ve selected. Remaining recording time * The song name shown in Record Standby mode is the name of the file that will be newly created when recording is finished. fig.rec-2.eps 2. Press the DISPLAY button. 3. Play (or perform) the sounds that you actually intend to record, and position the R-1’s internal microphone where it can pick up the sound. * If you want to apply an effect to the sound while you record it, adjust the input level while the effect is turned on (i.e., applied). fig.rec-3.eps 4. While the sound plays, gradually increase the input volume. Adjust the level so that the ■ B input level indicators shown in the display do not reach the righmost ■. (Position A in the above illustration) If the recording level is too low, you won’t be able to record very soft sounds. If the recording level is too high, loud sounds will be distorted, causing crackles in the recorded sound. * If the material you are recording occasionally contains sudden loud sounds, such as the attack of a drum in a band performance or sudden laughter during a quiet conversation, we recommend that you use the Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 54). When doing so, adjust the input level appropriately for the principal type of sound you are recording—not for the sudden loud sounds that sometimes occur. When you use the Limiter, the input level is automatically adjusted so that the audio input level doesn’t get excessively high. When using the Limiter, you should adjust the input level so that the ■ symbol at the B position in the illustration appears only occasionally. 30 A Basic recording methods fig.rec-time.eps 6 Press the REC button. * You can also start recording by pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button. Elapsed time from start of recording If you move the input volume control in Record Standby mode or during recording, the input level will change. Be careful that you don’t operate the input volume control inadvertently. Even if the HOLD switch is ON, the input volume is not affected by the HOLD function. When you’re finished recording, press the STOP button. Deutsch 7 If you want to pause recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. To defeat pause and resume recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button again. The recorded data will be saved as a file on the CompactFlash card. The display will indicate the file name of the recorded data, and that file will be selected. Français * The file name is created automatically, using this format: R1_0001.MP3. The 0001 portion will be the number that follows the highest-numbered file existing on the CompactFlash card. * The file is created at the root level of the CompactFlash card. Folders (directories) are not created. * Since the R-1 does not contain an internal clock, all files will have a creation date of January 1, 2002. Italiano To listen to the data you just recorded, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. For other playback methods, refer to “Playback methods” (p. 38). How the input level meter indicates the signal level Number of ■’s None 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ∞ dB –– -50.0 -40.0 -36.0 -33.0 -30.0 -27.0 –– –– –– –– –– –– -24.0 –– -50.0 Number of ■’s 8 -40.0 -36.0 -33.0 -30.0 -27.0 -24.0 9 10 11 12 13 14 -21.0 15 -21.0 dB –– -18.0 -18.0 -15.0 -12.0 -9.0 -6.0 -3.0 –– –– –– –– –– –– -15.0 -12.0 -9.0 -6.0 -3.0 0.0 0.0 –– (Clip) Español 8 English Recording will begin. 31 Basic recording methods Recording with an external microphone The R-1 can use dynamic microphones and the miniature plug-in powered condenser microphones that are designed to be connected to the recording jack of an MD (Mini Disc) recorder or the microphone jack of a computer. If you use a condenser microphone, you must use one that is designed for plug-in power. If you connect the wrong type of microphone or a conventional stereo mini-plug microphone, your equipment may be damaged. fig.conmic-LR.eps L R MIC Stereo mic MIC TYPE INPUT LEVEL 1 Make sure that the R-1’s power is turned off. Set the input volume to the minimum position. If anything is connected to the line input jack, the input from the mic input jack will be ignored. If you want to record via the mic input jack, don’t connect anything to the line input jack. 2 3 4 32 Turn on the R-1’s power as described in “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (p. 19). Specify the type of file you want to record, as described in “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28). You can use Setup mode 07 Record Mode (p. 54) to specify the desired setting or to check the current setting. Set the mic type select switch appropriately for the type of microphone you’ve connected to the mic input jack. -> “Mic type select switch” (p. 15) Basic recording methods 5 Connect your external microphone to the mic input jack. 6 English If you want to hear (monitor) the sound while recording, connect a set of headphones to the phones jack and use them for monitoring. If you connect external speakers and attempt to use them for monitoring, acoustic feedback will occur, so don’t attempt to monitor through speakers. Adjust the input level as follows. Adjusting the input level fig.rec-1.eps The R-1 enters recordingstandby mode. The display indicates the remaining amount of time that the R-1 can record for the type of file (recording quality) you’ve selected. Deutsch 1. Press the REC button. Remaining recording time * The song name shown in Record Standby mode is the name of the file that will be newly created when recording is finished. Français fig.rec-2.eps 2. Press the DISPLAY button. 3. Play (or perform) the sounds that you actually intend to record, and position your external microphone where it can pick up the sound. * If you want to apply an effect to the sound while you record it, adjust the input level while the effect is turned on (i.e., applied). fig.rec-3.eps A Español volume. Adjust the level so that the ■ input level indicators shown in B the display do not reach the rightmost ■. (Position A in the above illustration) If the recording level is too low, you won’t be able to record very soft sounds. If the recording level is too high, loud sounds will be distorted, causing crackles in the recorded sound. Italiano 4. Gradually increase the input * If the material you are recording occasionally contains sudden loud sounds, such as the attack of a drum in a band performance or sudden laughter during a quiet conversation, we recommend that you use the Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 54).When doing so, adjust the input level appropriately for the principal type of sound you are recording—not for the sudden loud sounds that sometimes occur. When you use the Limiter, the input level is automatically adjusted so that the audio input level doesn’t get excessively high. When using the Limiter, you should adjust the input level so that the ■ symbol at the B position in the illustration appears only occasionally. 33 Basic recording methods fig.rec-time.eps 7 Press the REC button. Recording will begin. * You can also start recording by pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button. Elapsed time from start of recording If you move the input volume control in Record Standby mode or during recording, the input level will change. Be careful that you don’t operate the input volume control inadvertently. Even if the HOLD switch is ON, the input volume is not affected by the HOLD function. 8 When you’re finished recording, press the STOP button. If you want to pause recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. To defeat pause and resume recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button again. The recorded data will be saved as a file on the CompactFlash card. The display will indicate the file name of the recorded data, and that file will be selected. * The file name is created automatically, using this format: R1_0001.MP3. The 0001 portion will be the number that follows the highest-numbered file existing on the CompactFlash card. * The file is created at the root level of the CompactFlash card. Folders (directories) are not created. 9 To listen to the data you just recorded, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. For other playback methods, refer to “Playback methods” (p. 38). How the input level meter indicates the signal level 34 Number of ■’s None 1 2 -50.0 -40.0 -36.0 Number of ■’s 8 9 10 –– –– –– -33.0 -30.0 -27.0 –– –– -24.0 -21.0 ∞ -50.0 -40.0 dB –– –– –– 3 4 5 -36.0 -33.0 -30.0 6 7 -27.0 -24.0 -21.0 -18.0 -15.0 dB –– –– –– -18.0 -15.0 -12.0 11 12 13 -12.0 -9.0 -6.0 –– –– –– -9.0 -6.0 -3.0 14 15 -3.0 0.0 –– –– 0.0 (Clip) Basic recording methods Recording from a cassette tape or CD English This section explain how to record audio from an external device via the line input jack. * The R-1 does not have a digital input jack. As an example, here’s how to record from a CD player into the R-1. fig.cd Deutsch LINE IN LINE OUT Français CD/MD player, cassette deck, etc. The microphone input is disabled if you connect a device or cable to the line input jack. This means that you cannot record the microphone input and line input mixed together. If something is connected to both the line input jack and the mic input jack, only the sound entering the line input jack will be recorded. 3 4 5 Italiano 2 Make sure that the R-1’s power is turned off. Set the input volume to the minimum position. Turn on the R-1’s power as described in “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (p. 19). Specify the type of file you want to record, as described in “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28). You can use Setup mode 07 Record Mode (p. 54) to specify the desired setting or to check the current setting. Español 1 Use an audio cable to connect the output jacks of your CD player to the R-1’s line input jack. On your CD player, play back the song that you want to record and adjust the input level as described below. -> “Adjusting the input level” (p. 36) 35 Basic recording methods Adjusting the input level fig.rec-1.eps 1. Press the REC button. The R-1 enters recordingstandby mode. The display indicates the remaining amount of time that the R-1 can record for the type of file (recording quality) you’ve selected. Remaining recording time * The song name shown in Record Standby mode is the name of the file that will be newly created when recording is finished. fig.rec-2.eps 2. Press the DISPLAY button. 3. On the device that’s connected to the line input jack, play back the sounds that you want to record. In this example, play back a CD on your CD player. * If you want to apply an effect to the sound while you record it, adjust the input level while the effect is turned on (i.e., applied). fig.rec-3.eps 4. Gradually increase the input volume. Adjust the level so that the ■ input level indicators shown in B A the display do not reach the rightmost ■. (Position A in the above illustration) If the recording level is too low, you won’t be able to record very soft sounds. If the recording level is too high, loud sounds will be distorted, causing crackles in the recorded sound. If the sound still distorts or is too soft even after you’ve used the R-1’s input volume control to adjust the input level, try adjusting the volume of your CD player or other playback device. * If the material you are recording occasionally contains sudden loud sounds, we recommend that you use the Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 54). When doing so, adjust the input level appropriately for the principal type of sound you are recording—not for the sudden loud sounds that sometimes occur. When you use the Limiter, the input level is automatically adjusted so that the audio input level doesn’t get excessively high. When using the Limiter, you should adjust the input level so that the ■ symbol at the B position in the illustration appears only occasionally. 36 Basic recording methods fig.rec-time.eps 6 Press the REC button. * You can also start recording by pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button. Elapsed time from start of recording 7 Deutsch If you move the input volume control in Record Standby mode or during recording, the input level will change. Be careful that you don’t operate the input volume control inadvertently. Even if the HOLD switch is ON, the input volume is not affected by the HOLD function. Press the Play button of your CD player. 8 When you’re finished recording, press the R-1’s STOP button. Français If you want to pause recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. To defeat pause and resume recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button again. The recorded data will be saved as a file on the CompactFlash card. The display will indicate the file name of the recorded data, and that file will be selected. * The file name is created automatically, using this format: R1_0001.MP3. The 0001 portion will be the number that follows the highest-numbered file existing on the CompactFlash card. * The file is created at the root level of the CompactFlash card. Folders (directories) are not created. Italiano 10 Press the Stop button of your CD player. To listen to the data you just recorded, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. For other playback methods, refer to “Playback methods” (p. 38). How the input level meter indicates the signal level Number of ■’s None 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Number of ■’s dB ∞ -50.0 -40.0 -36.0 -33.0 -30.0 -27.0 -24.0 –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– -50.0 -40.0 -36.0 -33.0 -30.0 -27.0 -24.0 -21.0 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 dB -21.0 -18.0 -15.0 -12.0 -9.0 -6.0 -3.0 0.0 –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– -18.0 -15.0 -12.0 -9.0 -6.0 -3.0 0.0 (Clip) Español 9 English Recording will begin. 37 Playback methods Normal playback fig.play-1_50 File name 1 2 The R-1 does not have internal speakers. In order to hear the playback, you’ll need to provide a set of headphones or speakers. You can use the R-1’s phones jack as a digital output (optical out) for connection to your digital audio device, or as a line output for connection to your analog audio device. Before you continue, make connections using the type of cable appropriate for your device. Refer to “Connecting headphones” (p. 22), “Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)” (p. 23), or “Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)” (p. 24). 1 With the display showing an indication like the one in the illustration, turn the VALUE dial to select a song (file). Press the PREV button to move to the previous song (file), or the NEXT button to move to the next song (file). * If the display indicates No Song, the CompactFlash card contains no files that the R-1 is able to play. 2 3 38 Press the R-1’s PLAY button ( begin playing. ); the song (file) shown in the display will Gradually turn the output volume control toward the right to adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level. Playback methods 4 During playback, you can hold down the PREV button to rewind, or hold down the NEXT button to fast-forward. Playback will resume when you release the button. English * The song name shown in the display is the name of the file. It does not correspond to the ID3 tag within the MP3 file. * Song names are displayed in alphabetical order according to the following list of characters; they are not displayed in the order in which they were recorded. (space) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Deutsch * If the CompactFlash card contains sub-directories (folders), all files at the root level will be displayed first, followed by the files in the sub-directories (folders). * Filenames beginning with “.” are ignored and will not be displayed. * Files with extensions other than .mp3 and .wav are ignored and will not be displayed. Français For more about the files that the R-1 is able to record and play back, refer to “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28). Rewinding or fast-forwarding during playback This is a note of caution regarding operations while playing 16-bit/24-bit WAV files. Español Italiano With some types of CompactFlash cards, performing fast-forward or rewind operations while playing back these files will exceed the maximum speed at which data can be read, causing the fast-forward or rewind operation to halt. If this occurs, press the Stop button to stop playback. Then, start playback again. 39 Playback methods REPEAT A-B (Repeat playback) This function lets you specify a region of the song during playback, causing it to play repeatedly. fig.repeat-disp_50 Procedure 1 During playback, press the REPEAT button ( ) once. That location will be assigned as the beginning of the repetition (point A). 2 Song A Press the REPEAT button once again. That location will be assigned as the end of the repetition (point B). fig.repeat-a A B A B Song The region you specified in steps 1 and 2 (the region between points A and B) will play back repeatedly. To cancel repeat play, press the REPEAT button once again. 40 Song Playback methods Notes English * If after specifying point A, you press the STOP button before specifying point B, the point A setting will be cancelled. * If after specifying point A you allow playback to continue all the way to the end of the song, playback will repeat between point A and the end of the song. * If you press the STOP button during repeat play, playback will stop and the repeat region (A-B) settings will be cancelled. Français • Italiano • With points A and B specified, pressing the REPEAT button ( ) will cancel the settings for points A and B. If after specifying point A, you press the STOP button before specifying point B, the point A setting will be cancelled. If you want to stop playback as well as cancel the repeat settings, press the STOP button. Playback will stop, and the repeat playback settings (points A and B) will also be cancelled. Español • Deutsch To cancel this function 41 Playback methods 1/2 PLAY (Half-speed playback) Here’s how you can play back at half the normal speed. fig.half-disp_50 Procedure 1 While stopped or playing, press the SPEED button. The lower line of the display will indicate 1/2, and playback will occur at half-speed. If the R-1 is currently playing, the playback will slow down. If the R-1 is currently stopped, half-speed playback will begin when you press the PLAY button. * This function adjusts the pitch of the half-speed playback so that it remains the same as the normal pitch. This may produce a wavering effect in the playback; this is not a malfunction. To cancel this function If half-speed playback is active, press the SPEED button to cancel it. If you don’t cancel half-speed playback, the next song will also play back at half-speed. 42 Playback methods PLAY MODE (Playback mode) Here you can specify the order and method of playback. Deutsch English fig.disp-play_50 2, 4 1, 6 1 Français 3, 5 Press the MENU button. You can’t change the play mode while the R-1 is playing. You must first press the STOP button to stop playback. 4 Italiano 3 Use the VALUE dial to select 05 Play Mode. Press the ENTER button. Use the VALUE dial to select the play mode you want. Sequential Single Shuffle Songs will play back in the order of 001, 002, 003...009 * Use the PREV and NEXT buttons or the VALUE dial to select a file (song). Only the selected file (song) will be played repeatedly. Español 2 The song playback order will change automatically. * A previously played song will not be played. * If you use the PREV / NEXT buttons or the VALUE dial to select a file (song), the file (song) names will appear in the same order as when Sequential play mode is selected. fig.sequential.eps 5 6 After you’ve selected the play mode you want, press the ENTER button. Press the MENU button. You will return to play mode. 43 Using the R-1 with your computer The R-1 can handle the following types of files. 8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 * All converted to 44.1 kHz for playback 44.1 Bit rate (kbps) 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, VBR 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 Sampling frequency (kHz) bit depth (bits) 8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 * All converted to 44.1 kHz for playback 44.1 8, 16, 24 Sampling frequency (kHz) MP3 Playback Recording WAV Playback Recording 16, 24 Connecting the R-1 to your computer Use the AC adaptor when connecting the R-1 to your computer. * When connecting the R-1 to your computer via a USB cable, you must use the AC adaptor to prevent the batteries from running down while connected. 1 2 3 Insert a CompactFlash card into the R-1. If the R-1’s power switch is off, turn it on. Use a USB cable to connect the R-1 to your computer. The R-1 will be detected by your computer. If no CompactFlash card is inserted in the R-1 when you connect it to your computer, the R-1’s display will indicate No Card. In this case, the R-1 will not be detected by your computer. Your computer will also fail to detect the R-1 if the R-1 is in Setup mode. Unplug the USB cable that connects the R-1 to your computer, return to step 1 of this procedure, and insert the CompactFlash card. The R-1’s CompactFlash card will be recognized by your computer as follows. Windows Mac OS X Mac OS 9 When the card is recognized by My Computer or Explorer, it will appear with the name Removable Disk. The card will appear on the desktop with a name of NO NAME. The card will appear on the desktop with a name of Untitled. * If you change the above name after the card has been recognized by your computer, it will subsequently appear with the name you specified. * If you're using Mac OS 9, format the CompactFlash card on your Macintosh, and then reformat it on the R-1. 4 Now you can copy the desired files from the R-1’s CompactFlash card to your computer, or from your computer to the R-1’s CompactFlash card. You can copy files by dragging and dropping them. 44 Using the R-1 with your computer Disconnecting the R-1 from your computer English Here’s how to disconnect the R-1 from your computer. You must use the following procedure to cancel the connection, and then disconnect the USB cable. Do not switch off power to the R-1, disconnect the USB cable, or remove the CompactFlash card while the R-1 is still connected to your computer. Windows In the Windows task tray, double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon ( ). Deutsch 1 The Safely Remove Hardware dialog box will appear. 2 In the displayed list of hardware devices, select the item that indicates the R-1’s CompactFlash card. 4 5 USB Mass Storage Device Windows Me Removable Disk In the dialog box, click [Stop]. When the Stop Hardware Device dialog box appears, select the item that indicates the R-1’s CompactFlash card, and click [OK]. When your computer indicates “The USB Mass Storage Device can be removed safely,” you can disconnect the USB cable between the R-1 and your computer. Alternatively, you can switch off power to the R-1. Italiano 3 Windows XP, 2000 Français Item indicating the R-1’s CompactFlash card Macintosh Cancel the connection with the R-1 displayed on the desktop. Español 1 In Mac OS X, drag the R-1’s CompactFlash icon (NO NAME) to the of the dock. Normally, when you drag to the trash can located at the right edge of the dock, the indication will change from the trash can to , allowing you to cancel the connection. In Mac OS 9, drag the R-1’s CompactFlash icon (untitled) to the trash. 2 When the icon has disappeared from the desktop, you can disconnect the USB cable between the R-1 and your computer. Alternatively, you can switch off power to the R-1. 45 Using effects What are effects? In the context of a digital audio device such as the R-1, “effects” are digital processing techniques that can be applied to a sound to modify it; for example, by making it brighter or giving it more impact. You can also make speech more intelligible, or reduce unwanted noise. The R-1 provides various effects, which are listed on the pages that follow. You can apply an effect to the input sound and record the processed sound, or apply an effect to the sound that is being played back by the R-1. If you apply effects while recording, the volume and tonal character of the recorded sound will differ from the original sound. Particularly if you are applying an “aggressive” effect, you should use headphones to monitor the sound while still in the recording-standby mode to make sure that the sound is not clipping or distorting. We also recommend that you make a test recording beforehand. Clipping Clipping occurs when an effect or amplification causes the audio level (volume) to exceed the maximum level that a device can handle. This will cause distortion or a “buzzy” sound during loud passages. For details on how to make effect settings, refer to “Applying an effect” (p. 52). If you press the EFFECT button during recording or playback, the effect will be switched on or off. To prevent the effect from being switched on or off unintentionally, we recommend that you turn the HOLD switch on. 46 Using effects 03 Voice Perform 04 Editable EQ 05 Noise Reducer 06 Hum Noise Cut 07 Reverb 08 Int-Mic Rec. 09 Ext-Mic Rec. p. 49 Deutsch For Speech p. 49 p. 49 Français 02 p. 49 p. 49 p. 50 Italiano Easy EQ p. 50 p. 50 Español 01 Eleven settings are provided for use with styles such as rock, pop, or dance. Each setting modifies the tonal character (frequency response) appropriately for the selected style of music. For example, the Rock setting boosts the low and high frequency ranges to give the sound greater impact. The Pop setting makes it easier to hear the range in which the melody is usually played. The Vocal setting makes the lyrics more audible. The Flat setting simply outputs the sound without any change in tonal character. Internally, this effect uses a ten-band graphic equalizer. This effect is appropriate for material that is mainly a speaking voice, such as conversation or dialog. It clarifies the voice, and also reduces the sibilance (unpleasant exaggeration of sounds beginning with “s”) that can occur when recording with a microphone. Internally, this effect combines a de-esser and an enhancer. This effect can completely transform the character of a voice by modifying the pitch of the sound. You can use the provided settings to create comical voices, low monster-like voices, or voices that have a “springy” character. Internally, this combines a pitch shifter and a delay. This is a ten-band graphic equalizer with adjustable gain. For each band, you can adjust the gain in a range of -12 dB– +12 dB to modify the tonal character of the sound. This effect reduces the “hissing” or “rushing” background noise that may be heard during silent portions of a recording, or the hiss that is often heard on an analog record or cassette tape. Internally, this combines a noise gate and a notch filter. This effect reduces the low-pitched “hum” that can occur when recording from a microphone or when a motorized device is located nearby. Internally, this is a notch filter. When you listen to sound, you are hearing not only the sound that comes directly from the source to your ears, but also the sound that reflects off the floor and walls. These reflections are called “reverberation” (reverb), and their character will vary depending on the size of the room and the material of which the walls are constructed. This effect adds simulated reverberation to the original sound, producing a natural-sounding impression of spaciousness. This effect modifies the character of the sound recorded from the internal mic or a miniature condenser mic connected to the mic input jack, giving it the character of sound recorded from a larger mic. It can simulate the characteristics of famous mics used in recording studios, giving your sound a professional touch. This effect is particularly useful when applied during recording. This effect modifies the character of the sound recorded from a typical small dynamic mic connected to the mic input jack, giving it the character of sound recorded from a larger mic. It can simulate the characteristics of famous mics used in recording studios, giving your sound a professional touch. This effect is particularly useful when applied during recording. English Effect list p. 50 47 Using effects 48 10 Mastering 11 Center Cancel 12 Tuner 13 Metronome You may sometimes feel that the material you record is lacking in definition or clarity. Also in some cases, there may be excessive volume differences between loud and soft passages, or it may be difficult to hear soft sounds that occur simultaneously with loud sounds. For example when recording your band performance, there might be an excessive difference in volume between the intro and the break. Or when recording conversation, there will be a difference in volume between someone near the mic and someone farther from the mic. The Mastering effect processes such sounds to give them better definition and a more consistent volume. You can also use this to enhance the playback of material you’ve already recorded on the R-1, or to enhance material as you’re recording it into the R-1 from media such as cassette tape. Internally, this combines an enhancer and a two-band (low and high) compressor. This effect cancels the sounds that are located at the center of a stereorecorded song. You can use this to remove the vocal from a song, leaving only the accompaniment. However this will not be as effective if special effects have been used to create a broader stereo field or if the recording contains a large amount of reverberation. The tuner is a useful tool for use with a musical instrument; it is not an “effect” that modifies the original sound. This produces a sine wave of a fixed pitch at the notes C, D, E, ... relative to A=440 Hz. You can use this reference pitch when tuning your musical instrument. Internally, this is a fixed-pitch oscillator. Even if you record while the tuner is sounding, the sound of the tuner will not be recorded. The metronome is a useful tool for use with a musical instrument; it is not an “effect” that modifies the original sound. You can specify the time signature and the tempo of the metronome. Even if you record while the metronome is sounding, the sound of the metronome will not be recorded. p. 50 p. 51 p. 51 p. 51 Using effects 01: Easy EQ Range of values Flat, Rock, Pop, Dance, HipHop, Techno, Jazz, Blues, Classic, Speech, Vocal 0–80–100 Explanation Parameter name De-eser Sw. Range of values Explanation Switches the de-eser (sibilant reduction) on/off. Clarity 1–50–100 Low Gain High Gain -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB Adjusts the amount of clarification applied to the sound. Adjusts the low-range gain. Adjusts the high-range gain. Level 0–80–100 Adjusts the output volume. Parameter name Range of values Explanation Type High Tone, Low Tone, Spring, Spacy Selects the type of transformation applied to the sound. Low Gain -12dB–0dB–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain. High Gain -12dB–0dB–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain. Pan Level L50–CENTER–R50 0–80–100 Adjusts the panning of the output sound. Adjusts the output volume. Range of values Explanation 64Hz 125Hz -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 32 Hz. Adjusts the gain at 64 Hz. Adjusts the gain at 125 Hz. 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 250 Hz. Adjusts the gain at 500 Hz. Adjusts the gain at 1 kHz. Adjusts the gain at 2 kHz. Adjusts the gain at 4 kHz. Adjusts the gain at 8 kHz. 16kHz -12dB–0dB–+12dB Adjusts the gain at 16 kHz. Parameter name Range of values Noise Gate 0–20–100 Hiss Cut Low Gain High Gain Level 0–80–100 -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB 0–80–100 Explanation Specifies the threshold level; the sound will be cut when the volume falls below this level. Adjusts the amount by which hiss will be cut. Adjusts the low-range gain. Adjusts the high-range gain. Adjusts the output volume. Type Level Selects an EQ preset. English Parameter name Adjusts the output volume. OFF, ON Deutsch 02: For Speech Français 03: Voice Perform Español Parameter name 32Hz Italiano 04: Editable EQ 05: Noise Reducer 49 Using effects 06: Hum Noise Cut Parameter name Frequency Range of values 50Hz, 60Hz Explanation Specifies the frequency at which hum will be cut. Depth 0–80–100 Adjusts the amount by which hum will be cut. Low Gain -12dB–0dB–+12dB Adjusts the low-range gain. High Gain Level -12dB–0dB–+12dB 0–80–100 Adjusts the high-range gain. Adjusts the output volume. Range of values Hall, Room, Plate Explanation Low Gain 1–50–100 D100:0W–D50:50W– D0:100W -12dB–0dB–+12dB Adjusts the length of reverberation. Adjusts the proportion between the original sound and the reverberation. Adjusts the low-range gain. High Gain -12dB–0dB–+12dB Adjusts the high-range gain. Level 0–100 Adjusts the output volume. Parameter name Type Low Gain High Gain Range of values 1–5 -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB Explanation Selects the type of transformation. Level 0–80–100 Adjusts the output volume. 07: Reverb Parameter name Type Time Balance Selects the type of reverb. 08: Int-Mic Rec. Adjusts the low-range gain. Adjusts the high-range gain. 09: Ext-Mic Rec. Parameter name Type Range of values 1–5 Low Gain -12dB–0dB–+12dB Explanation Selects the type of transformation. Adjusts the low-range gain. High Gain Level -12dB–0dB–+12dB 0–80–100 Adjusts the high-range gain. Adjusts the output volume. Parameter name Range of values Clarity 1–50–100 Explanation Adjusts the amount of clarification applied to the sound. Crossover 200Hz, 250Hz, 315Hz, 400Hz, 500Hz, 630Hz, 800Hz, 1kHz, 1.25Hz, 1.6kHz, 2kHz Low Compress 0–50–100 High Compress 0–50–100 Low Gain High Gain Level -12dB–0dB–+12dB -12dB–0dB–+12dB 0–80–100 10: Mastering 50 Specifies the frequency at which the low- and highrange compressors are divided. Adjusts the amount of compression for frequencies below the Crossover point you specified. Adjusts the amount of compression for frequencies above the Crossover point you specified. Adjusts the low-range gain. Adjusts the high-range gain. Adjusts the output volume. Using effects Parameter name Range of values Depth 0–80–100 Point L50–CENTER–R50 Ambience 0–20–100 Low Gain -12dB–0dB–+12dB Explanation Adjusts the amount by which the center sound will be cut. Makes a fine adjustment to the stereo position at which the sound will be cut. Adjusts the amount of reverberation that will be added. Adjusts the low-range gain. High Gain Level -12dB–0dB–+12dB 0–80–100 Adjusts the high-range gain. Adjusts the output volume. Range of values Explanation English 11: Center Cancel Parameter name Tone (A=440) Level F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B, C, C#, D, D#, E 0–80–100 Deutsch 12: Tuner Specifies the pitch of the tuner. Adjusts the volume of the tuner. 13: Metronome 30–120–280 Level 0–80–100 Français Tempo Explanation Specifies the time signature of the metronome. Specifies the tempo of the metronome. * The value will change in steps of 2. Adjusts the volume of the metronome. Italiano Range of values 4/4, 6/8, 1/4, 2/4, 3/4 Español Parameter name Beat 51 Using effects Applying an effect This section explains how to apply an effect during playback or during recordingstandby mode. You can also make effect settings before you begin playback, or try out various effect settings while making a trial recording. fig.effect.eps While playing In recording-standby Effect mode ON 3 1 2 Edit mode Choose an effect 01:Eazy EQ -> 02:For Speech... EDIT EXIT ENTER EXIT ENTER Select a parameter Type -> Level1 EDIT EXIT ENTER Edit the parameter Pop -> Dance -> HipHop... EXIT Exit from effect edit mode Begin playback/recording 52 Using effects 1. While in playback or in recording-standby mode, press the R-1’s EFFECT button to turn it on (lit). 2. Press the EDIT button. You will enter Edit mode. English 3. Use the VALUE dial to select the desired type of effect, and then press the ENTER button. Each effect has various “parameters” (settings) that adjust the effect. When you select an effect type, its parameters will have the default settings. When you change the effect type, the currently set parameter values are cleared. * If you decide not to change the effect type, press the EXIT button or the EDIT button to leave Effect mode. Deutsch 4. Now you can select a parameter. Use the VALUE dial to select a parameter, and then press the ENTER button. * If you decide not to select a parameter, press the EDIT button to leave Effect mode. * If you want to return to the effect selection, press the EXIT button. 5. Now you can edit the parameter. Use the VALUE dial to specify the desired value for the parameter, and then press the EXIT button. Français 6. Press the EDIT button to leave Effect mode. If you want to return to the parameter selection, press the EXIT button. Español Italiano The effect parameter settings you make are remembered until you change them. 53 Various settings System settings (Setup mode) For details on how to make these settings, see“Procedures” (p. 56). * During playback, recording, or recording-standby, you can’t enter Setup mode by pressing the MENU button. 01 02 03 04 05 Menu/Effect Value (default value: boldface) Procedure LCD Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the display. 1–5–10 A (p. 56) OFF, ON, 5sec, 10sec, 20sec A (p. 56) –– B (p. 58) –– C (p. 60) Sequential, Single, Shuffle A (p. 56) OFF, ON A (p. 56) MP3 64kbps, MP3 96kbps, MP3 128kbps, MP3 160kbps, MP3 192kbps, MP3 256kbps, MP3 320kbps, WAV 16bit, WAV 24bit A (p. 56) OFF, ON A (p. 56) OFF, ON A (p. 56) LCD Backlight Specifies the time after which the display backlight will turn off when running on batteries. Delete File Deletes a file. Rename File Changes the name of a file. Play Mode Specifies the order in which songs will play. Limiter Turns the input level limiter on/off. * The limiter reduces the input level appropriately when the input level is excessive. 06 The threshold level is -9 dBFS. 07 08 09 54 Record Mode Specifies the type of file created when you record. This will determine the audio quality of the recorded file. Track Splitting Turns the track splitting function on/off. * When the signal level falls below -36 dBFS during recording, the file will automatically be split at that point. Recording will resume when the signal level increases again, and the recording time indication will be reset to “0:00:00.” Input Monitor Turn this on if you’re monitoring the input signal through headphones. Turn this off if you’re not monitoring the signal. * During recording, the sound will be heard regardless of whether this is on or off. A (p. 56) OFF, 1min, 2min, 3min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 45min, 60min A (p. 56) – D (p. 62) 13 Firmware Ver1.00 Lets you check the program version of the R-1. – E (p. 64) 14 About the R-1 Displays information about the R-1. – A (p. 56) Deutsch 12 STEREO, MONO Français 11 Procedure Italiano 10 Input Select Set this to STEREO if you’ve connected a stereo microphone. Set this to MONO if you’ve connected a monaural microphone. If you use the STEREO setting with a monaural signal, only the L (left) channel will be recorded. If this is set to MONO, sound will be recorded on both the L and R channels. * The recorded file will be stereo even if this is set to MONO. Sleep Timer Specifies the time after which the R-1 will enter Sleep mode when running on batteries. * This setting does nothing if you’re using the AC adaptor. Format Card Formats a CompactFlash card. Value (default value: boldface) Español Menu/Effect English Various settings 55 Various settings Procedures Procedure A 01 LCD Contrast 02 LCD Backlight 05 Play Mode 06 Limiter 07 Record Mode 08 Track Splitting 09 Input Monitor 10 Input Select 11 Sleep Timer 14 About the R-1 fig.system.eps Setup mode Select an item from the setup menu MENU EXIT ENTER 1 EXIT ENTER Specify the value 5 ->6 -> 7... 2 MENU ENTER MENU EXIT Exit setup mode 56 Various settings 1. While the R-1 is stopped, press the MENU button. You will enter Setup mode. 2. Turn the VALUE dial to select an item from the setup menu, and then press the ENTER button. English * If you decide not to continue, you can press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave Setup mode. 3. Now you can specify the value. Turn the VALUE dial to specify the desired value, and then press the ENTER button. * If you press the EXIT button, you will return to the setup item selection in step 2. If you press the MENU button, you will exit Setup mode. If you press either of these buttons, the value you specified in step 3 will be ignored. Deutsch 4. The opening screen of Setup mode is displayed. If you want to choose another setup menu item, use the VALUE dial to select an item from the menu (return to step 2). 5. If you’re finished with Setup mode, press the EXIT button or MENU button. Español Italiano Français If you want to continue making changes in Setup mode, press the ENTER button. You will return to step 3. If you want to choose another menu item, turn the VALUE dial to select it (instead of pressing the ENTER button). Make the desired settings for each menu item as described in “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54). 57 Various settings Procedure B 03 Delete File fig.system-b.eps Setup mode Select an item from the setup menu MENU ENTER EXIT 1 EXIT ENTER Select the file that you want to delete 2 001:R1_0001.MP3... MENU EXIT ENTER MENU ENTER Exit setup mode MENU EXIT Return to Play mode 58 Various settings 1. In play-standby mode, press the MENU button. You will enter Setup mode. 2. Turn the VALUE dial to select the desired item from the setup menu. Select 03: Delete File and then press the ENTER button. English * If you decide not to continue, you can press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave Setup mode. 3. Now you can choose the file that you want to delete. Turn the VALUE dial to select the file that you want to delete, and then press the ENTER button. * If you press the EXIT button or MENU button, you will exit Setup mode. * If there is no file to delete, the display will indicate No Song. 4. The display will ask “OK to delete? [ENTER]” Deutsch If you’re sure you want to delete the file you selected in step 3, press the ENTER button. The display will indicate “Now working...Do not remove card!” and then will indicate “Completed!” Français fig.working-complete Don’t remove the CompactFlash card while a file is being deleted. Then you will automatically return to the Setup mode screen. 5. If you’re finished, press the EXIT button or the MENU button. Español Italiano If you want to delete another file, press the ENTER button. You will return to step 3. If you want to choose another menu item, turn the VALUE dial to select it (instead of pressing the ENTER button). To make settings for the menu item you select, use the appropriate procedure as listed in “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54). 59 Various settings Procedure C 04 Rename File fig.system-c.eps Setup mode Select an item from the setup menu MENU ENTER EXIT 1 EXIT ENTER 3 2 Select the file that you want to rename 001:R1_0001.MP3... MENU EXIT ENTER The filename extension is not displayed MENU PREV NEXT MENU Move the cursor to the character you want to change PLAY (insert) VALUE STOP (delete) R1_0001.MP3 -> R5_0001.MP3 PREV NEXT Move the cursor to the character ENTER you want to change Exit setup mode MENU EXIT Return to Play mode 60 Various settings 1. With the R-1 stopped, press the MENU button. You will enter Setup mode. 2. Turn the VALUE dial to select the desired item from the setup menu. Select 04: Rename File and then press the ENTER button. English * If you decide not to continue, you can press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave Setup mode. 3. Now you can choose the file that you want to rename. Turn the VALUE dial to select the file that you want to rename, and then press the ENTER button. * You will exit Setup mode if you press the MENU button. 4. Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor to a character you want to change. PREV button NEXT button Result Moves the cursor left Moves the cursor right Button PLAY button STOP button Result Deutsch Button Inserts a character Deletes a character * If you press the MENU button, you will leave Setup mode. Français 5. When you’ve moved the cursor to the location of the character you want to change, use the VALUE dial to select the desired character for that location. ■ Characters that you can use in a file name (space) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Italiano File names beginning with “.” are ignored by the R-1. * You will exit Setup mode if you press the MENU button. 6. Move the cursor to the next location at which you want to change the character. 7. When you’ve finished making changes to the file name, press the ENTER button. The display will indicate Completed!, and then you will automatically return to the Setup mode screen. Español * When you change the name of a file, the playback order will also be affected. fig.exists.eps_50 If an identically named file already exists, the screen shown here will appear. You will need to specify a different name for the file. 8. If you’re finished, press the EXIT button or the MENU button. If you want to rename another file, press the ENTER button. You will return to step 3. If you want to choose another menu item, turn the VALUE dial to select it (instead of pressing the ENTER button). To make settings for the menu item you select, use the appropriate procedure as listed in“System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54). 61 Various settings Procedure D 12 Format Card fig.system-d.eps Setup mode MENU EXIT Select an item from the setup menu 1 EXIT ENTER MENU 2 ENTER MENU EXIT EXIT ENTER Exit setup mode MENU EXIT Return to Play mode 62 Various settings 1. With the R-1 stopped, press the MENU button. You will enter Setup mode. 2. Turn the VALUE dial to select the desired item from the setup menu. Select 12: Format Card and then press the ENTER button. English * If you decide not to continue, you can press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave Setup mode. 3. The display will ask “OK to format? [ENTER].” Press the ENTER button. * If you press the MENU button, you will exit Setup mode. 4. Then the display will ask “Are You Sure? [ENTER]” Deutsch If you’re sure you want to format the card, press the ENTER button. The display will indicate “Now working...Do not remove card!” and then will indicate “Completed!” fig.working-complete Then you will automatically return to the Setup mode screen. 5. If you’re finished, press the EXIT button or the MENU button. Español Italiano Français Since formatting the card will delete all of the files, the display will indicate No Song. If you want to choose another menu item, turn the VALUE dial to select it (instead of pressing the ENTER button). To make settings for the menu item you select, use the appropriate procedure as listed in “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54). 63 Various settings Procedure E 13 Firmware Ver1.00 fig.system-e.eps Setup mode Select an item from the setup menu MENU EXIT ENTER 1 Exit setup mode 2 1. With the R-1 stopped, press the MENU button. You will enter Setup mode. 2. Turn the VALUE dial to select the desired item from the setup menu. Select 13: Firmware Ver1.00. * The program version of your R-1 will appear in the “1.00” area. 3. Press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave Setup mode. If you want to choose another menu item, turn the VALUE dial to select it instead of pressing the EXIT button or MENU button. To make settings for the menu item you select, use the appropriate procedure as listed in “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54). 64 Various settings Restoring the factory settings While holding down the ENTER button, switch on the R-1’s power. Français Deutsch The display will show the same content as when starting up normally, but the settings will have been reset to their factory-set condition. Italiano 2 Turn off the power of the R-1. Español 1 English Here’s how you can restore all effect values and setup mode items of the R-1 to their factory-set state. 65 List of messages This section lists the most important messages that appear in the display. Display Explanation The batteries have run low. Please replace them with fresh batteries. The HOLD switch is turned on. The R-1 is connected via USB to your computer. No memory card (CompactFlash) is inserted. There are no MP3 or WAV files on the memory card. The time shown is the elapsed time. STOP: stopped PLAY: playing Recording-standby mode The screen shows the name of the file created by this recording. Press the REC button or PLAY button to start recording. Status while recording The screen shows the name of the file created by this recording, and the remaining time that can be recorded. The recordable time will depend on the capacity of the memory card. * remain: remaining time for recording Name and type of file being recorded This screen will appear if you press the DISPLAY button during recording. Name and type of file that has been recorded This screen will appear if you press the DISPLAY button while playing or stopped. Playback status The time shown is the remaining playback time for this song. * remain: remaining playback time Playing repeatedly between points A-B The screen shows the name of the currently playing file and the elapsed time. Playing at half-speed The screen shows the name of the currently playing file and the elapsed time. The R-1 is executing a command. Do not remove the card. 66 Troubleshooting English If you experience difficulties, read this section first. It contains tips on how to resolve various problems. Problems with recording Sound recorded from the mic is heard only from the L (left) channel Deutsch Some mics are stereo, while others are monaural. If you are using a monaural mic, the sound will be recorded on the L (left) channel. In this case, you can use “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54) 10 Input Select to select MONO as the mic type. This setting is remembered even when the power is turned off. Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54) Can’t start recording from recording-standby mode Français Check the remaining space on your CompactFlash memory card. Recording is not possible if there is little time remaining on the card. In this case, the R-1 will enter recording-standby mode, but you will return to the play mode screen if you attempt to start recording by pressing the record button or play button. In recording-standby mode, the screen shows the amount of remaining recordable time. An indication of 0:00:00 means that there is no time left. Please check the display. Refer to: “Recordable times on a CompactFlash card” (p. 29) Can’t use the internal mic (Can’t use an external mic) Italiano The internal mic cannot be used if a mic, cable, or device is connected to the mic input jack or line input jack. If you want to use the internal mic, don’t connect anything to the other input jacks. Refer to: “Mic input jack” (p. 15), “Line input jack” (p. 15), “Recording with the internal microphone” (p. 29) Recorded sound is distorted Español The sound will distort if the input volume is too high. Adjust the input level appropriately as described in “Adjusting the input level” (p. 30), (p. 33), (p. 36). In some cases, the sound will distort if you apply an effect while recording. Adjust the input level while the effect is applied. You can also try adjusting the effect parameters so that distortion does not occur. Refer to: “Adjusting the input level” (p. 30), (p. 33), (p. 36) “Applying an effect” (p. 52) 67 Troubleshooting Can’t record Check the remaining space on your CompactFlash memory card. Recording is not possible if there is little time remaining on the card. In recording-standby mode, the screen shows the amount of remaining recordable time. An indication of 0:00:00 means that there is no time left. Please check the display. The R-1 can handle up to 255 files. Once the number of files in the CompactFlash card reaches 255, you won’t be able to make any more recordings. In this case, the R-1 will enter recording-standby mode, but you will return to the play mode screen if you attempt to start recording by pressing the record button or play button. Refer to: “Recordable times on a CompactFlash card” (p. 29) Recording is not possible if the CompactFlash memory card is not inserted correctly. If the display indicates No Card, the R-1 has not detected a CompactFlash memory card. Turn off the power, and re-insert the CompactFlash memory card. Refer to: “Memory card handling” (p. 25) Recording will not occur correctly if the input level specified by the input volume control is too low. Please set the input level correctly. Refer to: “Adjusting the input level” (p. 30), (p. 33), (p. 36) If you want to record via a connected mic, connect it correctly to the mic input jack. You should also check the setting of the mic type select switch. Refer to: “Mic input jack” (p. 15), “Line input jack” (p. 15), “Recording with the internal microphone” (p. 29) A CompactFlash memory card will not work correctly unless it has been formatted on the R-1. If you used your computer to format the CompactFlash card, it may not be formatted correctly for the R-1. In this case, recording will stop immediately after you begin recording, an indication of No Song will appear, and recording will not be possible. Refer to: “Formatting a CompactFlash card” (p. 27) I used a monaural mic to record, but a stereo file was created The R-1 normally records in stereo. Even if you connect a monaural mic and set the Setup mode item Input Select to MONO, a stereo file will be created with the same sound recorded on the left and right (L, R) tracks. Even if I adjust the recording level, the sound is distorted if I turn on the effect Since some effects work by boosting a portion of the sound, they may cause the overall volume of the song to increase. This may cause the sound to clip, producing distortion. If this occurs, take either of the following actions. • Lower the LEVEL value in the parameters of the effect This will lower the overall volume, but the character of the effect will be preserved. • 68 Lower the input volume to decrease the volume before the effect is applied This is an easy adjustment to make, but may affect the character of the effect. Troubleshooting Problems with playback No sound English The output volume may be too low. Try gradually increasing the output volume. Refer to: “Output volume” (p. 16) Make sure that your headphones or speakers are connected correctly. Refer to: “Headphone/line output/digital output jack” (p. 16) “Getting ready to use the R-1” (p. 18) Deutsch The CompactFlash memory card contains a song, but the R-1 won’t play it Make sure that the file name is appropriate. The R-1 can’t use files with a name beginning with “.” (period). The R-1 can only play back files with a filename extension of .mp3 (MP3) or .wav (WAV). Refer to: “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28) Can’t play back Français Make sure that the file name is appropriate. The R-1 can’t use files with a name beginning with “.” (period). The R-1 can only play back files with a filename extension of .mp3 (MP3) or .wav (WAV). Also, playback is not possible if the file has been corrupted. Refer to: “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28) A song I didn’t want is played back Español Italiano Could the PLAY MODE be set to Shuffle? If so, the R-1 will randomly select the song to be played next. This will cause unexpected songs to be played. Refer to: “PLAY MODE (Playback mode)” (p. 43) 69 Troubleshooting Other problems Power won’t turn on Make sure that the AC adaptor is connected correctly. If you’re using batteries, check the polarity of the batteries, and make sure that each battery is firmly seated in the holder. It is also possible that the batteries have run down; try a fresh set of batteries. Refer to: “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (p. 19) “Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (p. 20) If the R-1 will not turn on even though there is no problem with the AC adaptor or batteries, it is possible that the R-1 has malfunctioned. Please contact “Service Information” listed at the end of this manual. My computer doesn’t detect the R-1 when I connect it Your computer will not correctly detect the R-1 if no CompactFlash memory card is inserted. If the R-1 does not appear on your computer desktop, check that a CompactFlash memory card is correctly inserted. Refer to: “Memory card handling” (p. 25) Pressing the MENU button doesn’t take me to Setup mode You can’t enter Setup mode during playback or recording. Stop playback or recording, and then press the MENU button to enter Setup mode. If the R-1 is playing, recording, or in recording-standby mode, pressing the MENU button won’t put you in Setup mode. Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54) Backlight turns off If you’re using the R-1 on batteries, the backlight may turn off when the R-1 has not been operated for a certain length of time, depending on the LCD Backlight setting. Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54) The R-1 goes to sleep If you’re using the R-1 on batteries, it may go to sleep if no operation has been performed for a certain length of time, depending on the Sleep Timer setting. You can use Setup mode 11 Sleep Timer to change this setting. Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54) The settings I made have disappeared If all of the effects and Setup mode settings you made have returned to their original state, it is possible that you inadvertently restored the R-1 to its factory-set state. Refer to: “Restoring the factory settings” (p. 65) 70 Troubleshooting I used a USB cable to connect the R-1 to my computer, but it was not detected English If the R-1 is in Setup mode, it will not be detected by your computer. Unplug the USB cable that connects the R-1 to your computer, exit Setup mode, and make the connection again. Refer to: “Connecting the R-1 to your computer” (p. 44) The effect parameters I edited have been initialized Deutsch The effect parameter settings you edit are preserved as long as you don’t change the effect type; if you change the effect type, the settings will revert to the initial values. If you make detailed changes to an effect such as “Editable EQ,” we suggest that you write down the settings on paper. Refer to: “Applying an effect” (p. 52) When selecting a song, the song names are slow to appear Français If a file is damaged or invalid, if an MP3 file is in a format that the R-1 does not support, or if the file is very large, the R-1 may take some time to determine whether it is able to play the file even if the file has an extension of .MP3 or .WAV. This may cause the display to be slow when selecting files. Refer to: “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28) “Normal playback” (p. 38) Acoustic feedback occurs when monitoring through headphones Español Italiano If you’re using open-air type headphones to monitor the sound while recording, moving close to the R-1 may allow sound from the headphones to be picked up by the microphones, causing acoustic feedback. The R-1’s built-in microphones will pick up even faint sounds, so be careful not to get too close. Refer to: “Basic connections” (p. 18) 71 Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1 fig.panel-1 1 2 14 3 4 5 15 6 7 8 16 9 10 11 12 1 13 Internes Mikrofon Dies ist ein ins R-1 eingebautes Stereomikrofon. Sie können das interne Mikrofon nicht benutzen, wenn ein Mikrofon oder ein anderes Gerät mit einer der Buchsen für den Mikrofoneingang 18 oder den Standardeingang 19 verbunden ist. Schließen Sie nichts an die anderen Eingangsbuchsen an, wenn Sie das interne Mikrofon einsetzen wollen. Bei Aufnahme mit dem eingebauten Mikrofon stellen Sie den MikrofontypWahlschalter auf DYN. 2 Anzeige Hier werden verschiedene Informationen über den Betriebszustand des R-1 angezeigt. 3 EFFECT-Taste Drücken Sie die EFFECT-Taste zum Ein- und Ausschalten eines Effekts. Bei eingeschaltetem Effekt leuchtet die Taste rot. Wenn Sie diese Taste vor oder während des Abspielens drücken, wird der Effekt auf den wiedergegebenen Sound angewandt. Wenn Sie diese Taste vor oder während einer Aufnahme drücken, wird der Effekt auf den eingespielten Sound angewandt, der mit dem Effekt bearbeitete Sound wird also aufgenommen. Das R-1 bietet verschiedene Effekte zur Veränderung des ausgegebenen oder aufgenommenen Sounds an und gibt ihm so eine bessere Wirkung oder erlaubt komfortableres Hören. Sie können den Sound auch zu einem völlig anderem Charakter transformieren. 4 EDIT-Taste Benutzen Sie diese Taste für die Effekteinstellungen. Detaillierte Hinweise zu Effekten finden Sie unter “Using effects” (S. 46). Effekteinstellungen können Sie unabhängig von der Stellung der Taste EFFECT vornehmen. 5 MENU-Taste Diese Taste wechselt in den Konfigurationsmodus, in dem Sie verschiedene Einstellungen des R-1 vornehmen können. Hier können Sie den Kontrast der LCD-Anzeige einstellen, die Aufnahmequalität bestimmen und verschiedene andere Grundeinstellungen des R-1 vornehmen. Details finden Sie unter “Verschiedene Einstellungen” (S. 90). 72 Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1 6 DISPLAY-Taste 7 English Mit dieser Taste wird der Anzeigeinhalt des R-1 gewechselt. Im PLAY-Modus wechselt die Taste nacheinander zur Anzeige der erfolgten Abspielzeit, der verbleibenden Abspielzeit der aktuellen Songdatei, deren Dateityp und der Bitrate. Drücken Sie die DISPLAY-Taste zum Wechseln des Anzeigeinhalts. PREV-Taste 8 Deutsch Mit dieser Taste gehen Sie zum Anfang des Songs oder Sie wählen den vorhergehenden Song aus. Ein Druck auf diese Taste während eines Songs geht zum Anfang dieses Songs. Wenn Sie bereits am Anfang (00:00) des Songs sind, führt Sie diese Taste zum vorhergehenden Song. Mit kontinuierlichem Druck auf diese Taste können Sie zurückspulen. Diese Operationen funktionieren während des Abspielens oder bei STOP. NEXT-Taste Mit dieser Taste wählen Sie den nächsten Song aus. Mit kontinuierlichem Druck auf diese Taste können Sie vorspulen. Diese Operationen funktionieren während der Wiedergabe oder bei STOP. 9 REPEAT-Taste Français Mit dieser Taste können Sie den Bereich zwischen zwei im Song angegebenen Punkten A und B wiederholt abspielen. Drücken Sie die Taste einmal zur Markierung des Punktes „A“ und ein zweites Mal für Punkt „B“. Zum Stornieren der Abspielwiederholung drücken Sie nochmals die REPEAT-Taste. Mit der Stornierung der Abspielwiederholung löschen Sie beide Punkte A und B. fig.repeat-a 1. Drücken Sie während des Abspielens einmal auf Song A Italiano die REPEAT-Taste. Dieser Punkt wird der Startpunkt A der Abspielwiederholung. fig.repeat-b 2. Drücken Sie nochmals auf die REPEAT-Taste. B A B Español Dieser Punkt wird der Endpunkt B der Abspielwiederholung. A Song fig.repeat-ab Der Bereich zwischen den in Schritt 1 und 2 von Ihnen angegebenen Punkten wird wiederholt abgespielt. Zum Abbruch der Abspielwiederholung drücken Sie erneut auf die REPEAT-Taste. 10 Song SPEED-Taste Diese Taste halbiert die Abspielgeschwindigkeit. Drücken Sie die Taste nochmals zur Rückkehr zur normalen Abspielgeschwindigkeit. Dies ist hilfreich, wenn Sie mit Musik in ungewöhnlich schnellem Tempo arbeiten oder sehr schnelle Sprache abhören. 73 Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1 fig.panel-2 1 17 2 18 19 14 3 20 4 5 15 6 7 8 21 9 10 11 12 11 16 13 STOP-Taste Diese Taste stoppt Wiedergabe oder Aufnahme. 12 PLAY/PAUSE-Taste Die Taste startet die Wiedergabe. Zusätzlich unterbricht sie Aufnahme und Wiedergabe. Wenn Sie diese Taste während des Abspielens drücken, wird die Wiedergabe des R-1 unterbrochen und in der Anzeige PLAY-PAUSE angezeigt. Drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSETaste nochmals, um die Wiedergabe fortzusetzen. Genauso können Sie mit dieser Taste Aufnahmen unterbrechen. In der Anzeige des R-1wird dann REC-PAUSE stehen, gleichzeitig wird die REC-Taste rot blinken. Zur Fortsetzung der Aufnahme aus der Aufnahmebereitschaft drücken Sie nochmals die RECTaste oder alternativ die PLAY/PAUSE-Taste. Die REC-Taste leuchtet bei der Aufnahme rot. 13 REC-Taste Bei gestopptem Gerät bringt die REC-Taste das R-1 in Aufnahmebereitschaft. In der Anzeige des R-1wird dann REC STANDBY stehen, gleichzeitig wird die REC-Taste rot blinken. Zum Beginn der Aufnahme aus der Aufnahmebereitschaft drücken Sie nochmals die RECTaste oder alternativ die PLAY/PAUSE-Taste. Die REC-Taste leuchtet bei der Aufnahme rot. 14 VALUE-Regler Benutzen Sie diesen Regler zur Auswahl der Songs, zur Bestimmung von Typen und Werten von Effekten und zur Bedienung im Konfigurationsmodus. 15 EXIT-Taste Mit dieser Taste kehren Sie im Konfigurationsmodus und im Effekteinstellungsmodus zum vorherigen Punkt zurück. Im Konfigurationsmodus werden Ihre Eingaben gelöscht, wenn Sie die EXIT-Taste vor der ENTER-Taste drücken. 16 ENTER-Taste Mit dieser Taste wählen Sie im Effekteinstellungs- oder im Konfigurationsmodus Eingaben aus oder schließen Änderungen ab. 74 Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1 17 Mikrofoneingang Anschlussbuchse für ein Mikrofon. Falls ein Kabel mit dem Standardeingang verbunden ist, wird kein Audiosignal durch den Mikrofoneingang entgegengenommen. Deutsch 18 English Schalten Sie den Mikrofonauswahlschalter 19 auf die passende Stellung, je nachdem ob ein dynamisches Mikrofon oder ein über den Anschluss versorgtes Kondensatormikrofon mit Ministecker angeschlossen ist. Stereomikrofone werden unterstützt, nutzen Sie für die Verbindung ein Kabel mit Stereo-Ministecker. Falls Sie ein Mono-Mikrofon einsetzen, setzen Sie im Konfigurationsmodus die Einstellung “10 Input Select” auf MONO. Detaillierte Hinweise zu dieser Einstellung finden Sie unter “Systemeinstellungen (Konfigurationsmodus)” (S. 90). Standardeingang Wenn Sie Audiosignale von Audiogeräten oder Musikinstrumenten ins R-1 eingeben wollen, benutzen Sie Stereo-Ministecker zu deren Anschluss an diese Buchse. 19 Mikrofonauswahlschalter Schalten Sie diesen Schalter in die passende Stellung, je nach dem Typ des am Mikrofoneingang 17 angeschlossenen Mikrofons. CND Eingangsregler Italiano 20 Wählen Sie beim Anschluss eines dynamischen Mikrofons diese Einstellung. Wenn Sie das eingebaute Mikrofon verwenden, stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf DYN. Diese Einstellung ist für den Anschluss eines kleinen Kondensatormikrofons, das eine Stromversorgung benötigt. Sie müssen ein „steckerbetriebenes“ Mikrofon benutzen. Diese Buchse liefert eine Versorgungsspannung von 2 V. * Schließen Sie keine anderen Mikrofone oder Geräte außer „steckerbetriebenen“ Mikrofonen an, wenn dieser Schalter auf „CND“ steht. Andere Mikrofontypen oder Geräte könnten beschädigt werden. Français DYN Hier wird die Eingangslautstärke des Sounds der eingebauten Mikrofone 1 , des Mikrofoneingangs 17 oder der Standardeingänge 18 geregelt. Nehmen Sie die Einstellung mit dem in “Einstellung des Eingangsreglers” (S. 80) beschriebenen Verfahren unter Beobachtung der Eingangsempfindlichkeit vor. USB-Anschluss Sie können das im Lieferumfang enthaltene USB-Kabel an Ihren Computer anschließen. Wenn das R-1 an Ihren Computer angeschlossen ist, können Songdateien übertragen oder auf ihren Computer kopiert werden. Sie können auch MP3- oder WAV-Dateien vom Rechner zum R-1 transferieren oder kopieren, so dass sie dort abgespielt werden können. Der Anschluss unterstützt „Hi-Speed“-USB 2.0 und erlaubt so einen schnellen Dateitransfer. Wenn Sie das R-1 mit Ihrem Computer verbinden wollen, berücksichtigen Sie bitte auch “Connecting the R-1 to your computer” (S. 44). Wenn Ihr Rechner das R-1 korrekt erkannt hat, steht in der Anzeige des R-1 Connected via USB . Español 21 75 Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1 Bei bestehender Verbindung zwischen einem Computer und dem R-1 sind alle Funktionalitäten des R-1 außer dem Netzschalter unwirksam; die Bedienung von Tasten und Reglern bleibt wirkungslos. fig.panel-3 1 22 23 22 24 25 26 27 28 Netzschalter Schaltet das Gerät an und aus. Schalten Sie das Gerät bei laufender Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe nicht aus. Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem Ausschalten, dass Wiedergabe oder Aufnahme gestoppt sind. • Falls Sie das Gerät während einer Aufnahme versehentlich ausschalten, werden die aufgenommenen Daten nicht in der CompactFlash-Karte gespeichert. • Die CompactFlash-Karte kann beschädigt werden, wenn das R-1 bei Lese- oder Schreiboperationen wie Wiedergabe oder Aufnahme ausgeschaltet wird. • Wird das R-1 während einer Anzeige „Now working...“ (In Arbeit...) im Effekteinstellungsmodus oder beim Speichern einer Einstellung im Konfigurationsmodus ausgeschaltet, wird das Gerät unstabil und kann womöglich nicht mehr starten. Achten Sie daher genau darauf, das Gerät in diesen Zuständen nicht abzuschalten. 23 Netzanschluss Schließen Sie hier das Netzteil an. 24 HOLD-Schalter Wenn Sie den HOLD-Schalter auf ON stellen, werden Tastenbetätigungen auf dem R1 wirkungslos; damit kann das Gerät bequem vor versehentlicher Bedienung geschützt werden. Allerdings sind mit der Stellung des HOLD-Schalters auf ON Mikrofonauswahlschalter 19 , Eingangsregler 20 , Netzschalter 22 und Lautstärkeregler 25 weiter bedienbar. 25 Lautstärkeregler Hier wird die Lautstärke der Buchse für Kopfhörer, Standardausgang und Digitalausgang 26 eingestellt. Allerdings ist die digital ausgegebene Lautstärke damit nicht regelbar. 26 Buchse für Kopfhörer, Standardausgang und Digitalausgang Dieser Ausgang gibt Audiosignale vom R-1 zu Kopfhörer oder externen Lautsprechern. Wenn Sie ein Digitalsignal ausgeben wollen, müssen Sie ein rundes Digitalkabel mit Ministecker benutzen. 27 Auswurftaste Drücken Sie hier, um die CompactFlash-Karte aus der Speicherkartenaufnahme 28 zu entfernen. 76 Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1 28 Speicherkartenaufnahme Setzen Sie hier eine CompactFlash-Karte ein. Das R-1 kann als Speicherkarten ausschließlich den Typ CompactFlash verwenden. Deutsch English fig.panel-4 29 29 Français 30 Batteriefach Speicherkartenabdeckung Diese Abdeckung bietet einen Schutz vor versehentlichem Entfernen der CompactFlash-Karte. Wenn Sie die Klappe öffnen, sehen Sie die Speicherkartenaufnahme 28 und die Auswurftaste 27 . Español 30 Italiano Wenn Sie das R-1 netzunabhängig betreiben wollen, können Sie hier Batterien einlegen. Beim Betrieb des R-1mit Netzteil brauchen Sie keine Batterien. Vor einem Wechsel der Stromversorgung vom Netzteil zur Batterieversorgung und umgekehrt müssen Sie das R-1 ausschalten. Bitte lesen Sie vor der Benutzung des R-1 “Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (S. 20). 77 Vorbereitungen zum Einsatz des R-1 Formatieren einer CompactFlash-Karte Sie müssen eine CompactFlash-Karte vor ihrem Einsatz im R-1formatieren. Sie müssen die CompactFlash-Karte mit dem R-1 selbst formatieren. Wenden Sie dazu das auf S. 90 bei “Systemeinstellungen (Konfigurationsmodus)“ beschriebene Verfahren an. Mit anderen Geräten als dem R-1 formatierte CompactFlash-Karten funktionieren im R-1 möglicherweise nicht richtig. 1 Schalten Sie das R-1 aus. 2 Setzen Sie die CompactFlash-Karte in die Kartenaufnahme des R-1 ein. fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps 3 Schalten Sie das R-1 ein. Falls die CompactFlash-Karte keine auf dem R-1 abspielbaren Songdateien enthält, wird in der Anzeige „NoSong“ angezeigt. Wenn die Karte Songdateien enthält, erscheint die Anzeige für den PLAY-Modus. 4 Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. * Zum Abbruch des Vorgangs drücken Sie die EXIT-Taste. Sie werden zur vorherigen Anzeige zurückkehren. fig.format-disp.eps 5 Stellen Sie den VALUE-Regler auf die Auswahl 12 Format Card. 6 Drücken Sie die ENTER-Taste. fig.format.eps 7 Wenn die hier gezeigte Anzeige erscheint, drücken Sie die ENTERTaste. fig.sure.eps 8 Die Anzeige fragt nach einer Bestätigung, ob Sie die Karte wirklich formatieren wollen. Drücken Sie die ENTER –Taste, um die Karte zu formatieren. * Zum Abbruch der Kartenformatierung drücken Sie die EXIT-Taste. Sie werden zu Schritt 5 zurückkehren. Entfernen Sie niemals die CompactFlash-Karte während der Formatierung. Das kann eine Beschädigung der Karte verursachen. fig.complete.eps Die Formatierung ist abgeschlossen, wenn in der Anzeige Completed! erscheint. 9 78 Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. Sie werden zum Hauptanzeige des PLAY-Modus zurückkehren. Einfache Aufnahmemethoden Die folgende Tabelle zeigt die ungefähren Aufnahmezeiten, die Sie mit CompactFlashKarten aufnehmen können. ungefähre Aufnahmezeit English Aufnahmezeiten auf CompactFlash-Karten Einheit: Minuten CompactFlash Größe WAV, 24 bit/44,1 kHz WAV, 16 bit/44,1 kHz MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps 64 MB 3 5 26 256 MB 512 MB 15 31 2 GB 125 23 47 188 102 128 208 260 831 1.039 MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps 32 MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps 43 52 170 346 1.386 205 416 1.663 MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps 65 MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps 86 130 256 341 520 693 2.079 2.772 512 1.040 4.158 Deutsch Dateityp Français * Die oben angegebenen Zeiten sind Näherungswerte. Die tatsächlich möglichen Aufnahmezeiten können von diesen Angaben geringfügig abweichen. Lassen Sie bitte bei Ihren Aufnahmevorhaben eine Reserve zu. * Formatieren Sie die CompactFlash-Karte mit dem R-1 selber. * Benutzen Sie bei langen zusammenhängenden Aufnahmen das mitgelieferte Netzteil. * Falls es sich um mehrere Dateien handelt, wird die tatsächliche Gesamtaufnahmezeit geringer als die hier angezeigten Werte sein. Aufnahmen mit dem Einbaumikrofon Das interne Mikrofon des R-1 arbeitet stereophon. Die von der rechten Seite des R-1 empfangenen Audiosignale werden auf dem rechten Kanal (R) aufgenommen, die von der linken Seite auf dem linken Kanal (L). L Italiano fig.mic-LR.eps R 1 Español Schließen Sie keine Kabel an die anderen Eingangsbuchsen an, wenn Sie das interne Mikrofon einsetzen wollen. Wenn ein Mikrofon oder Mikrofonkabel am Mikrofoneingang oder am Standardeingang angeschlossen ist, werden diesen Eingängen Priorität eingeräumt, so dass das interne Mikrofon nicht benutzt wird. Das Gerät muss ausgeschaltet sein. Stellen Sie auch den Eingangsregler auf die Minimumposition. Wenn Sie den Sound während der Aufnahme mit dem Einbaumikrofon hören wollen, schließen Sie dazu einen Kopfhörer als Monitor an den entsprechenden Anschluss an. Falls Sie externe Lautsprecher anschließen und als Monitor zu nutzen versuchen, kommt es zu akustischen Rückkopplungen. Versuchen Sie nicht, Lautsprecher als Monitor einzusetzen. 79 Einfache Aufnahmemethoden 2 3 4 5 Schalten Sie das R-1 ein, so wie in “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (S. 19) beschrieben. Bei Aufnahme mit dem eingebauten Mikrofon stellen Sie den MikrofontypWahlschalter auf DYN. Berücksichtigen Sie “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (S. 28) und geben Sie den Dateityp der gewünschten Aufnahme an. Nutzen Sie für die Änderung oder Überprüfung der gegenwärtigen Einstellung im Konfigurationsmodus 07 Record Mode (S. 90). Stellen Sie den Eingangsregler wie folgt ein. Einstellung des Eingangsreglers fig.rec-1.eps 1. Drücken Sie die REC-Taste. 2. Das R-1 geht in Aufnahmebereitschaft. Die Anzeige zeigt die für den gewählten Dateityp bzw. die für dessen Aufnahmequalität verbleibende Zeit an. Verbleibende Aufnahmezeit * Der während der Aufnahmebereitschaft angezeigte Songname ist der Name der Datei, die bei Abschluss der neuen Aufnahme erzeugt werden wird. fig.rec-2.eps 3. Drücken Sie die DISPLAY-Taste. 4. Spielen Sie den Sound, den Sie tatsächlich aufnehmen wollen, und positionieren Sie das interne Mikrofon des R-1 so, dass es den Sound empfangen kann. * Wenn Sie während der Aufnahme einen Effekt auf den Sound anwenden wollen, regeln Sie den Eingangspegel bei eingeschaltetem Effekt ein. fig.rec-3.eps 5. Steigern Sie langsam die Eingangslautstärke während der Sound spielt. 6. Stellen Sie das Niveau so ein, dass B A das ■ in der Anzeige des Eingangsniveaus das ganz rechts außen stehende ■ nicht erreicht. (Stellung A in der obigen Abbildung) Bei zu niedrigem Aufnahmeniveau können Sie keine sehr leisen Sounds aufnehmen. Bei zu hohem Aufnahmepegel sind laute Sounds gestört und verursachen Knarzgeräusche in der Aufnahme. * Falls das Aufnahmematerial gelegentliche laute Soundspitzen wie z. B. Schlagzeugeinsätze in Bandvorführungen oder plötzliches Lachen in einem sonst ruhigen Gespräch aufweist, empfehlen wir den Einsatz des Begrenzers (06 Limiter, S. 90). Falls dieser eingesetzt werden soll, regeln Sie den Eingangspegel auf das allgemeine Niveau des Aufnahmematerials ein, nicht auf die gelegentlichen lauten Soundspitzen. Wenn Sie den Begrenzer verwenden, wird der Eingangspegel automatisch so eingestellt, dass der Toneingangspegel nicht zu hoch wird. Bei Verwendung des Begrenzsers sollten Sie den Eingangspegel so einstellen, dass das Symbol ■ in Stellung B in der Abbildung nur gelegentlich erscheint. 80 Einfache Aufnahmemethoden fig.rec-time.eps 6 Drücken Sie die REC-Taste. * Sie können die Aufnahme auch mit der PLAY/PAUSE-Taste starten. Vergangene Zeit seit Aufnahmebeginn 7 Deutsch Wenn Sie den Eingangsregler während der Aufnahmebereitschaft oder während der Aufnahme verstellen, wird sich der Eingangspegel ändern. Achten Sie darauf, den Eingangsregler nicht unabsichtlich zu verstellen. Auch bei auf ON geschaltetem HOLD-Schalter ist der Eingangsregler nicht von der sperrenden HOLD-Funktion betroffen. English Die Aufnahme beginnt. Nach Abschluss der Aufnahme drücken Sie die STOP-Taste . Wenn Sie die Aufnahme unterbrechen wollen, drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSETaste. Zur Beendigung der Pause und zur Fortsetzung der Aufnahme drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSE-Taste erneut. Français Die Aufnahmedaten werden in einer Datei auf der CompactFlash-Karte gespeichert. Die Anzeige zeigt den Dateinamen der Aufnahme an, und diese Datei wird selektiert. * Der Dateiname wird automatisch nach folgendem Schema gebildet: R1_0001.MP3. Die 0001 ist die Zahl, die auf die Datei mit der höchsten Zahl auf der CompactFlash-Karte folgt. * Die Datei wird auf der Rootebene der CompactFlash-Karte erzeugt. Verzeichnisse bzw. Ordner werden nicht erzeugt. Um die gerade aufgenommene Datei anzuhören, drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSETaste. Informationen zu anderen Wiedergabemethoden finden Sie unter “Wiedergabemethoden” (S. 85). Wie der Eingangepegelmesser den Signalpegel anzeigt Anzahl von erscheinenden ■ Keine 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 dB ∞ -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 -21,0 Anzahl von erscheinenden ■ 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 dB -21,0 -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– Español 8 Italiano * Da das R-1 über keine interne Uhr verfügt, haben alle Dateien ein Erzeugungsdatum vom 1.1.2002. -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 (Clip) 81 Einfache Aufnahmemethoden Aufnehmen mit externem Mikrofon Das R-1 kann dynamische Mikrofone und diejenigen anschlussbetriebenen Kondensatormikrofone mit Ministecker benutzen, die für die Aufnahmebuchse eines Mini Disk-Recorders oder der Mikrofonbuchse eines Computers vorgesehen sind. Wenn Sie ein Kondensatormikrofon einsetzen, muss dies für den Anschlussbetrieb geeignet sein. Wenn Sie ein falsches Mikrofon oder ein herkömmliches Stereomikrofon mit Ministecker anschließen, kann Ihr Gerät beschädigt werden. fig.conmic-LR.eps L R MIRCRO Stereomikrofon MIRCRO TYP EINGANGSPEGEL 1 Das Gerät muss ausgeschaltet sein. Stellen Sie den Eingangsregler auf die Minimumposition. Wenn ein Gerät am Standardeingang (Line input) angeschlossen ist, wird das Eingangssignal vom Mikrofoneingang ignoriert. Wenn Sie über den Mikrofoneingang aufnehmen wollen, darf am Standardeingang kein Kabel angeschlossen sein. 2 3 4 82 Schalten Sie das R-1 ein, so wie in “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (S. 19) beschrieben. Geben Sie den Dateityp ihrer beabsichtigten Aufnahme an, so wie in “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (S. 28) beschrieben. Sie können im Konfigurationsmodus mit 07 Record Mode (S. 90) die gewünschte Einstellung vornehmen oder die aktuelle Einstellung prüfen. Schalten Sie den Mikrofonauswahlschalter auf den Typ des für den Mikrofoneingang vorgesehenen Mikrofons. -> “Mikrofonauswahlschalter” (S. 75) Einfache Aufnahmemethoden Schließen Sie Ihr externes Mikrofon am Mikrofoneingang an. Wenn Sie den Sound während der Aufnahme hören wollen, schließen Sie dazu einen Kopfhörer als Monitor an den entsprechenden Anschluss an. Falls Sie externe Lautsprecher anschließen und als Monitor zu nutzen versuchen, kommt es zu akustischen Rückkopplungen. Versuchen Sie nicht, Lautsprecher als Monitor einzusetzen. 6 Stellen Sie den Eingangsregler wie folgt ein. English 5 Eingangsniveau anpassen fig.rec-1.eps Das R-1 geht in Aufnahmebereitschaft. Die Anzeige zeigt die für den gewählten Dateityp bzw. die für dessen Aufnahmequalität verbleibende Zeit an. Deutsch 1. Drücken Sie die REC-Taste. Verbleibende Aufnahmezeit * Der während der Aufnahmebereitschaft angezeigte Songname ist der Name der Datei, die bei Abschluss der neuen Aufnahme erzeugt werden wird. Français fig.rec-2.eps 2. Drücken Sie die DISPLAY-Taste. 3. Spielen Sie den Sound, den Sie tatsächlich aufnehmen wollen, und positionieren Sie das externe Mikrofon so, dass es den Sound empfangen kann. * Wenn Sie während der Aufnahme einen Effekt auf den Sound anwenden wollen, regeln Sie den Eingangspegel bei eingeschaltetem Effekt ein. fig.rec-3.eps B A meisten rechts stehende ■ nicht erreicht. (Stellung A in der obigen Abbildung) Bei zu niedrigem Aufnahmeniveau können Sie keine sehr leisen Sounds aufnehmen. Bei zu hohem Aufnahmepegel sind laute Sound gestört und verursachen Knarzgeräusche in der Aufnahme. * Falls Ihr Aufnahmematerial gelegentliche laute Soundspitzen enthält, wie z. B. Schlagzeugeinsätze einer Bandvorführung oder plötzliches lautes Lachen in einem sonst ruhigen Gespräch, empfehlen wir den Einsatz des Begrenzers (06 Limiter, S. 90). Falls dieser eingesetzt werden soll, regeln Sie den Eingangspegel passend für das allgemeine Soundniveau ein, und nicht auf die gelegentlichen Soundspitzen. Wenn Sie den Begrenzer verwenden, wird der Eingangspegel automatisch so eingestellt, dass der Toneingangspegel nicht zu hoch wird. Bei Verwendung des Begrenzsers sollten Sie den Eingangspegel so einstellen, dass das Symbol ■ in Stellung B in der Abbildung nur gelegentlich erscheint. 83 Español Aufnahmelautstärke. Stellen Sie den Pegel so ein, dass das ■ in der Anzeige des Eingangsniveaus das am Italiano 4. Erhöhen Sie langsam die Einfache Aufnahmemethoden fig.rec-time.eps 7 Drücken Sie die REC-Taste. Die Aufnahme beginnt. * Sie können die Aufnahme auch mit der PLAY/PAUSE-Taste starten. Vergangene Zeit seit Aufnahmebeginn Wenn Sie den Eingangsregler während der Aufnahmebereitschaft oder während der Aufnahme verstellen, wird sich der Eingangspegel ändern. Achten Sie darauf, den Eingangsregler nicht unabsichtlich zu verstellen. Auch bei auf ON geschaltetem HOLD-Schalter ist der Eingangsregler nicht von der sperrenden HOLD-Funktion betroffen. 8 Nach Abschluss der Aufnahme drücken Sie die STOP-Taste . Wenn Sie die Aufnahme unterbrechen wollen, drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSETaste. Zur Beendigung der Pause und zur Fortsetzung der Aufnahme drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSE-Taste erneut. Die Aufnahmedaten werden in einer Datei auf der CompactFlash-Karte gespeichert. Die Anzeige zeigt den Dateinamen der Aufnahme an, und diese Datei wird selektiert. * Der Dateiname wird automatisch nach folgendem Schema gebildet: R1_0001.MP3. Die 0001 ist die nächsthöhere Nummer der höchstnummerierten Datei auf der CompactFlashKarte. * Die Datei wird auf der Rootebene der CompactFlash-Karte erzeugt. Verzeichnisse bzw. Ordner werden nicht erzeugt. 9 Um die gerade aufgenommene Datei anzuhören, drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSETaste. Informationen zu anderen Wiedergabemethoden finden Sie unter “Wiedergabemethoden” (S. 85). Wie der Eingangepegelmesser den Signalpegel anzeigt 84 Anzahl von erscheinenden ■ Keine 1 2 3 4 5 ∞ -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 –– –– –– –– –– –– 6 7 -27,0 -24,0 –– –– -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 Anzahl von erscheinenden ■ 8 9 10 11 12 13 -21,0 -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 –– –– –– –– –– –– -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 -24,0 -21,0 14 15 -3,0 0,0 –– –– 0,0 (Clip) dB dB Wiedergabemethoden English Normale Wiedergabe 1 Deutsch Das R-1 hat keine internen Lautsprecher. Darum müssen Sie für das Hören der Wiedergabe Kopfhörer oder Lautsprecher bereithalten. Sie können den Kopfhöreranschluss des R-1 als optischen Digitalausgang (optical out) zur Verbindung mit einem digitalen Audiogerät oder als Standardausgang (line output) zur Verbindung mit Ihrem analogen Audiogerät nutzen. Bevor Sie fortfahren, stellen Sie die Verbindungen mit den für Ihr Gerät passenden Kabeln her. Berücksichtigen Sie “Connecting headphones” (S. 22), “Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)” (S. 23) oder “Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)” (S. 24). Wenn die Anzeige ein Bild wie in der Illustration zeigt, wählen Sie mit dem VALUE-Regler eine Songdatei. Drücken Sie die PREV-Taste, um zur vorherigen Songdatei zu gelangen, oder die NEXT-Taste, um zur nächsten Songdatei zu kommen. ) des R-1; die angezeigte Songdatei wird Stellen Sie den Lautstärkeregler langsam nach rechts bis auf ein angenehmes Hörniveau.. * Der angezeigte Songname ist der Name der Datei. Er korrespondiert nicht mit dem Tag (der Markierung) ID3 in der MP3-Datei. Italiano 3 Drücken Sie die PLAY-Taste ( abgespielt. * Songnamen werden in alphabetischer Reihenfolge nach folgender Buchstabenordnung und nicht in der Reihenfolge ihrer Aufzeichnung angezeigt. (Leerraum) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz * Falls die CompactFlash-Karte Ordner bzw. Unterverzeichnisse enthält, werden die Dateien auf Rootebene zuerst angezeigt, gefolgt von den Dateien aus den Ordnern (Unterverzeichnissen). Español 2 Français * Falls die CompactFlash-Karte keine auf dem R-1 abspielbaren Song-Dateien enthält, wird in der Anzeige „NoSong“ angezeigt. * Dateinamen, die mit einem „.“ beginnen, werden ignoriert und nicht angezeigt. * Dateinamen mit anderen Endungen als .mp3 und .wav werden ignoriert und nicht angezeigt. Mehr Informationen über Dateien, die das R-1 aufnehmen und abspielen kann, finden Sie unter “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (S. 28). 85 Wiedergabemethoden REPEAT A-B (Wiedergabewiederholung) Mit dieser Funktion können Sie einen Songabschnitt bei der Wiedergabe markieren und ihn wiederholt abspielen. Verfahren 1 Drücken Sie während des Abspielens einmal auf die REPEAT-Taste( ). Dieser Ort wird dem Beginn der Wiederholung zugewiesen (Punkt A). 2 Song A Drücken Sie nochmals auf die REPEAT-Taste. Dieser Ort wird dem Ende der Wiederholung zugewiesen (Punkt B). fig.repeat-a A B A B Song Der von Ihnen in den Schritten 1 und 2 angegebene Abschnitt zwischen den Punkten A und B wird wiederholt abgespielt. Zur Rückname der Abspielwiederholung drücken Sie die REPEAT-Taste erneut. Song Hinweise * Wenn Sie nach der Angabe des Punktes A die STOP-Taste drücken, also bevor Sie einen Punkt B angegeben haben, wird der Punkt A gelöscht. * Wenn Sie nach der Angabe des Punktes A die Wiedergabe bis zum Ende des Songs laufen lassen, liegt die Wiederholung zwischen Punkt A und dem Ende des Songs. * Wenn Sie die STOP-Taste während der Wiederholung drücken, stoppt die Wiederholung und die Einstellung für den Abschnitt (A-B) wird gelöscht. Zum Löschen dieser Funktion • • • 86 Bei angegebenen Punkten A und B löscht das Drücken der REPEAT-Taste ( ) die Einstellungen für die Punkte A und B . Wenn Sie nach der Angabe des Punktes A die STOP-Taste drücken, also bevor Sie einen Punkt B angegeben haben, wird der Punkt A gelöscht. Wenn Sie sowohl die Wiedergabe stoppen als auch die Wiederholungseinstellungen löschen wollen, drücken Sie die STOP-Taste. Die Wiedergabe stoppt und die Wiederholungseinstellungen der Punkte A und B werden gelöscht. Wiedergabemethoden 1/2 PLAY (halbierte Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit) English Hier wird erklärt, wie Sie mit halber Geschwindigkeit abspielen können. Verfahren 1 Drücken Sie während des Abspielens oder bei STOP die SPEED-Taste. Deutsch Die untere Zeile der Anzeige zeigt 1/2 und die Wiedergabe erfolgt mit halber Geschwindigkeit. Wenn das R-1 gerade abspielt, wird die Wiedergabe verlangsamt. Wenn das R-1 gerade gestoppt ist, wird die Wiedergabe mit halber Geschwindigkeit beginnen, wenn Sie die PLAY-Taste drücken. Français * Die Funktion verstellt die Tonhöhe der verlangsamten Wiedergabe so, dass sie der bei normaler Wiedergabe entspricht. Dies kann einen Schwebungseffekt bei der Wiedergabe erzeugen, der jedoch keine Fehlfunktion bedeutet. To cancel this function Wenn die Wiedergabe in halber Geschwindigkeit aktiviert ist, drücken Sie die SPEED-Taste zu deren Abbruch. Español Italiano Wenn Sie die verlangsamte Wiedergabe nicht abbrechen, wird auch der nächste Song verlangsamt abgespielt. 87 Wiedergabemethoden PLAY MODE (Wiedergabemodus) Hier können Sie die Reihenfolge und die Methode der Wiedergabe angeben. 1 Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. Sie können den PLAY-Modus während des Spielens des R-1 nicht ändern. Sie müssen erst die STOP-Taste zum Anhalten der Wiedergabe drücken. 2 3 4 Stellen Sie am VALUE-Regler 05 Play Mode ein. Drücken Sie die ENTER-Taste. Stellen Sie mit dem VALUE-Regler den gewünschten PLAY-Modus ein. Sequential Single Shuffle Die Songs werden nacheinander in der Reihenfolge 001, 002, 002...009 abgespielt. * Benutzen Sie die Tasten PREV und NEXT oder den VALUE-Regler zur Auswahl einer Songdatei. Die einzelne selektierte Songdatei wird wiederholt abgespielt. Die Reihenfolge der Songs ändert sich automatisch. * Ein unmittelbar vorher abgespielter Song wird nicht gespielt. * Wenn Sie die Tasten PREV und NEXT oder den VALUE-Regler zur Auswahl eines Songs benutzen, werden die Songs in der gleichen Reihenfolge angeboten, wie sie auch PLAY-Modus Sequential erscheinen. fig.sequential.eps 5 6 Drücken Sie nach der Auswahl des gewünschten PLAY-Modus die ENTER-Taste. Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. Sie werden zum PLAY-Modus zurückkehren. 88 Einsatz von Effekten English Anwenden eines Effekts Dieser Abschnitt erklärt die Anwendung eines Effekts während der Wiedergabe oder bei Aufnahmebereitschaft. Sie können Effekteinstellungen auch vor der Wiedergabe vornehmen oder verschiedene Einstellungen bei einer Probeaufnahme ausprobieren. fig.effect.eps Beim Abspielen in Aufnahmebereitschaft Deutsch Effektmodus an 3 1 2 Änderungsmodus EDIT EXIT ENTER Français Wählen Sie einen Effekt 01:Eazy EQ -> 02:For Speech... EXIT ENTER Wählen Sie einen Parameter Typ -> Level 1 Italiano EDIT EXIT ENTER Español Editieren eines Parameters Pop -> Dance -> HipHop... EXIT Den Editiermodus für Effekte verlassen Wiedergabe /Aufnahme starten Die Parametereinstellungen für Effekte werden bis zu Ihrer nächsten Änderung gespeichert. 89 Verschiedene Einstellungen Systemeinstellungen (Konfigurationsmodus) Details zu diesen Einstellungen finden Sie in “Procedures” (S. 56). * Sie können aus laufender Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe und aus der Aufnahmebereitschaft mit der MENU-Taste nicht in den Konfigurationsmodus gelangen. Wert (Voreinstellung ist fett gedruckt) Verfahren 1–5–10 A (S. 56) OFF, ON, 5sec, 10sec, 20sec A (S. 56) –– B (S. 58) –– C (S. 60) Sequential, Single, Shuffle A (S. 56) OFF, ON A (S. 56) 07 Record Mode Gibt den Dateityp der bei einer Aufnahme erzeugten Datei vor. Dies bestimmt die Audioqualität der aufgenommenen Datei. MP3 64kbps, MP3 96kbps, MP3 128kbps, MP3 160kbps, MP3 192kbps, MP3 256kbps, MP3 320kbps, WAV 16bit, WAV 24bit A (S. 56) 08 Track Splitting Schaltet die Tracktrennungsfunktion an und aus. * Diese Funktion spaltet die Datei automatisch auf, wenn während der Aufnahme ein mindestens drei Sekunden langes Ruheintervall auftritt. OFF, ON A (S. 56) Menü/Effekt 01 02 03 04 05 Rename File Ändert einen Dateinamen. Play Mode Gibt die Reihenfolge vor, nach der Songs abgespielt werden. Limiter Schaltet den Begrenzer für den Eingangspegel an und aus. * Der Begrenzer reduziert den Eingangspegel bei zu starkem Niveau auf ein passendes Maß. Schnitt-Niveau Schwellwert-Niveau AD-N iveau 06 LCD Contrast Stellt den Kontrast der Anzeige ein. LCD Backlight Gibt die Zeitspanne vor, nach der die Anzeigenbeleuchtung bei Batteriebetrieb abgeschaltet wird. Delete File Löscht eine Datei. Schnittgeräusche reduzieren und an AD-Konverter weiterleiten Niveau des Eingangsignals Der Schwellwert ist –9 dBFS. 90 11 12 A (S. 56) STEREO, MONO A (S. 56) OFF, 1min, 2min, 3min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 45min, 60min A (S. 56) – D (S. 62) Deutsch OFF, ON 13 Firmware Ver1.00 Erlaubt die Versionsprüfung der Firmware des R1. – E (S. 64) 14 About the R-1 Zeigt Informationen über das R-1 an. – A (S. 56) Français 10 Verfahren Italiano 09 Input Monitor Schalten Sie diese Funktion ein, wenn Sie das Eingangssignal über Kopfhörer überwachen. Schalten Sie aus, wenn das Signal nicht überwacht wird. * Während der Aufnahme kann der Sound unabhängig von dieser Einstellung gehört werden. Input Select Setzen Sie diese Einstellung beim Anschluss eines Stereomikrofons auf STEREO. Setzen Sie diese Einstellung beim Anschluss eines Mono-Mikrofons auf MONO. Wenn Sie die STEREOEinstellung mit einem MONO-Signal nutzen, wird nur der linke Kanal aufgenommen. Bei MONO-Einstellung wird der Sound auf dem rechten und linken Kanal aufgenommen. * Die aufgenommene Datei hat auch bei MONOEinstellung ein STEREO-Format. Sleep Timer Gibt die Zeitspanne vor, nach der das R-1 bei Batteriebetrieb in den Schlafmodus geht. * Diese Einstellung bewirkt bei Netzbetrieb nichts. Format Card Formatiert eine CompactFlash-Karte Wert (Voreinstellung ist fett gedruckt) Español Menü/Effekt English Verschiedene Einstellungen 91 Commandes et connecteurs Figure panneau 1 1 2 14 3 4 5 15 6 7 8 16 9 10 11 12 1 13 Microphone interne Microphone stéréo intégré Ce microphone interne est désactivé lorsqu’un microphone ou autre appareil est branché sur les entrées micro 18 ou les entrées ligne 19 . Il convient donc de ne rien raccorder aux connecteurs d’entrée si l’on veut utiliser le microphone interne. Pour enregistrer à l'aide du microphone interne, placer le bouton de sélection de type de microphone à DYN. 2 Afficheur Tient l’utilisateur informé de l’état d’exécution du R-1. 3 Touche EFFECT Appuyer sur la touche EFFECT pour activer/désactiver un effet. Cette touche s’allume lorsque l’effet est activé. Si l’effet est activé avant lecture ou en cours de lecture, il est appliqué à l’enregistrement lors de la lecture. S’il est activé avant enregistrement ou en cours d’enregistrement, il est appliqué au son enregistré, c’est-à-dire que l’enregistrement intègre le traitement résultant de l’effet. Le R-1 est doté de divers effets permettant de modifier le son en lecture ou en enregistrement afin de lui donner plus de présence ou d’en rendre l’écoute plus agréable. Ces effets permettent par ailleurs de transformer complètement le son. 4 Touche EDIT Cette touche donne accès au paramétrage des effets. Pour plus d’information sur les effets, se reporter à“Using effects” (p. 46). Le paramétrage des effets est possible que la touche EFFECT soit activée ou non. 5 Touche MENU Cette touche permet de sélectionner le mode de paramétrage de l’appareil (« Setup ») : contraste de l’afficheur à cristaux liquides (LCD), sélection de la qualité d’enregistrement et divers autres réglages globaux (cf. “Paramétrages divers” (p. 110)). 92 Commandes et connecteurs 6 Touche DISPLAY Cette touche commute les différents écrans de l’afficheur du R-1. En mode PLAY (lecture), cette touche fait défiler les paramètres suivants : temps de lecture écoulé, temps de lecture restant pour le fichier en cours, type de fichier et débit. Appuyer sur la touche DISPLAY pour faire défiler les différents paramètres. Touche PREV English 7 8 Deutsch Cette touche permet de revenir au début du fichier en cours ou de sélectionner le précédent. En cours de lecture d’un fichier, elle permet de revenir au début de celui-ci. Si le lecteur est déjà calé sur le début du fichier (00:00), cette touche sélectionne le fichier précédent. Il suffit d’appuyer longuement sur cette touche pour revenir au premier des fichiers en mémoire. Ces opérations sont possibles en cours de lecture ou non. Touche NEXT Cette touche permet de sélectionner le fichier suivant. Il suffit d’appuyer longuement sur cette touche pour faire défiler les fichiers vers l’avant. Ces opérations sont possibles en cours de lecture ou non. 9 Touche REPEAT Français Permet la lecture en boucle d’une partie d’un fichier située entre deux points (A - B) définis par l’utilisateur. Appuyer une fois sur cette touche pour définir le point “A”, et une nouvelle fois pour définir le point “B”. Une troisième pression sur cette touche annule la lecture en boucle et efface les points A et B. Figure Repeat-a 1. En cours de lecture, appuyer sur la touche Song A REPEAT de manière à définir le point de départ (point A) de la boucle. 2. Appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche REPEAT pour définir le point d’arrivée (point B). A B A B Italiano Figure Repeat-b Song L’appareil lit en boucle la partie du fichier située entre les deux points ainsi définis aux étapes 1 et 2. Pour annuler la lecture en boucle, appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche REPEAT. 10 Español Figure Repeat-ab Song Touche SPEED Cette touche met la lecture en mode demi-vitesse. Appuyer une nouvelle fois pour repasser en vitesse normale. Cette fonction permet de jouer sur un morceau de musique au tempo trop rapide ou d’écouter dans un plus grand confort un enregistrement d’une personne parlant très vite. 93 Commandes et connecteurs Figure panneau 2 1 17 2 18 19 14 3 20 4 5 15 6 7 8 21 9 10 11 12 11 16 13 Touche STOP Interrompt lecture ou enregistrement. 12 Touche PLAY/PAUSE Cette touche permet de lancer la lecture, mais également de mettre en mode « pause » enregistrement ou lecture. En cours de lecture, cette touche met l’appareil en pause, l’afficheur indiquant PLAYPAUSE. Il suffit d’appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche pour relancer la lecture. De même, en cours d’enregistrement, cette touche permet d’interrompre brièvement ce dernier. L’afficheur indique alors REC-PAUSE, et la touche REC (enregistrement) émet une lumière rouge clignotante. Pour relancer l’enregistrement, appuyer de nouveau sur la touche REC (ou appuyer sur la touche PLAY/PAUSE). La touche REC émet une lumière rouge clignotante durant l’enregistrement. 13 Touche REC L’appareil étant à l’arrêt, la touche REC le met en mode pause enregistrement (« recording-standby »). L’afficheur indique alors REC STANDBY, et la touche REC (enregistrement) émet une lumière rouge clignotante. Pour lancer l’enregistrement à partir du mode pause enregistrement, appuyer de nouveau sur la touche REC (ou appuyer sur la touche PLAY/PAUSE). En cours d’enregistrement, la touche REC émet une lumière rouge. 14 Molette VALUE Cette molette sert à la sélection des fichiers, au choix des effets et à leur réglage, ainsi qu’à la sélection des options du mode de paramétrage de l’appareil. 15 Touche EXIT Cette touche permet de revenir au paramètre précédent en mode Effect Edit (réglage effets) ou Setup (paramétrage). En mode Setup, toute modification des paramètres est annulée si l’on appuie sur la touche EXIT avant d’avoir appuyé sur la touche ENTER. 16 Touche ENTER Permet de sélectionner un paramètre ou de finaliser une modification effectuée en mode Effect Edit ou Setup. 94 Commandes et connecteurs 17 Connecteur d’entrée microphone Réservé au branchement d’un microphone Si un câble est branché sur la prise d’entrée ligne, aucun signal audio ne passe par cette prise microphone. 18 English Mettre le sélecteur de type de micro (“mic type”) 19 sur la position correspondant au type de microphone branché (microphone électro-dynamique ou mini-micro électrostatique à alimentation fantôme). Le connecteur prend en charge les micros stéréo ; utiliser un adaptateur stéréo de type mini-jack. Si le microphone est de type monophonique, mettre le paramètre 10 Input Select (mode Setup) sur MONO. Pour plus d’information sur ce réglage, se reporter à“Paramétrage système (mode Setup)” (p. 110). Entrée ligne 19 Deutsch Le branchement des sorties audio d’un appareil audio ou d’un instrument de musique sur le R-1 doit se faire sur cette prise par l’intermédiaire d’un câble stéréo de type minijack. Sélecteur de type de microphone (“mic type”) Mettre ce sélecteur sur la position correspondant au type de microphone branché sur l’entrée mic input 17 . CND 20 Utiliser ce paramètre si le microphone est de type électro-dynamique. Si le microphone interne est utilisé, régler à DYN. Utiliser ce paramètre si le micro est de type électrostatique à alimentation fantôme. Le microphone doit impérativement nécessiter une alimentation fantôme : En effet, cette prise fournit une tension d’alimentation de 2 V. * Si le sélecteur est sur la position CND, ne brancher aucun microphone ni aucun autre appareil n’acceptant pas un telle alimentation fantôme, qui risquerait de les endommager. Français DYN Volume d’entrée Connecteur USB Ce connecteur permet de brancher l’appareil sur un ordinateur par le biais du câble USB fourni. Une fois le R-1 branché sur l’ordinateur, il est possible de transférer ou copier sur ce dernier les fichiers sons enregistrés à l’aide de l’appareil. Inversement, il est possible de transférer ou de copier des fichiers .mp3 ou .wav présents sur l’ordinateur de manière à les faire lire par le R-1. Ce connecteur prend en charge la norme USB 2.0 (USB haut débit), assurant un chargement rapide. La marche à suivre pour brancher le R-1 sur un ordinateur figure à la rubrique “Connecting the R-1 to your computer” (p. 44). Une fois le R-1 “reconnu” par l’ordinateur, l’afficheur du R-1 indique Connected via USB. Español 21 Italiano Règle le volume d’entrée du microphone intégré 1 , de l’entrée micro 17 ou de l’entrée ligne 18 . Régler ce niveau selon la méthode décrite à la rubrique “Réglage du niveau d’entrée” (p. 100) tout en surveillant le niveau d’entrée. Pour la durée de la connexion avec l’ordinateur, toutes les fonction du R-1 (interrupteur de marche/arrêt excepté) sont désactivées (ses divers commutateurs et touches ne fonctionnent pas). 95 Commandes et connecteurs Figure panneau 3 1 22 23 22 24 25 26 27 28 Interrupteur principal Met l’appareil sous tension et hors tension. Ne pas mettre l’appareil hors tension en cours de lecture ou d’enregistrement. Il faut impérativement s’assurer que lecture et enregistrement sont coupés avant toute mise hors tension. • En cas de mise hors tension accidentelle en cours d’enregistrement, les données enregistrées ne sont pas mémorisées sur la carte CompactFlash. • Celle-ci peut se trouver endommagée en cas de mise hors tension de l’appareil alors qu’elle subit une opération de lecture ou d’écriture de données, c’est-à-dire pendant la lecture ou l’enregistrement audio. • En cas de mise hors tension du R-1 alors que l’indication Now working... est affichée (modification du paramétrage d’un effet ou sauvegarde d’un paramètre modifié), le R-1 cesse de fonctionner correctement et peut même ne plus redémarrer. Il convient donc de faire en sorte de ne JAMAIS le mettre hors tension dans de telles conditions. 23 Prise adaptateur secteur Connecter l’adaptateur secteur sur cette prise. 24 Commutateur HOLD Le commutateur HOLD étant sur la position ON, les autres touches de l’appareil sont désactivées, ce qui évite toute fausse manœuvre. Exceptions : lorsque le commutateur HOLD est sur la position ON, lesélecteur Mic type 19 , le bouton Input volume 20 , l’ interrupteur marche/arrêt 22 et le bouton Output volume 25 restent opérationnels. 25 Niveau de sortie (Output volume) Ce bouton permet de régler le volume sonore du signal en sortie de la prisecasque/ sortie ligne/sortie numérique 26 (le niveau de la sortie numérique n’est toutefois pas réglable). 26 Prise casque/sortie ligne/sortie numérique (Headphone/line output/digital output) Prise pour casque ou enceintes externes Pour exploiter le signal numérique, brancher un câble optique avec prise mini. 27 Touche EJECT Assure l’éjection de la carte CompactFlash introduite dans l’emplacement pour carte mémoire 28 . 28 Emplacement pour carte mémoire Introduire une carte mémoire CompactFlash dans la fente. Le R-1 prend uniquement en charge les cartes mémoire de type CompactFlash. 96 Commandes et connecteurs English Figure panneau 4 Deutsch 29 30 29 Logement des piles Couvercle de l’emplacement pour carte mémoire Italiano Ce couvercle évite toute éjection intempestive de la carte CompactFlash. Ce couvercle dissimule l’emplacement de la carte 28 ainsi que la touche d’éjection 27 . Español 30 Français Installer les piles dans leur logement si le R-1 doit fonctionner sur piles. Si l’on entend alimenter l’appareil à l’aide de son adaptateur secteur, il est inutile d’installer les piles. Mettre impérativement le R-1 hors tension avant de passer d’un type d’alimentation électrique à l’autre (adapteur secteur / piles et vice-versa). Lire la rubrique“Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (p. 20) avant toute utilisation du R-1. 97 Préparatifs avant utilisation du R-1 Formatage d’une carte CompactFlash Avant utilisation dans le R-1, la carte CompactFlash doit être formatée. Cette opération doit être effectuée à l’aide du R-1, selon la marche à suivre indiquée à la page 60 (Paramètres système - mode Setup). Les cartes CompactFlash formatées sur un autre appareil que le R-1 risquent de ne pas fonctionner correctement avec ce dernier. 1 2 Mettre le R-1 hors tension. Introduire la carte CompactFlash dans l’emplacement prévu à cet effet. Figure startup.epsFigure no-song.eps 3 4 Mettre le R-1 sous tension. Si la carte CompactFlash ne comporte aucun fichier pouvant être lu par le R1, l’indication No Song s’affiche. Dans le cas contraire, l’écran de lecture (“play mode”) s’affiche. Appuyer sur la touche MENU. * Si l’on désire annuler l’opération, il suffit d’appuyer sur la touche EXIT. L’écran précédent s’affiche à nouveau. Figure format-disp.eps 5 6 Tourner la molette VALUE de manière à sélectionner l’option12 Format Card. Appuyer sur la touche ENTER. Figure format.eps 7 Lorsque l’écran ci-contre s’affiche, appuyer sur la touche ENTER. Figure sure.eps 8 Un écran de confirmation s’affiche. Pour lancer le formatage de la carte, appuyer sur la touche ENTER. * Pour annuler l’opération (pas de formatage de la carte), appuyer sur la touche EXIT. L’appareil revient à l’écran illustré au point 5. Ne jamais éjecter la carte CompactFlash en cours de formatage. Cela pourrait endommager la carte. Figure complete.eps Le formatage est terminé lorsque le message Completed!s’affiche. 9 98 Appuyer sur la touche MENU. L’écran principal (mode Play) s’affiche à nouveau. Méthodes d’enregistrement Le tableau ci-dessous indique les durées d’enregistrement approximatives permises par les différentes cartes CompactFlash. Unité : minute Type de fichier .wav, 24 bits/44,1 kHz .wav, 16 bits/44,1 kHz 64 Mo 3 5 .mp3, 16 bits/320 kb/s .mp3, 16 bits/256 kb/s 26 32 .mp3, 16 bits/192 kb/s 43 .mp3, 16 bits/160 kb/s .mp3, 16 bits/128 kb/s .mp3, 16 bits/96 kb/s .mp3, 16 bits/64 kb/s 256 Mo 15 512 Mo 31 2 Go 125 23 47 188 102 208 831 128 170 260 346 1,039 1,386 52 205 416 1,663 65 256 520 2,079 86 130 341 512 693 1,040 2,772 4,158 Deutsch Capacité de la carte * Les durées d’enregistrement ci-dessus sont approximatives. La durée d’enregistrement effective peut varier légèrement ; il convient donc d’en tenir compte au moment des préparatifs d’enregistrement. * Le formatage de la carte CompactFlash doit être fait à l’aide du R-1. * Pour un enregistrement continu et de longue durée, utiliser l’adaptateur secteur fourni. * Si l’enregistrement est fait en plusieurs fichiers, la durée d’enregistrement totale sera inférieure à celle indiquée ci-dessus. Français Durée d’enregistrement (approximative) English Durées d’enregistrement sur carte CompactFlash Enregistrement à l’aide du micro intégré Italiano Figure mic-LR.eps Le R-1 est doté d’un microphone stéréo intégré. Les sons captés sur le côté droit du R-1 sont enregistrés sur le canal de droite (R), et les sons captés sur le côté gauche sont enregistrés sur le canal de gauche (G). 1 L R Español Ne rien raccorder aux connecteurs d’entrée (micro et ligne) si l’on veut utiliser le microphone interne. En cas de branchement d’un microphone ou d’un câble sur la prise microphone ou sur l’entrée ligne, la prise ainsi utilisée devient prioritaire, le microphone intégré étant alors mis hors circuit. S’assurer que le R-1 est hors tension (interrupteur sur OFF). Régler le volume d’entrée à zéro. Pour entendre l’enregistrement au fur et à mesure, brancher un casque sur la prise prévue à cet effet (Phones). Ne pas tenter de contrôler l’enregistrement par le biais d’enceintes raccordées à l’appareil sous peine de déclencher une réaction acoustique (“effet Larsen”). 99 Méthodes d’enregistrement 2 3 4 5 Mettre le R-1 sous tension comme indiqué à la rubrique “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (p. 19). Pour enregistrer à l'aide du microphone interne, placer le bouton de sélection de type de microphone à DYN. Sélectionner le type de fichier à enregistrer (cf. “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28)). Pour effectuer la sélection ou contrôler le type actuellement sélectionné, utiliser l’option 07 Record Mode (p. 110) du mode Setup. Régler le niveau d’entrée comme indiqué ci-après. Réglage du niveau d’entrée Figure rec-1.eps 1. Appuyer sur la touche REC. L’appareil passe en mode pause enregistrement (« REC STANDBY »). L’afficheur indique la durée d’enregistrement possible pour la qualité sélectionnée. Durée d’enregistrement restante * Le nom de fichier affiché en mode pause enregistrement est celui du fichier qui sera créé en fin d’enregistrement. Figure rec-2.eps 2. Appuyer sur la touche DISPLAY. 3. Jouer/produire les sons à enregistrer et positionner le R-1 de manière à ce que son micro intégré puisse les capter correctement. * Pour traiter le son à l’aide d’un effet pendant l’enregistrement, régler le niveau d’entrée après activation de l’effet. Figure rec-3.eps 4. Lancer le son à enregistrer et accroître progressivement le volume d’entrée. Continuer d’accroître le niveau d’entrée, de manière à ne pas afB A ficher le dernier segment de l’indicateur à barres. (Position A dans l'illustration ci-dessus.) Si le niveau d’enregistrement est trop bas, l’appareil n’enregistrera pas les sons de très faible volume. Si le volume d’enregistrement est trop élevé, les sons les plus forts (crêtes) sont distordus, ce qui se traduit par des craquements tout au long des pistes enregistrées. * Si le son à enregistrer comporte des crêtes importantes (coups de grosse caisse dans le cas d’un orchestre, rire soudain dans le cas d’une conversation), il est recommandé d’utiliser le limiteur (06 Limiter,p. 110). Il est ainsi possible de régler le niveau d’entrée en fonction du niveau général du son à enregistrer, sans tenir compte du niveau des crètes. Lorsque le limiteur est utilisé, le niveau d'entrée audio est automatiquement ajusté pour ne pas atteindre un niveau trop élevé. Lorsque le limiteur est utilisé, il est préférable d'ajuster le niveau d'entrée pour que le symbole ■ n'apparaisse qu'occasionnellement en position B . 100 Méthodes d’enregistrement Figure rec-time.eps 6 Appuyer sur la touche REC. * Le lancement de l’enregistrement peut également se faire à l’aide de la touche PLAY/PAUSE. Temps écoulé depuis le lancement de l’enregistrement 7 Deutsch Si l’on actionne le bouton de réglage du volume d’entrée en mode pause enregistrement (“REC STANDBY”) ou en cours d’enregistrement, le niveau d’enregistrement change. Il convient donc de veiller à ne pas toucher à ce bouton par inadvertance. En outre, il faut savoir que ce bouton reste actif même si le commutateur HOLD est sur la position ON. English L’appareil commence a enregistrer. Pour mettre fin à l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la touche STOP. Pour interrompre temporairement l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la touche PLAY/ PAUSE. Pour relancer l’enregistrement, appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche PLAY/PAUSE. Français Les données enregistrées sont mémorisées sous forme de fichier sur la carte mémoire. L’afficheur indique le nom de fichier de l’enregistrement, ce fichier étant sélectionné. * Ce nom de fichier est créé automatiquement selon le format suivant : R1_0001.MP3. Les quatre chiffres (0001) correspondent au chiffre faisant suite au numéro de fichier le plus élevé figurant sur la carte CompactFlash. * Le fichier est créé au niveau « racine » de la carte CompactFlash. Aucun sous-répertoire ne peut être créé. Pour écouter les données qui viennent d’être enregistrées, appuyer sur la touche PLAY/PAUSE. D’autres modes de lecture existent - se reporter à “Modes de lecture” (p. 105). Indication du niveau du signal par l'indicateur de niveau Nombre de ■ Aucun 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ∞ -50,0 -40,0 dB –– –– –– -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 –– –– –– –– –– -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 Nombre de ■ 8 9 10 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 -21,0 11 12 13 14 15 -21,0 -18,0 -15,0 dB –– –– –– -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 –– –– –– –– –– -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 (Clip) Español 8 Italiano * L’appareil n’étant pas doté d’une horloge interne, tous les fichiers ont la même date de création, soit le 1er janvier 2002. 101 Méthodes d’enregistrement Enregistrement avec microphone externe Le R-1 accepte les microphones électro-dynamiques et les mini-micros électrostatiques à alimentation fantôme conçus pour être raccordés à la prise enregistrement d’un enregistreur mini-disque (MD) ou à la prise microphone d’un ordinateur. Si l’on utilise un microphone électrostatique, celui-ci doit impérativement être du type à alimentation fantôme. Le branchement d’un microphone (y compris microphone stéréo classique avec mini-jack) de type erroné peut endommager le matériel. Figure conmic-LR.eps L R MIC Microphone stéréo MIC TYPE (type de microphone) INPUT LEVEL (niveau d’entrée) 1 S’assurer que le R-1 est hors tension (interrupteur sur OFF). Régler le volume d’entrée à zéro. Si un câble ou appareil est raccordé à l’entrée ligne, le système ne prend pas en compte l’entrée microphone. Il convient donc de ne rien raccorder à l’entrée ligne si l’on désire enregistrer par le biais de la prise microphone. 2 3 4 102 Mettre le R-1 sous tension comme indiqué à la rubrique “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (p. 19). Indiquer le type de fichier à enregistrer (cf. “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28)). L’option 07 Record Mode (p. 110) du mode Setup permet de définir le paramètre voulu ou de contrôler le paramètre en vigueur. Régler le sélecteur Mic type sur le type de microphone raccordé à lentrée micro. -> “Sélecteur de type de microphone (“mic type”)” (p. 95) Méthodes d’enregistrement 5 Brancher le microphone externe sur l’entrée micro (prise Mic input). 6 English Pour entendre l’enregistrement au fur et à mesure, brancher un casque sur la prise prévue à cet effet (Phones). Ne pas tenter de contrôler l’enregistrement par le biais d’enceintes raccordées à l’appareil sous peine de déclencher une réaction acoustique (« effet Larsen »). Régler le niveau d’entrée comme indiqué ci-après. Réglage du niveau d’entrée Figure rec-1.eps L’appareil passe en mode pause enregistrement (“REC STANDBY”). L’afficheur indique la durée d’enregistrement possible pour la qualité sélectionnée. Durée d’enregistrement restante Deutsch 1. Appuyer sur la touche REC. 2. Appuyer sur la touche DISPLAY. 3. Jouer/produire les sons à enregistrer et positionner le microphone externe de manière à ce qu’il puisse les capter correctement. * Pour traiter le son à l’aide d’un effet pendant l’enregistrement, régler le niveau d’entrée après activation de l’effet. 4. Accroître progressivement le niveau d’entrée. Continuer d’accroître le niveau d’entrée, de manière à ne pas afficher le dernier segment de l’in- B A dicateur à barres. (Position A dans l'illustration ci-dessus.) Si le niveau d’enregistrement est trop bas, l’appareil n’enregistrera pas les sons de très faible volume. Si le volume d’enregistrement est trop élevé, les sons les plus forts (crêtes) sont distordus, ce qui se traduit par des craquements tout au long des pistes enregistrées. * Si le son à enregistrer comporte des crêtes importantes (coups de grosse caisse dans le cas d’un orchestre, rire soudain dans le cas d’une conversation), il est recommandé d’utiliser le limiteur (06 Limiter, p. 110). Il est ainsi possible de régler le niveau d’entrée en fonction du niveau général du son à enregistrer, sans tenir compte du niveau des crêtes. Lorsque le limiteur est utilisé, le niveau d'entrée audio est automatiquement ajusté pour ne pas atteindre un niveau trop élevé. Lorsque le limiteur est utilisé, il est préférable d'ajuster le niveau d'entrée pour que le symbole ■ n'apparaisse qu'occasionnellement en position B . 103 Italiano Figure rec-3.eps Español Figure rec-2.eps Français * Le nom de fichier affiché en mode pause enregistrement est celui du fichier qui sera créé en fin d’enregistrement. Méthodes d’enregistrement Figure rec-time.eps 7 Appuyer sur la touche REC. L’appareil commence a enregistrer. * Le lancement de l’enregistrement peut également se faire à l’aide de la touche PLAY/PAUSE. Temps écoulé depuis le lancement de l’enregistrement Si l’on actionne le bouton de réglage du volume d’entrée en mode pause enregistrement (“REC STANDBY”) ou en cours d’enregistrement, le niveau d’enregistrement change. Il convient donc de veiller à ne pas toucher à ce bouton par inadvertance. En outre, il faut savoir que ce bouton reste actif même si le commutateur HOLD est sur la position ON. 8 Pour mettre fin à l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la touche STOP. Pour interrompre temporairement l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la touche PLAY/ PAUSE. Pour relancer l’enregistrement, appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche PLAY/PAUSE. Les données enregistrées sont mémorisées sous forme de fichier sur la carte mémoire. L’afficheur indique le nom de fichier de l’enregistrement, ce fichier étant sélectionné. * Ce nom de fichier est créé automatiquement selon le format suivant : R1_0001.MP3. Les quatre chiffres (0001) correspondent au chiffre faisant suite au numéro de fichier le plus élevé figurant sur la carte CompactFlash. * Le fichier est créé au niveau « racine » de la carte CompactFlash. Aucun sous-répertoire ne peut être créé. 9 Pour écouter les données qui viennent d’être enregistrées, appuyer sur la touche PLAY/PAUSE. D’autres modes de lecture existent - se reporter à “Modes de lecture” (p. 105). Indication du niveau du signal par l'indicateur de niveau 104 Nombre de ■ Aucun 1 -50,0 -40,0 Nombre de ■ 8 9 –– –– –– -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 –– –– –– -27,0 -24,0 -21,0 ∞ -50,0 dB –– –– 2 3 4 -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 5 6 7 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 -21,0 -18,0 dB –– –– -18,0 -15,0 10 11 12 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 –– –– –– -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 13 14 15 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 –– –– –– -3,0 0,0 (Clip) Modes de lecture English Lecture normale 1 Deutsch Le R-1 n’est pas doté de hauts-parleurs intégrés. Il convient donc d’y raccorder un casque ou des enceintes. La prise casque de l’appareil tient lieu tant de sortie numérique (Optical) pour brancher un appareil numérique que de sortie ligne pour connecter un appareil analogique. Avant toute chose, effectuer les branchements à l’aide du type de câble voulu. Se rapporter à “Connecting headphones” (p. 22), “Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)” (p. 23), ou encore à “Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)” (p. 24). L’écran de l’afficheur correspondant à celui de l’illustration ci-dessus, tourner la molette VALUE pour sélectionner le fichier audio voulu. Appuyer sur la touche PREV pour passer au fichier précédent ou sur la touche NEXT pour passer au suivant. ) ; l’appareil entame la lecture du fichier dont le Tourner progressivement le bouton de volume vers la droite de manière à régler ce dernier à un niveau confortable pour l’oreille. * Le nom de fichier affiché par l’appareil est celui du fichier en cours de lecture. Il ne correspond pas aux données ID3 du fichier .mp3. Italiano 3 Appuyer sur la touch PLAY ( nom est affiché. * Les noms de fichiers sont affichés par ordre alphabétique, sur la base de la liste de caractères ci-dessous, et non pas dans l’ordre dans lequel ils ont été enregistrés. (espace) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz * Si la carte mémoire recèle des sous-répertoires, l’appareil affiche d’abord tous les fichiers situés au niveau « racine », puis les fichiers présents dans les sous-répertoires. Español 2 Français * Si la mention “No Song” s’affiche, cela veut dire que la carte CompactFlash ne recèle aucun fichier pouvant être lu par le R-1. * L’appareil ne tient pas compte de tout nom de fichier commençant par un point (« . »), et ne l’affiche donc pas. * Il en va de même de tout fichier dont l’extension est autre que « .mp3 » ou « .wav ». Pour en savoir davantage sur les types de fichiers que le R-1 peut enregistrer et lire, se reporter à“Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28). 105 Modes de lecture REPEAT A-B (lecture en boucle) Cette fonction permet de définir une zone d’un fichier devant être lue en boucle. Marche à suivre 1 En cours de lecture, appuyer sur la touche REPEAT( ) pour définir le point de départ de la boucle (point A). Song 2 A Appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche REPEAT pour définir le point d’arrivée (point B). Figure Repeat-a A B A B Song L’appareil lit en boucle la zone ainsi définie (située entre les points A et B que l’on vient de créer). Une troisième pression sur la touche REPEATannule la lecture en boucle. Song Remarques * Si, après avoir défini le point A, on appuie sur la touche STOP avant d’avoir défini le point B, le point A est supprimé. * Si, après avoir défini le point A, on laisse la lecture se dérouler jusqu’au bout du fichier, l’appareil lit en boucle la zone située entre le point A et la fin du fichier. * Si l’on appuie sur la touche STOP en cours de lecture en boucle, la lecture s’interrompt et la boucle (A-B) est supprimée. Annulation de la lecture en boucle • • • 106 Les points A et B étant définis, appuyer sur la touche REPEAT ( ) pour annuler la boucle (point A et point B). Si, après avoir défini le point A, on appuie sur la touche STOP avant d’avoir défini le point B, le point A est supprimé. Pour couper la lecture et annuler simultanément la boucle, appuyer sur la touche STOP. La lecture s’interrompt et la boucle (points A et B) sont supprimés. Modes de lecture 1/2 PLAY (lecture en mode demi-vitesse) L’appareil permet également une lecture à demi-vitesse. 1 English Marche à suivre À l’arrêt ou en cours de lecture, appuyer sur la touche SPEED. Deutsch La ligne inférieure de l’afficheur indique 1/2 PLAY. Si le R-1 est en train de lire un fichier, la vitesse de lecture est réduite de moitié. Si le R-1 est à l’arrêt, la lecture à demi-vitesse commence dès que l’on appuie sur la touche PLAY. * Cette fonction comprend en outre un ajustement automatique de la hauteur du son visant à préserver la hauteur normale. On constate alors éventuellement un effet de pleurage qui est une conséquence normale de ce traitement. Annulation de la lecture en boucle Français Si la fonction de lecture à demi-vitesse est active, appuyer sur la touche SPEED pour la désactiver. Español Italiano La lecture du fichier suivant se fait également à demi-vitesse tant que l’on ne désactive pas cette fonction. 107 Modes de lecture PLAY MODE (modes de lecture) Marche à suivre pour sélectionner le mode de lecture voulu 1 Appuyer sur la touche MENU. Il n’est pas possible de passer d’un mode de lecture à un autre alors que le R-1 est en cours de lecture. Il faut donc commencer par appuyer sur la touche STOP. 2 3 4 Sélectionner 05 Play Mode à l’aide de la molette VALUE. Appuyer sur la touche ENTER. Sélectionner le mode de lecture voulue à l’aide de la molette VALUE. Sequential (lecture séquentielle) Single (fichier unique) Shuffle (mode aléatoire) L’appareil lit les fichiers par ordre numérique (001, 002, 003, etc.). * Sélectionner le fichier voulu à l’aide des touches PREV et NEXT ou de la molette VALUE. L’appareil lit indéfiniment le seul fichier sélectionné. L’ordre de lecture des fichiers change automatiquement. * Chaque fichier est lu une fois et une seule. * Il reste possible de sélectionner un fichier à l’aide des touches PREV / NEXT ou de la molette VALUE, les noms de fichier défilant dans le même ordre qu’en mode Sequential. Figure sequential.eps 5 6 Après sélection du mode de lecture voulu, appuyer sur la touche ENTER. Appuyer sur la touche MENU. L’appareil revient à l’écran Setup Select - 05:PLAY MODE. 108 Utilisation des effets English Application d’un effet Ce chapitre explique comment appliquer un effet en cours de lecture ou en mode pause enregistrement. Il est également possible de paramétrer un effet avant de lancer la lecture, et d’essayer divers réglages d’effets en effectuant un enregistrement test. Figure effect.eps En cours de lecture /En mode pause enregistrement Deutsch Mode effets ON (activé) 3 1 2 Mode Edit (modification) EDIT EXIT ENTER Français Choix d’un effet 01:Eazy EQ -> 02:For Speech... EXIT ENTER Sélectionner un type de paramètre -> Level1 Italiano EDIT EXIT ENTER Español Modification du paramètre Pop -> Dance -> HipHop... EXIT Sortie du mode Edit Lancement lecture /enregistrement Le paramétrage effectué est conservé tel quel jusqu’à modification ultérieure. 109 Paramétrages divers Paramétrage système (mode Setup) La marche à suivre pour ce type de paramétrage est décrite à la rubrique “Procedures” (p. 56). * Lorsque l’appareil est en mode lecture, enregistrement ou pause enregistrement (“REC STANDBY”), la touche MENU ne donne pas accès au mode Setup. 01 02 03 04 05 Menu/effet Valeur (valeur par défaut en caractères gras) Marche à suivre LCD Contrast Réglage du contraste de l’affichage 1–5–10 A (p. 56) OFF, ON, 5 secondes, 10 secondes, 20 secondes A (p. 56) –– B (p. 58) Rename File Modification du nom d’un fichier –– C (p. 60) Play Mode Mode de lecture - détermine l’ordre de lecture des fichiers. Sequential (ordre numérique), Single (lecture en boucle d’un fichier), Shuffle (lecture par ordre aléatoire) A (p. 56) OFF, ON A (p. 56) MP3 64 kb/s, MP3 96 kb/s, MP3 128 kb/s, MP3 160 kb/s, MP3 192 kb/s, MP3 256 kb/s, MP3 320 kb/s, WAV 16 bits, WAV 24 bits A (p. 56) LCD Backlight Définition du délai après lequel le rétro-éclairage de l’afficheur se coupe en cas d’alimentation sur piles. Delete File Suppression d’un fichier Limiter Activation & désactivation du limiteur de niveau d’entrée * Le limiteur réduit le niveau d’entrée lorsqu’il atteint un seuil donné (niveau d’entrée excessif). Seuil de distorsion Seuil de limitation Niveau A/N 06 Réduit la distorsion et transmet le signal au convertisseur A/N Niveau d’entrée Ce seuil est de -9 dBFS. 07 110 Record Mode Définition du type de fichier créé à l’enregistrement Détermine la qualité audio du fichier enregistré. 11 12 13 14 Firmware Ver1.00 Permet de contrôler la version du système d’exploitation du R-1. About the R-1 Affichage de divers renseignements sur le R-1. A (p. 56) OFF, ON A (p. 56) STEREO, MONO A (p. 56) OFF, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 45 min, 60 min A (p. 56) – D (p. 62) – E (p. 64) – A (p. 56) Deutsch 10 OFF, ON Français 09 Marche à suivre Italiano 08 Track Splitting Activation et & désactivation de la fonction de division de fichier * Cette fonction divise automatiquement en deux fichiers tout enregistrement présentant un silence d’au moins trois secondes (lors de l’enregistrement). Input Monitor Activer cette fonction lorsque l’on désire contrôler au casque le signal en entrée avant enregistrement. Dans le cas contraire, la désactiver. * En cours d’enregistrement, l’écoute est possible que cette fonction soit activée ou non. Input Select Sélectionner STEREO si le microphone raccordé est stéréophonique. Sélectionner MONO si le microphone est monophonique. Si le paramètre sélectionné est STEREO alors que le signal est monophonique, l’enregistrement se fait uniquement sur le canal gauche (“L”). Si le paramètre MONO est sélectionné, l’enregistrement se fait sur les deux canaux (“L” & “R”) * Le fichier est stéréophonique même si le paramètre sélectionné est MONO. Sleep Timer Minuterie de veille - définit le délai au bout duquel le R-1 entre en mode veille (alimentation piles). * Cette fonction est inopérante si l’appareil est branché sur son adaptateur secteur. Format Card Formatage d’une carte CompactFlash Valeur (valeur par défaut en caractères gras) Español Menu/effet English Paramétrages divers 111 Controlli e connettori dell’R-1 fig.panel-1 1 2 14 3 4 5 15 6 7 8 16 9 10 11 12 1 13 Microfono interno È un microfono stereo integrato nell’R-1. Non è possibile utilizzare il microfono interno se sono collegati un microfono o altri dispositivi ai jack del microfono 18 o ai jack di ingresso di linea 19 . Se si desidera utilizzare il microfono interno, non effettuare alcun collegamento agli altri jack di ingresso. Quando si registra attraverso il microfono interno, impostare il tipo di microfono a DYN. 2 Display Vengono visualizzate varie informazioni sullo stato di funzionamento dell’R-1. 3 Pulsante EFFECT Premere il pulsante EFFECT per attivare/disattivare l’effetto. Questo pulsante si illumina di rosso quando l’effetto è attivo. Se viene attivato prima o durante la riproduzione, l'effetto è applicato al suono in riproduzione. Se viene attivato prima o durante la registrazione, l’effetto è applicato al suono immesso; in altre parole, viene registrato il suono elaborato dall’effetto. L’R-1 mette a disposizione svariati effetti grazie ai quali è possibile modificare il suono riprodotto o registrato, rendendo il suono più incisivo o l’ascolto più piacevole. È anche possibile trasformare il suono fino a dotarlo di un carattere completamente nuovo. 4 Pulsante EDIT Utilizzare questo pulsante per effettuare l’impostazione degli effetti. Per maggiori informazioni sugli effetti, fare riferimento alla sezione “Using effects” (p.46). È possibile effettuare l’impostazione degli effetti a prescindere dallo stato del pulsante EFFECT. 5 Pulsante MENU Questo pulsante seleziona il Setup mode, in cui è possibile eseguire varie impostazioni dell’R-1. È possibile regolare il contrasto LCD, specificare la qualità di registrazione ed effettuare varie altre impostazioni generiche dell’R-1. Per ulteriori informazioni, fare riferimento alla sezione “Impostazioni” (p.130). 112 Controlli e connettori dell’R-1 6 Pulsante DISPLAY 7 English Cambia il contenuto di ciò che viene visualizzato sul display dell’R-1. In PLAY mode, questo pulsante consente di passare dal tempo di riproduzione, al tempo di riproduzione rimanente della canzone (file) attuale, al tipo di canzone (file), al bit rate. Premere il pulsante DISPLAY per cambiare il contenuto del display. Pulsante PREV 8 Deutsch Utilizzare questo pulsante per passare all’inizio della canzone oppure per selezionare la canzone precedente. Se si preme questo pulsante a metà di una canzone, si passa all’inizio di quella canzone. Se si è già all’inizio (00:00) della canzone e si preme questo pulsante, si passa alla canzone precedente. È possibile premere questo pulsante e tenerlo premuto per il riavvolgimento rapido. Queste operazioni sono disponibili durante la riproduzione o in fase inattiva. Pulsante NEXT Utilizzare questo pulsante per selezionare la canzone successiva. È possibile premere questo pulsante e tenerlo premuto per l’avanzamento veloce. Queste operazioni sono disponibili durante la riproduzione o in fase inattiva. Pulsante REPEAT Français 9 Questo pulsante consente di effettuare la riproduzione ripetuta della parte di una canzone fra due punti (A – B) prestabiliti. Premere questo pulsante una volta per determinare il punto “A” e premerlo nuovamente per indicare il punto “B”. Per annullare la riproduzione ripetuta, premere di nuovo il pulsante REPEAT. Quando si annulla la riproduzione ripetuta, i punti A e B vengono eliminati. fig.repeat-a 1. Durante la riproduzione, premere una volta il Song A Italiano pulsante REPEAT. Quel punto sarà l’inizio (punto A) della riproduzione ripetuta. fig.repeat-b 2. Premere il pulsante REPEAT ancora una volta. A B A B Song Español Quel punto sarà la fine (punto B) della riproduzione ripetuta. fig.repeat-ab La riproduzione dell’intervallo specificato nei passi 1 e 2 avrà luogo ripetutamente. Per annullare la riproduzione ripetuta, premere ancora una volta il pulsante REPEAT. 10 Song Pulsante SPEED Questo pulsante dimezza la velocità di riproduzione. Premerlo nuovamente per tornare alla velocità normale. Questo pulsante è utile quando si suona con una musica ad un tempo troppo veloce oppure quando si ascolta un discorso pronunciato rapidamente. 113 Controlli e connettori dell’R-1 fig.panel-2 1 17 2 18 19 14 3 20 4 5 15 6 7 8 21 9 10 11 12 11 16 13 Pulsante STOP Questo pulsante arresta la riproduzione o la registrazione. 12 Pulsante PLAY/PAUSE Questo pulsante avvia la riproduzione. Mette anche in pausa la registrazione o la riproduzione. Se si preme questo pulsante durante la riproduzione, la riproduzione viene messa in pausa e il display dell’R-1 indica PLAY-PAUSE. Premere di nuovo il pulsante PLAY/ PAUSE per riprendere la riproduzione. Allo stesso modo, se si preme questo pulsante durante la registrazione, la registrazione viene messa in pausa. Il display dell’R-1 indica REC-PAUSE e il pulsante REC lampeggia con una luce rossa. Per riprendere la registrazione dalla condizione di Rec Standby, premere di nuovo il pulsante REC (o premere il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE). Il pulsate REC si illumina di rosso durante la registrazione. 13 Pulsante REC In fase inattiva, premere il pulsante REC porta l’R-1 in modo standby di registrazione. Il display dell’R-1 indica REC STANDBY e il pulsante REC lampeggia con una luce rossa. Per avviare la registrazione dal modo standby di registrazione, premere di nuovo il pulsante REC (o premere il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE). Il pulsate REC si illumina di rosso durante la registrazione. 14 Potenziometro VALUE Utilizzare questo potenziometro per selezionare le canzoni, per specificare i tipi e i valori degli effetti e per selezionare le voci in Setup mode. 15 Pulsante EXIT Utilizzare questo pulsante per tornare alla voce precedente in Effect edit o Setup mode. In Setup mode, le modifiche ai valori vengono annullate se si preme il pulsante EXIT prima di premere il pulsante ENTER. 16 Pulsante ENTER Utilizzare questo pulsante per selezionare una voce o per completare una modifica in Effect Edit o in Setup mode. 114 Controlli e connettori dell’R-1 17 Jack di ingresso del microfono È possibile collegarvi un microfono. Se al jack di ingresso di linea è collegato un cavo, il segnale audio non viene acquisito attraverso il jack di ingresso del microfono. Jack di ingresso di linea Deutsch 18 English Impostare l’interruttore di selezione Mic Type 19 nella posizione appropriata in base al microfono collegato, che può essere un microfono dinamico oppure un microfono a condensatore in miniatura plug-in alimentato. I microfoni stereo sono supportati; utilizzare un cavo stereo tipo mini per eseguire i collegamenti. Se si utilizza un microfono monofonico, impostare “10 Input Select” in Setup mode su MONO. Per maggiori informazioni su questa impostazione, fare riferimento alla sezione “Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode)” (p.130). Se si desidera immettere nell’R-1 un segnale audio da un dispositivo audio o da uno strumento musicale elettronico, utilizzare un cavo stereo mini plug per il collegamento a questo jack. 19 Interruttore di selezione Mic Type Impostare questo interruttore nella posizione appropriata in base al tipo di microfono collegato al jack di ingresso del microfono 17 . CND 20 Utilizzare questa impostazione se si collega un microfono dinamico. Se si utilizza il microfono interno, impostarlo a DYN. Utilizzare questa impostazione se si collega un microfono a condensatore in miniatura che richiede alimentazione elettrica. È necessario utilizzare un microfono “plug-in alimentato”. Questo jack fornisce una tensione di 2 V. * Se questo interruttore è impostato su CND, non collegare alcun microfono o altro dispositivo diverso da un microfono "plug-in alimentato". Qualsiasi microfono o dispositivo di altro tipo potrebbe risultare danneggiato. Français DYN Volume di ingresso Connettore USB È possibile utilizzare il cavo USB incluso per collegare questo connettore al computer. Se l’R-1 è collegato al computer, i file delle canzoni registrati possono essere trasferiti o copiati sul computer. È anche possibile trasferire o copiare file MP3 o WAV dal computer all’R-1, in modo da poterli riprodurre sull’R-1. Questo connettore supporta l’USB 2.0 (USB ad alta velocità), che consente il trasferimento veloce dei file. Se si desidera collegare l’R-1 al computer, fare riferimento alla sezione “Connecting the R-1 to your computer” (p.44). Quando il computer ha riconosciuto correttamente l’R-1, il display dell’R-1 indica Connected via USB. Español 21 Italiano Regola il volume di ingresso del suono proveniente dai microfoni integrati 1 , dai jack di ingresso del microfono 17 o dal jack di ingresso di linea 18 . Utilizzare la procedura descritta nella sezione “Regolazione del livello di ingresso” (p.120) per regolarlo mentre si controlla il livello di ingresso. Quando l’R-1 è collegato ad un computer, tutte le funzioni dell’R-1 (diverse dall’interruttore di alimentazione) sono disabilitate; l’azionamento dei pulsanti e degli interruttori non produce alcun effetto. 115 Controlli e connettori dell’R-1 fig.panel-3 1 22 23 22 24 25 26 27 28 Interruttore di alimentazione Accende/spegne l’apparecchio. Non spegnere l’apparecchio durante la riproduzione o la registrazione. È necessario assicurarsi che la riproduzione o la registrazione siano terminate prima di spegnere l’apparecchio. • Se l’apparecchio viene spento accidentalmente durante la registrazione, i dati in registrazione non vengono salvati sulla scheda CompactFlash. • La scheda CompactFlash potrebbe risultare danneggiata se si spegne l’R-1 durante la lettura o la scrittura di dati, come in fase di riproduzione o registrazione. • Se si spegne l’R-1 mentre è visualizzata la scritta “Now working…” durante l’editing di un effetto o durante il salvataggio di un’impostazione modificata, l’R-1 diventa instabile e potrebbe non riavviarsi. Si raccomanda vivamente di non spegnere l'apparecchio quando sta eseguendo queste operazioni. 23 Jack dell’adattatore AC Collegare l’adattatore AC incluso a questa presa. 24 Interruttore HOLD Se si imposta l’interruttore HOLD in posizione ON, l'azionamento dei pulsanti dell’R1 non produce alcun effetto; è un modo utile per impedire che l’R-1 venga azionato accidentalmente. Tuttavia, anche quando l’interruttore HOLD è su ON, l’interruttore di selezione Mic Type 19 , il volume di ingresso 20 , l’interruttore di alimentazione 22 e il volume di uscita 25 sono azionabili. 25 Volume di uscita Regola il volume del segnale in uscita dal jack delle cuffie/di uscita di linea/di uscita digitale 26 . Tuttavia, il volume dell’uscita digitale non è regolabile. 26 Jack delle cuffie/di uscita di linea/di uscita digitale Questo jack trasmette il segnale audio dall’R-1 alle cuffie o ai diffusori esterni. Se si desidera trasmettere un segnale digitale, utilizzare un cavo digitale ottico tondo tipo mini. 27 Pulsante Eject Premere questo pulsante per fare uscire la scheda CompactFlash inserita nell’alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria 28 . 28 Alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria Inserire una scheda CompactFlash in questo alloggiamento. CompactFlash è l’unico tipo di scheda di memoria supportata dall’R-1. 116 Controlli e connettori dell’R-1 English fig.panel-4 Deutsch 29 30 29 Vano batterie Coperchio dell’alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria Italiano Questo coperchio impedisce la rimozione accidentale della scheda CompactFlash. Una volta aperto il coperchio, si possono vedere l’alloggiamento della scheda di memoria 28 e il pulsante eject 27 . Español 30 Français Se si desidera alimentare l’R-1 mediante batterie, inserire le batterie in questo vano. Se si utilizza l’R-1 con l’apposito adattatore AC, non è necessario inserire le batterie. È necessario spegnere l’R-1 prima di passare dal funzionamento con l’adattatore AC al funzionamento con le batterie oppure dal funzionamento con le batterie al funzionamento con l’adattatore AC. Consultare la sezione “Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (p.20) prima di utilizzare l’R-1. 117 Preparazione all’utilizzo dell’R-1 Formattazione di una scheda CompactFlash È possibile formattare una scheda CompactFlash prima di utilizzarla con l’R-1. È necessario utilizzare l’R-1 per formattare la scheda CompactFlash. Seguire la procedura illustrata a pagina 60 di “Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode)” Le schede CompactFlash formattate da un dispositivo diverso dall’R-1 potrebbero non funzionare correttamente con l’R-1. 1 Spegnere l’R-1. 2 Inserire la scheda CompactFlash nell’alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria dell’R-1. fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps 3 Accendere l’R-1. Se la scheda CompactFlash non contiene canzoni (file) che l’R-1 è in grado di riprodurre, il display visualizza la scritta No Song. Se la scheda contiene canzoni (file), compare la schermata della modalità di riproduzione. 4 Premere il pulsante MENU. * Se si desidera annullare la procedura, premere il pulsante EXIT. Si torna quindi alla schermata precedente. fig.format-disp.eps 5 Ruotare il potenziometro VALUE per selezionare 12 Format Card. 6 Premere il pulsante [ENTER]. fig.format.eps 7 Quando viene visualizzata la schermata riportata a sinistra, premere il pulsante ENTER. fig.sure.eps 8 Viene richiesta la conferma per la formattazione della scheda. Per formattare la scheda, premere il pulsante ENTER. * Se non si desidera formattare la scheda, premere il pulsante EXIT. Si torna quindi alla fase 5. Non rimuovere la scheda CompactFlash durante la formattazione. Questa operazione potrebbe danneggiare la scheda CompactFlash. fig.complete.eps La formattazione è completa quando viene visualizzata la scritta Completed! 9 118 Premere il pulsante MENU. Si torna quindi alla schermata principale (modalità di riproduzione). Metodi di registrazione di base La seguente tabella illustra la durata di registrazione approssimativa delle schede CompactFlash. Tempi di registrazione (approssimativi) English Tempi di registrazione su una scheda CompactFlash Unità: minuti Dimensioni CompactFlash WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps 64 MB 3 256 MB 512 MB 15 31 125 5 23 102 47 208 188 831 128 260 1,039 26 32 2 GB MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps 43 170 346 1,386 MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps 52 MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps MP3, 16 bit/96 kbps 65 86 205 256 416 520 1,663 2,079 341 693 2,772 MP3, 16 bit/64 kbps 130 512 1,040 4,158 Deutsch Tipo di file * Utilizzare l’R-1 per formattare la scheda CompactFlash. * Utilizzare l’adattatore AC incluso per registrare ininterrottamente per un periodo prolungato. * In presenza di più file, il tempo di registrazione complessivo sarà inferiore a quello riportato qui sopra. Français * I tempi di registrazione elencati qui sopra sono approssimativi. La durata di registrazione effettiva potrebbe essere leggermente differente rispetto a quella riportata qui. Si consiglia quindi di includere un margine di sicurezza nei programmi di registrazione. Registrazione mediante il microfono interno Il microfono interno dell’R-1 è stereofonico. I suoni che arrivano al microfono sul lato destro dell'R-1 sono registrati sul canale destro (R), mentre i suoni captati dal microfono di sinistra sono registrati sul canale sinistro (L). L Italiano fig.mic-LR.eps R 1 Español Se si desidera utilizzare il microfono interno, non effettuare alcun collegamento al jack di ingresso del microfono o al jack di ingresso di linea. Se si collega un microfono o un cavo al jack di ingresso del microfono o al jack di ingresso di linea, questi ingressi hanno la priorità e il microfono interno non viene utilizzato. Assicurarsi che l’R-1 sia spento. Impostare anche il volume di ingresso al minimo. Se si desidera ascoltare (monitorare) il suono durante la registrazione dal microfono interno, collegare delle cuffie al jack delle cuffie per il monitoraggio. Se si collegano diffusori esterni al fine di utilizzarli per il monitoraggio, si verifica un ritorno acustico, quindi non eseguire il monitoraggio attraverso i diffusori. 119 Metodi di registrazione di base 2 3 4 5 Accendere l’R-1 come descritto nella sezione “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (p.19). Se si registra con il microfono interno, impostare il tipo di microfono a DYN. Consultare la sezione “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p.28) e specificare il tipo di file da registrare. Per effettuare la selezione o per verificare la selezione attuale, utilizzare 07 Record Mode (p. 130) in Setup mode. Regolare il livello di ingresso come segue. Regolazione del livello di ingresso fig.rec-1.eps 1. Premere il pulsante REC. L’R-1 entra in modo standby di registrazione. Il display visualizza la durata di registrazione rimanente dell’R-1 per il tipo di file (qualità di registrazione) selezionato. Tempo di registrazione rimanente * Il nome della canzone visualizzato in Record Standby mode è il nome del file che viene creato quando termina la registrazione. fig.rec-2.eps 2. Premere il pulsante DISPLAY. 3. Riprodurre (o eseguire) i suoni da registrare e posizionare il microfono interno dell’R-1 dove può captarli. * Se si desidera applicare un effetto ai suoni durante la registrazione, regolare il livello di ingresso mentre l’effetto è attivo (ovvero applicato). fig.rec-3.eps 4. Durante la riproduzione dei suoni, aumentare gradualmente il volume di ingresso. Regolare il livello in modo che gli indicatori del livello di ingresso B A ■ visualizzati sul display non raggiungano il ■ più a destra. (Posizione A nell’illustrazione sopra) Se il livello di registrazione è troppo basso, non è possibile registrare i suoni molto bassi. Se il livello di registrazione è troppo alto, i suoni forti risultano distorti e provocano crepitio nel suono registrato. * Se il materiale che si registra contiene a volte suoni forti improvvisi, come l’attacco di una batteria nell’esecuzione di un gruppo musicale o una risata improvvisa durante una conversazione tranquilla, si raccomanda di utilizzare il Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 130). Nel fare questo, regolare il livello di ingresso in modo opportuno per il tipo principale di suono che si sta registrando, non per i suoni forti improvvisi che si verificano occasionalmente. Quando si usa il limitatore, il livello di ingresso viene regolato automaticamente così che il livello di ingresso audio non diventi eccessivamente elevato. Quando si utilizza il limitatore, si dovrebbe regolare il livello di ingresso in modo che il simbolo ■ alla posizione B nell’illustrazione appaia soltanto occasionalmente. 120 Metodi di registrazione di base fig.rec-time.eps 6 Premere il pulsante REC. * È anche possibile avviare la registrazione premendo il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE. Tempo trascorso dall’inizio della registrazione 7 Deutsch Se si sposta il controllo del volume di ingresso in Record Standby mode oppure durante la registrazione, il livello di ingresso viene modificato. Fare attenzione a non azionare inavvertitamente il controllo del volume di ingresso. Anche se l’interruttore HOLD è impostato su ON, la funzione HOLD non incide sul volume di ingresso. English Viene avviata la registrazione. Al termine della registrazione, premere il pulsante STOP. Se si desidera mettere in pausa la registrazione, premere il pulsante PLAY/ PAUSE. Se si desidera terminare la pausa e riprendere la registrazione, premere di nuovo il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE. Français I dati registrati vengono salvati in un file sulla scheda CompactFlash. Il display visualizza il nome del file dei dati registrati; quel file è selezionato. * Il nome del file viene creato automaticamente nel seguente formato: R1_0001.MP3. La parte 0001 è il numero che segue il file con il numero più elevato esistente nella scheda CompactFlash. * Il file è creato a livello di root della scheda CompactFlash. Non vengono create cartelle (directory). Per ascoltare i dati appena registrati, premere il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE. Per gli altri metodi di riproduzione, fare riferimento alla sezione “Metodi di riproduzione” (p.125). Come il controllo del livello di ingresso indica il livello del signale Numero di ■’s Nessuno 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ∞ -50,0 dB –– –– -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 –– –– –– –– –– –– -50,0 -40,0 Numero di ■’s 8 9 -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 -21,0 10 11 12 13 14 15 -21,0 -18,0 dB –– –– -18,0 -15,0 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 –– –– –– –– –– –– -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 (Clip) Español 8 Italiano * Dal momento che l’R-1 non dispone di un orologio interno, tutti i file hanno la stessa data di creazione: 1 gennaio 2002. 121 Metodi di registrazione di base Registrazione mediante un microfono esterno L’R-1 può utilizzare microfoni dinamici e microfoni a condensatore in miniatura plugin alimentati progettati per essere collegati al jack di registrazione di un registratore MD (Mini Disc) o ai jack del microfono di un computer. Se si utilizza un microfono a condensatore, è necessario utilizzarne uno plugin alimentato. Se si collega un tipo di microfono sbagliato o un comune microfono stereo mini plug, l’apparecchio potrebbe risultare danneggiato. fig.conmic-LR.eps L R MIC Microfono stereo MIC TYPE INPUT LEVEL 1 Assicurarsi che l’R-1 sia spento. Impostare il volume di ingresso al minimo. Se qualcosa è collegato al jack di ingresso di linea, il segnale in ingresso dal jack di ingresso del microfono viene ignorato. Se si desidera registrare attraverso il jack di ingresso del microfono, non effettuare alcun collegamento al jack di ingresso di linea. 2 3 4 122 Accendere l’R-1 come descritto nella sezione “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (p.19). Specificare il tipo di file da registrare, come descritto nella sezione “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p.28). È possibile utilizzare 07 Record Mode (p. 130) in Setup mode per specificare l’impostazione desiderata oppure per verificare l’impostazione attuale. Impostare l’interruttore di selezione Mic Type in base al tipo di microfono collegato al jack di ingresso del microfono. -> “Interruttore di selezione Mic Type” (p.115) Metodi di registrazione di base 5 Collegare il microfono esterno al jack di ingresso del microfono. 6 English Se si desidera ascoltare (monitorare) il suono durante la registrazione, collegare delle cuffie al jack delle cuffie per il monitoraggio. Se si collegano diffusori esterni al fine di utilizzarli per il monitoraggio, si verifica un ritorno acustico, quindi non eseguire il monitoraggio attraverso i diffusori. Regolare il livello di ingresso come segue. Regolazione del livello di ingresso fig.rec-1.eps L’R-1 entra in modo standby di registrazione. Il display visualizza la durata di registrazione rimanente dell’R-1 per il tipo di file (qualità di registrazione) selezionato. Tempo di registrazione rimanente fig.rec-2.eps Français * Il nome della canzone visualizzato in Record Standby mode è il nome del file che viene creato quando termina la registrazione. Deutsch 1. Premere il pulsante REC. 2. Premere il pulsante DISPLAY. 3. Riprodurre (o eseguire) i suoni da registrare e posizionare il microfono esterno dove può captarli. 4. Aumentare gradualmente il volume di ingresso. Regolare il livello in modo che gli indicatori del livello di ingresso B A ■ visualizzati sul display non raggiungano il ■ più a destra. (Posizione A nell’illustrazione sopra) Se il livello di registrazione è troppo basso, non è possibile registrare i suoni molto bassi. Se il livello di registrazione è troppo alto, i suoni forti risultano distorti e provocano crepitio nel suono registrato. * Se il materiale che si registra contiene a volte suoni forti improvvisi, come l’attacco di una batteria nell’esecuzione di un gruppo musicale o una risata improvvisa durante una conversazione tranquilla, si raccomanda di utilizzare il Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 130). Nel fare questo, regolare il livello di ingresso in modo opportuno per il tipo principale di suono che si sta registrando, non per i suoni forti improvvisi che si verificano occasionalmente. Quando si usa il limitatore, il livello di ingresso viene regolato automaticamente così che il livello di ingresso audio non diventi eccessivamente elevato. Quando si utilizza il limitatore, si dovrebbe regolare il livello di ingresso in modo che il simbolo ■ alla posizione B nell’illustrazione appaia soltanto occasionalmente. 123 Español fig.rec-3.eps Italiano * Se si desidera applicare un effetto ai suoni durante la registrazione, regolare il livello di ingresso mentre l’effetto è attivo (ovvero applicato). Metodi di registrazione di base fig.rec-time.eps 7 Premere il pulsante REC. Viene avviata la registrazione. * È anche possibile avviare la registrazione premendo il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE. Tempo trascorso dall’inizio della registrazione Se si sposta il controllo del volume di ingresso in Record Standby mode oppure durante la registrazione, il livello di ingresso viene modificato. Fare attenzione a non azionare inavvertitamente il controllo del volume di ingresso. Anche se l’interruttore HOLD è impostato su ON, la funzione HOLD non incide sul volume di ingresso. 8 Al termine della registrazione, premere il pulsante STOP. Se si desidera mettere in pausa la registrazione, premere il pulsante PLAY/ PAUSE. Se si desidera terminare la pausa e riprendere la registrazione, premere di nuovo il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE. I dati registrati vengono salvati in un file sulla scheda CompactFlash. Il display visualizza il nome del file dei dati registrati; quel file è selezionato. * Il nome del file viene creato automaticamente nel seguente formato: R1_0001.MP3. La parte 0001 è il numero che segue il file con il numero più elevato esistente nella scheda CompactFlash. * Il file è creato a livello di root della scheda CompactFlash. Non vengono create cartelle (directory). 9 Per ascoltare i dati appena registrati, premere il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE. Per gli altri metodi di riproduzione, fare riferimento alla sezione “Metodi di riproduzione” (p.125). Come il controllo del livello di ingresso indica il livello del signale Numero di ■’s Nessuno 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 124 ∞ -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 dB –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 -21,0 Numero di ■’s 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 -21,0 -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 dB –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 (Clip) Metodi di riproduzione English Riproduzione normale 1 Deutsch L'R-1 non dispone di diffusori interni. Per ascoltare la riproduzione, è necessario munirsi di cuffie o diffusori. È possibile utilizzare il jack delle cuffie dell’R-1 come uscita digitale (uscita optical) per il collegamento ad un dispositivo audio digitale o come uscita di linea per il collegamento ad un dispositivo audio analogico. Prima di proseguire, eseguire i collegamenti mediante il tipo di cavo adatto al dispositivo. Fare riferimento a “Connecting headphones” (p.22), “Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)” (p.23) o “Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)” (p.24). Mentre il display visualizza una schermata come quella nell’illustrazione, ruotare il potenziometro VALUE per selezionare una canzone (file). Premere il pulsante PREV per passare alla canzone (file) precedente oppure il pulsante NEXT per passare alla canzone (file) successiva. ); viene avviata la riproduzione della Ruotare gradualmente il controllo del volume di uscita verso destra per regolare il volume ad un livello di ascolto soddisfacente. * Il nome della canzone visualizzato sul display è il nome del file. Non corrisponde al ID3 tag all’interno del file MP3. Italiano 3 Premere il pulsante PLAY dell’R-1 ( canzone (file) visualizzata sul display. * I nomi delle canzoni sono visualizzati in ordine alfabetico in base al seguente elenco di caratteri; non sono visualizzati nell’ordine cronologico di registrazione. (spazio) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz * Se la scheda CompactFlash contiene subdirectory (cartelle), tutti i file a livello di root sono visualizzati per primi, seguiti dai file nelle subdirectory (cartelle). Español 2 Français * Se il display indica No Song, la scheda CompactFlash non contiene alcun file che l’R-1 sia in grado di riprodurre. * I nomi dei file che iniziano per "." vengono ignorati e non sono visualizzati. * I file con estensioni diverse da .mp3 e .wav vengono ignorati e non sono visualizzati. Per maggiori informazioni sui file che l'R-1 è in grado di registrare e riprodurre, fare riferimento alla sezione “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p.28). 125 Metodi di riproduzione REPEAT A-B (Riproduzione ripetuta) Questa funzione consente di specificare una parte della canzone durante la riproduzione, in modo da riprodurla ripetutamente. Procedura 1 Durante la riproduzione, premere una volta il pulsante REPEAT ( ). Quella posizione viene fissata come inizio della ripetizione (punto A). 2 Song A Premere il pulsante REPEAT ancora una volta. Quella posizione viene fissata come termine della ripetizione (punto B). fig.repeat-a A B A B Song La parte specificata nelle fasi 1 e 2 (la parte tra i punti A e B) viene riprodotta ripetutamente. Per annullare la riproduzione ripetuta, premere di nuovo il pulsante REPEAT. Song Note * Se dopo avere specificato un punto A, si preme il pulsante STOP prima di specificare il punto B, l’impostazione del punto A viene annullata. * Se dopo avere specificato il punto A, si fa proseguire la riproduzione fino alla fine della canzone, la riproduzione viene ripetuta dal punto A alla fine della canzone. * Se si preme il pulsante STOP durante la riproduzione ripetuta, la riproduzione si arresta e le impostazioni della parte ripetuta (A-B) vengono annullate. Per annullare questa funzione • • • 126 Dopo avere specificato i punti A e B, premere il pulsante REPEAT ( ) per annullare l’impostazione dei punti A e B. Se dopo avere specificato un punto A si preme il pulsante STOP prima di specificare il punto B, l’impostazione del punto A viene annullata. Se si desidera arrestare la riproduzione e annullare le impostazioni di ripetizione, premere il pulsante STOP. La riproduzione si arresta e le impostazioni di riproduzione ripetuta (punti A e B) vengono annullate. Metodi di riproduzione 1/2 PLAY (Riproduzione a velocità dimezzata) English Di seguito sono riportate le istruzioni per effettuare la riproduzione a metà della velocità normale. Procedura 1 In fase inattiva o di riproduzione, premere il pulsante SPEED. Deutsch La riga più bassa del display visualizza la scritta 1/2 e la riproduzione viene eseguita a velocità dimezzata. Se l’R-1 è in fase di riproduzione, la riproduzione rallenta. Se l’R-1 è in fase inattiva, alla pressione del pulsante PLAY viene avviata la riproduzione a velocità dimezzata. * Questa funzione regola il tono della riproduzione a velocità dimezzata, in modo che rimanga lo stesso del tono normale. Ciò potrebbe causare un effetto tremolante nella riproduzione; non si tratta di un malfunzionamento. Français Per annullare questa funzione Se la riproduzione a velocità dimezzata è attiva, premere il pulsante SPEED per annullarla. Español Italiano Se la riproduzione a velocità dimezzata non viene annullata, anche la canzone successiva viene riprodotta a velocità dimezzata. 127 Metodi di riproduzione PLAY MODE (Modalità riproduzione) Di seguito sono riportate le istruzioni su come determinare l'ordine e il metodo di riproduzione. 1 Premere il pulsante MENU. Non è possibile cambiare la modalità di riproduzione durante la riproduzione dell’R-1. Come prima cosa è necessario premere il pulsante STOP per arrestare la riproduzione. 2 3 4 Utilizzare il potenziometro VALUE per selezionare 05 Play Mode. Premere il pulsante [ENTER]. Utilizzare il potenziometro VALUE per selezionare la modalità di riproduzione desiderata. Sequential Single Shuffle Le canzoni sono riprodotte nell’ordine 001, 002, 003…009 * Utilizzare i pulsanti PREV e NEXT oppure il potenziometro VALUE per selezionare un file (canzone). Viene riprodotto ripetutamente solamente il file (canzone) selezionato. L’ordine di riproduzione delle canzoni cambia automaticamente. * Le canzoni riprodotte in precedenza non vengono riprodotte. * Se si utilizzano i pulsanti PREV / NEXT oppure il potenziometro VALUE per selezionare un file (canzone), i nomi dei file (canzoni) sono visualizzati nello stesso ordine di quando viene selezionata la modalità di riproduzione Sequential. fig.sequential.eps 5 6 Dopo aver selezionato la modalità di riproduzione desiderata, premere il pulsante ENTER. Premere il pulsante MENU. Si torna quindi alla modalità di riproduzione. 128 Utilizzo degli effetti English Applicazione di un effetto Questa sezione descrive come applicare un effetto durante la riproduzione oppure durante il modo standby di registrazione. È anche possibile effettuare l’impostazione dell’effetto prima di iniziare la riproduzione oppure provare varie impostazioni dell’effetto durante una registrazione di prova. fig.effect.eps Durante la riproduzione In standby di registrazione Deutsch Effect mode ON 3 1 2 Edit mode EDIT EXIT ENTER Français Scegliere un effetto 01:Eazy EQ -> 02:For Speech... EXIT ENTER Selezionare un parametro Type -> Level1 Italiano EDIT EXIT ENTER Español Modificare il parametro Pop -> Dance -> HipHop... EXIT Uscire da Effect Edit mode Avviare la riproduzione /registrazione Le impostazioni dei parametri dell'effetto eseguite sono effettive fino alla modifica successiva. 129 Impostazioni Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode) Per ulteriori informazioni su queste impostazioni, consultare la sezione “Procedures” (p.56). * Durante la riproduzione o lo standby di registrazione, non è possibile entrare in Setup mode premendo il pulsante MENU. Menu/Effetto Valore (valore predefinito in neretto) Procedura LCD Contrast Regola il contrasto del display. 1–5–10 A (p. 56) OFF, ON, 5sec, 10sec, 20sec A (p. 56) –– B (p. 58) –– C (p. 60) Sequential, Single, Shuffle A (p. 56) OFF, ON A (p. 56) 07 Record Mode Specifica il tipo di file creato in fase di registrazione. Determina la qualità audio del file registrato. MP3 64kbps, MP3 96kbps, MP3 128kbps, MP3 160kbps, MP3 192kbps, MP3 256kbps, MP3 320kbps, WAV 16bit, WAV 24bit A (p. 56) 08 Track Splitting Attiva/disattiva la funzione Track splitting. * Questa funzione divide automaticamente il file quando c'è un intervallo di silenzio di tre secondi o più durante la registrazione. OFF, ON A (p. 56) 01 02 03 04 05 Rename File Modifica il nome di un file. Play Mode Specifica l’ordine di riproduzione delle canzoni. Limiter Attiva/disattiva il limiter del livello di ingresso. * Il limiter diminuisce il livello di ingresso in modo adeguato quando il livello di ingresso è eccessivo. Livello picchi distorti Livello soglia Ridurre la distorsione di clipping e passare al convertitore AD Livello AD 06 LCD Backlight Specifica l’intervallo trascorso il quale la retroilluminazione del display si spegne in modalità batterie. Delete File Cancella un file. Livello del segnale in ingresso Il livello soglia è -9 dBFS. 130 11 12 A (p. 56) STEREO, MONO A (p. 56) OFF, 1min, 2min, 3min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 45min, 60min A (p. 56) – D (p. 62) 13 Firmware Ver1.00 Consente di verificare la versione del software dell’R-1. – E (p. 64) 14 About the R-1 Visualizza informazioni sull’R-1. – A (p. 56) Deutsch OFF, ON Français 10 Procedura Italiano 09 Input Monitor Attivare questa funzione se si desidera monitorare il segnale in ingresso mediante le cuffie. Disattivarla se non si desidera monitorare il segnale. * Durante la registrazione, il suono è udibile indipendentemente dallo stato di questa funzione. Selezione ingresso Impostare questa funzione su STEREO se si collega un microfono stereo. Impostare questa funzione su MONO se si collega un microfono monofonico. Se si utilizza l’impostazione STEREO con un segnale monofonico, viene registrato solamente il canale L (sinistro). Se è impostata su MONO, il suono viene registrato da entrambi i canali L e R. * Il file registrato sarà stereo anche se questa funzione è impostata su MONO. Sleep Timer Specifica l’intervallo trascorso il quale l’R-1 entra in Sleep mode in modalità batterie. * Questa impostazione non produce alcun effetto se si utilizza l’adattatore AC. Format Card Formatta una scheda CompactFlash. Valore (valore predefinito in neretto) Español Menu/Effetto English Impostazioni 131 Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1 fig.panel-1 1 2 14 3 4 5 15 6 7 8 16 9 10 11 12 1 13 Micrófono interno Se trata de un micrófono estéreo incorporado en la unidad R-1. El usuario no puede utilizar el micrófono interno si un micrófono u otro dispositivo está conectado a los jacks de entrada de micrófono 18 o a los jacks de entrada de línea 19 . Si desea utilizar el micrófono interno, no conecte ningún dispositivo a los otros jacks de entrada. Al grabar mediante el micrófono interno, ajuste el interruptor selector de tipo de micrófono a DYN. 2 Pantalla En la pantalla se muestra la información relativa al estado de funcionamiento de la unidad R-1. 3 Botón EFFECT (EFECTO) Pulse el botón EFFECT (EFECTO) para activar y desactivar la función de efecto. Cuando la función de efecto esté activa, este botón se encenderá en rojo. Si activa esta función antes o durante la reproducción, el efecto se aplicará al sonido reproducido en ese momento. Si activa esta función antes o durante la grabación, el efecto se aplicará al sonido que entra en la unidad en ese momento, es decir, que se grabará el sonido procesado con el efecto. La unidad R-1 ofrece varios efectos que permiten al usuario modificar el sonido reproducido o grabado, para que el sonido sea más impactante o la escucha más cómoda. También puede transformar el sonido para que sea totalmente diferente. 4 Botón EDIT (EDITAR) Utilice este botón para definir los parámetros del efecto. Para obtener información sobre los efectos, consulte “Using effects” (pág. 46). Puede establecer los parámetros del efecto independientemente de si el botón EFFECT (EFECTO) está activado o desactivado. 5 Botón MENU (MENÚ) Este botón activa el modo Setup (Configuración), en el que puede definir diversos parámetros de la unidad R-1. En este modo puede ajustar el contraste de la pantalla de cristal líquido (LCD), especificar la calidad de grabación y definir diversos parámetros generales de la unidad R-1. Si desea obtener información detallada, consulte “Algunos parámetros” (pág. 150). 132 Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1 6 Botón DISPLAY (PANTALLA) 7 English Con este botón se cambia el contenido de la pantalla de la unidad R-1. En el modo PLAY (REPRODUCCIÓN), pulse este botón repetidas veces para mostrar sucesivamente el tiempo de reproducción, el tiempo de reproducción restante de la canción (archivo), el tipo de canción (archivo) y la velocidad de bits. Pulse el botón DISPLAY (PANTALLA) para cambiar el contenido de la pantalla. Botón PREV (ANT) 8 Deutsch Utilice este botón para desplazarse hasta el inicio de la canción o para seleccionar la canción anterior. Si pulsa este botón durante la reproducción de una canción, se desplazará hasta el inicio de esa canción. Si ya se encuentra al principio (00:00) de la canción y pulsa este botón, se desplazará hasta el inicio de la canción anterior. Para retroceder, pulse y mantenga pulsado este botón. Estas acciones están disponibles durante la reproducción y cuando ésta está detenida. Botón NEXT (SIG) Utilice este botón para seleccionar la canción siguiente. Para avanzar, pulse y mantenga pulsado este botón. Estas acciones están disponibles durante la reproducción y cuando ésta está detenida. 9 Botón REPEAT (REPETIR) Français Este botón permite al usuario reproducir repetidamente el fragmento de la canción comprendido entre dos puntos (A - B) especificados por el usuario. Pulse este botón una vez para marcar el punto A; a continuación, púlselo de nuevo para marcar el punto B. Para cancelar la repetición de la reproducción, pulse de nuevo el botón REPEAT (REPETIR). Si cancela la repetición de la reproducción, los puntos A y B marcados también se cancelarán. fig.repeat-a 1. Durante la reproducción, pulse el botón REPEAT Song A Italiano (REPETIR) una vez. Ese punto constituirá el principio (punto A) del fragmento de la reproducción repetida. fig.repeat-b 2. Pulse de nuevo el botón REPEAT (REPETIR). Ese B A B Español punto constituirá el final (punto B) del fragmento de la reproducción repetida. A Song fig.repeat-ab Se repetirá la reproducción del fragmento especificado en los pasos 1 y 2. Para cancelar la repetición de la reproducción, pulse de nuevo el botón REPEAT (REPETIR). 10 Song Botón SPEED (VELOCIDAD) Este botón ralentiza la reproducción (a la mitad de la velocidad). Púlselo de nuevo para recuperar la velocidad normal. Esta función resulta útil si acompaña la música con un instrumento y el tempo es demasiado rápido, o si escucha un discurso pronunciado demasiado rápido. 133 Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1 fig.panel-2 1 17 2 18 19 14 3 20 4 5 15 6 7 8 21 9 10 11 12 11 16 13 Botón STOP (DETENER) Este botón detiene la reproducción o la grabación. 12 Botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA) Este botón inicia la reproducción. Además, sirve para interrumpir la grabación o la reproducción. Si utiliza este botón durante la reproducción, ésta se interrumpirá y la pantalla de la unidad R1 mostrará el mensaje PLAY-PAUSE (REPRODUCCIÓN-PAUSA). Pulse de nuevo el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA) para reanudar la reproducción. Del mismo modo, si pulsa este botón durante la grabación, ésta se interrumpirá. La pantalla de la unidad R-1 mostrará el mensaje REC-PAUSE (GRABACIÓN-PAUSA) y el botón REC (GRABAR) parpadeará en rojo. Para reanudar la grabación a partir del estado de grabación interrumpida, pulse de nuevo el botón REC (GRABAR), o pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). El botón REC (GRABAR) permanece encendido en rojo durante la grabación. 13 Botón REC (GRABAR) Si la unidad R-1 está detenida y pulsa el botón REC (GRABAR), la unidad entrará en el modo de grabación interrumpida. La pantalla de la unidad R-1 mostrará el mensaje REC STANDBY (GRABACIÓN INTERRUMPIDA) y el botón REC (GRABAR) parpadeará en rojo. Para iniciar la grabación a partir del estado de grabación interrumpida, pulse de nuevo el botón REC (GRABAR), o pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Durante la grabación, el botón REC (GRABAR) parpadeará en rojo. 14 Mando VALUE (VALOR) Utilice este mando para seleccionar canciones, especificar tipos y valores de efecto y seleccionar elementos del modo Setup (Configuración). 15 Botón EXIT (SALIR) Utilice este botón para regresar al elemento anterior en el modo Effect Edit (Edición de efecto) o Setup (Configuración). En el modo Setup (Configuración), los cambios realizados en los valores se cancelan si pulsa el botón EXIT (SALIR) antes de pulsar el botón ENTER (INTRO). 16 Botón ENTER (INTRO) Utilice este botón para seleccionar este elemento o aceptar un cambio realizado en el modo Effect Edit (Edición de efecto) o Setup (Configuración). 134 Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1 17 Jack de entrada de micrófono Permite la conexión de un micrófono. Si hay algún cable conectado al jack de entrada de línea, el sonido no saldrá a través del jack de entrada de micrófono. Jack de entrada de línea Deutsch 18 English Sitúe el interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono 19 en la posición adecuada, en función de si el micrófono conectado es un micrófono dinámico o un micrófono condensador miniatura con enchufe para la red eléctrica. Los micrófonos estéreos también son compatibles; para realizar la conexión, utilice un cable estéreo mini. Si utiliza un micrófono monoaural, defina el parámetro del modo Setup (Configuración) 10 Input Select (10 Selección de entrada) en MONO. Para obtener información sobre este parámetro, consulte “Configuración del sistema (modo Setup (Configuración))” (pág. 150). Si desea dirigir la señal de audio de un dispositivo de audio o de un instrumento musical electrónico a la unidad R-1, utilice un cable estéreo mini para conectar el dispositivo a este jack. 19 Interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono Sitúe este interruptor en la posición adecuada, en función del tipo de micrófono conectado al jack de entrada de micrófono 17 . CND 20 Sitúe el interruptor en esta posición si ha conectado un micrófono dinámico. Si usa el micrófono interno, ajústelo a DYN. Sitúe el interruptor en esta posición si ha conectado un micrófono condensador miniatura que requiere una fuente de alimentación. Debe utilizar un micrófono “con enchufe para la red eléctrica”. Este jack proporciona un voltaje de 2 V. * Si el interruptor se sitúa en la posición CND, no conecte ningún micrófono ni otro dispositivo que no sea un micrófono “con enchufe para la red eléctrica”. Si lo hace, pueden producirse daños en el micrófono o el dispositivo conectado. Français DYN (DIN) Volumen de entrada Conector USB Puede utilizar el cable USB proporcionado para conectar la unidad a su PC. Si la unidad R-1 está conectada al PC, podrá transferir o copiar en el PC los archivos de música que grabe. También puede transferir y copiar archivos MP3 y WAV del PC a la unidad R-1, para poder reproducir los archivos en la unidad R-1. Este conector es compatible con USB 2.0 (USB de alta velocidad), que permite la transferencia rápida de archivos. Si desea conectar la unidad R-1 al PC, consulte “Connecting the R-1 to your computer” (pág. 44). Una vez que el PC ha reconocido correctamente la unidad R-1, la pantalla de la unidad R-1 muestra el mensaje Connected via USB (Conectado a través de USB). Español 21 Italiano Ajusta el volumen de entrada del sonido de los micrófonos incorporados 1 , el jack de entrada de micrófono 17 o el jack de entrada de línea 18 . Utilice el procedimiento descrito en “Ajuste del nivel de entrada” (pág. 140) para ajustarlo mientras ve el nivel de entrada. Mientras la unidad R-1 permanece conectada a un PC, todas las funciones de la unidad R-1 (excepto el interruptor de alimentación) están desactivadas; por tanto, la manipulación de los botones e interruptores de la unidad no tendrá ningún efecto. 135 Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1 fig.panel-3 1 22 23 22 24 25 26 27 28 Interruptor de alimentación Este interruptor se utiliza para encender y apagar la unidad. No apague la unidad durante la reproducción ni la grabación. Antes de apagar la unidad, debe asegurarse de que la reproducción o la grabación se ha detenido. • Si, de forma accidental, apaga la unidad durante la grabación, los datos no se guardarán en la tarjeta CompactFlash. • Pueden producirse daños en la tarjeta CompactFlash si apaga la unidad R-1 mientras los datos se leen o escriben, por ejemplo, durante la reproducción y la grabación. • Si apaga la unidad R-1 mientras se muestra el mensaje “Now working...” (Funcionando...) durante la edición de efectos o mientras se guarda un parámetro modificado, la unidad R-1 será inestable y es posible que no pueda iniciarse. Tenga mucho cuidado de no apagar nunca la unidad mientras se encuentre en los estados descritos. 23 Jack del adaptador de CA Conecte el adaptador de CA proporcionado a este jack. 24 Interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEAR) Si sitúa el interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEAR) en la posición ON (ACTIVAR), las funciones de los botones de la unidad R-1 se desactivarán; esto resulta muy práctico para evitar el funcionamiento accidental de la unidad R-1. Sin embargo, incluso si el interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEAR) está en la posición ON (ACTIVAR), el interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono 19 , el volumen de entrada 20 , el interruptor de alimentación 22 y el volumen de salida 25 continúan estando operativos. 25 Volumen de salida Ajusta el volumen enviado desde el jack del auricular/salida de línea/salida digital 26 . Sin embargo, el volumen de la salida digital no puede ajustarse. 26 Jack del auricular/salida de línea/salida digital A través de este jack, sale el audio de la unidad R-1 hacia el auricular o los altavoces externos. Si desea que salga una señal digital, utilice un cable digital óptico redondo mini. 27 Botón de expulsión Pulse este botón para expulsar la tarjeta CompactFlash insertada en la ranura de la tarjeta de memoria 28 . 28 Ranura de la tarjeta de memoria Inserte una tarjeta CompactFlash en esta ranura. CompactFlash es el único tipo de tarjeta de memoria que puede utilizar en la unidad R1. 136 Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1 English fig.panel-4 Deutsch 29 30 29 Compartimento de las pilas Cubierta de la ranura de la tarjeta de memoria Italiano Esta cubierta impide que la tarjeta CompactFlash se extraiga de forma accidental. Cuando abra esta cubierta, verá la ranura de la tarjeta de memoria 28 y el botón de expulsión 27 . Español 30 Français Si desea utilizar la unidad R-1 con pilas, instálelas aquí. Si está utilizando la unidad R1 con el adaptador de CA, no es preciso que instale pilas. Antes de pasar del funcionamiento mediante el adaptador de CA al funcionamiento mediante pilas o viceversa, debe apagar la unidad R-1. Consulte “Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (pág. 20) antes de utilizar la unidad R-1. 137 Preparación para el uso de la unidad R-1 Formateado de una tarjeta CompactFlash Debe formatear la tarjeta CompactFlash antes de utilizarla con la unidad R-1. Es preciso utilizar la unidad R-1 para formatear la tarjeta CompactFlash. Siga el procedimiento descrito en la página 150 de “Configuración del sistema (modo Setup (Configuración))”. Es posible que las tarjetas CompactFlash formateadas con un dispositivo distinto a la unidad R1 no funcionen correctamente con la unidad R-1. 1 Apague la unidad R-1. 2 Inserte la tarjeta CompactFlash en la ranura de la tarjeta de memoria de la unidad R-1. fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps 3 Encienda la unidad R-1. Si la tarjeta CompactFlash no contiene ninguna canción (archivo) que la unidad R-1 pueda reproducir, la pantalla mostrará el mensaje No Song (Ninguna canción). Por el contrario, si la tarjeta contiene canciones (archivos), aparecerá la pantalla correspondiente al modo de reproducción. 4 Pulse el botón MENU (MENÚ). * Si decide cancelar el proceso, pulse el botón EXIT (SALIR). Esto le devolverá a la pantalla anterior. fig.format-disp.eps 5 Gire el mando VALUE (VALOR) para seleccionar 12 Format Card (12 Formatear tarjeta). 6 Pulse el botón ENTER (INTRO). fig.format.eps 7 Cuando aparezca esta pantalla, pulse el botón ENTER (INTRO). fig.sure.eps 8 La pantalla le solicitará que confirme si realmente desea formatear la tarjeta. Para formatear la tarjeta, pulse el botón ENTER (INTRO). * Si decide no formatear la tarjeta, pulse el botón EXIT (SALIR). Volverá al paso 5. No extraiga nunca la tarjeta CompactFlash mientras el formateado esté en curso. Si lo hace, pueden producirse daños en la tarjeta CompactFlash. fig.complete.eps El formateado se completa cuando aparece en la pantalla el mensaje Completed! (Finalizado). 9 138 Pulse el botón MENU (MENÚ). Esto le devolverá a la pantalla principal (modo reproducción). Métodos básicos de grabación En la tabla siguiente se indican los tiempos aproximados de grabación que permiten las tarjetas CompactFlash. Duración de la grabación (aproximada) WAV, 24 bits/44,1 kHz Unidades: minutos Tamaño de la tarjeta CompactFlash 64 MB 256 MB 512 MB 2 GB 3 15 23 31 47 125 188 102 208 831 WAV, 16 bits/44,1 kHz 5 MP3, 16 bits/320 kbps MP3, 16 bits/256 kbps 26 32 MP3, 16 bits/192 kbps 43 128 170 260 346 1,039 1,386 MP3, 16 bits/160 kbps 52 205 416 1,663 MP3, 16 bits/128 kbps MP3, 16 bits/96 kbps MP3, 16 bits/64 kbps 65 86 130 256 520 2,079 341 512 693 1,040 2,772 4,158 Deutsch Tipo de archivo English Duración de la grabación de una tarjeta CompactFlash * Utilice la unidad R-1 para formatear la tarjeta CompactFlash. * Si se dispone a grabar de forma continua durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, utilice el adaptador de CA proporcionado. * Si desea grabar varios archivos, el tiempo total de grabación real será inferior al indicado en la tabla. Français * Las duraciones de la grabación enumeradas son aproximadas. La duración real de la grabación puede variar ligeramente con respecto a la indicada en esta tabla; por este motivo, es conveniente incluir cierto margen en los planes de grabación. Grabación con el micrófono interno El micrófono interno de la unidad R-1 es estéreo. Los datos de audio que entran a través del micrófono situado en el lateral derecho de la unidad R-1 se graban en el canal derecho (R); por su parte, los datos de audio recogidos por el micrófono situado en el lateral izquierdo se graban en el canal izquierdo (L). L Italiano fig.mic-LR.eps R 1 Español Si desea utilizar el micrófono interno, no conecte ningún dispositivo al jack de entrada de micrófono ni al jack de entrada de línea. En caso de que haya un micrófono o un cable conectado al jack de entrada de micrófono o al jack de entrada de línea, estas entradas tendrán prioridad y el micrófono interno no se utilizará. Asegúrese de que la unidad R-1 está apagada. Asimismo, defina el volumen de entrada en la posición mínima. Si desea escuchar (controlar) el sonido a medida que se graba mediante el micrófono interno, conecte un par de auriculares al jack de auriculares y utilícelos para controlar la grabación. Si conecta altavoces externos con la intención de utilizarlos para controlar la grabación, se producirá retorno acústico; por este motivo, no trate de controlar la grabación mediante altavoces. 139 Métodos básicos de grabación 2 3 4 5 fig.rec-1.eps Encienda la unidad R-1 tal como se describe en “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (pág. 19). Si graba mediante el micrófono interno, ajuste el interruptor selector de tipo de micrófono a DYN. Consulte “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (pág. 28) y especifique el tipo de archivo que desea grabar. Para realizar la selección o para comprobar la selección actual, utilice el parámetro del modo Setup (Configuración) 07 Record Mode (07 Modo de grabación) (pág. 150). Ajuste el nivel de entrada del modo que se describe a continuación. Ajuste del nivel de entrada 1. Pulse el botón REC (GRABAR). La unidad R-1 entra en el modo de grabación interrumpida. La pantalla indica la cantidad de tiempo restante que la unidad RTiempo de grabación restante 1 puede grabar para el tipo de archivo (calidad de la grabación) seleccionado por el usuario. * El nombre de la canción que se muestra en el modo de grabación interrumpida es el nombre del archivo que se creará en primer lugar cuando finalice la grabación. fig.rec-2.eps 2. Pulse el botón DISPLAY (PANTALLA). 3. Emita (o realice) los sonidos que desea grabar y sitúe el micrófono interno de la unidad R-1 donde pueda recoger el sonido. * Si desea aplicar algún efecto al sonido a medida que lo graba, ajuste el nivel de entrada mientras se activa el efecto (es decir, mientras se aplica). fig.rec-3.eps 4. Mientras se emite el sonido, aumente gradualmente el volumen de entrada. Ajuste el nivel de manera que los indicadores del nivel de entrada B A ■ que aparecen en la pantalla no alcancen el extremo derecho ■. (Posición A en la ilustración de arriba) Si el nivel de grabación es demasiado bajo, no podrá grabar sonidos muy tenues. Si el nivel de la grabación es demasiado alto, los sonidos muy altos se distorsionarán, lo que provocará crujidos en el sonido grabado. * Si el material que se dispone a grabar contiene sonidos altos repentinos, como la entrada de un tambor en una interpretación orquestal o una risa inesperada durante una conversación calmada, es conveniente utilizar el limitador (06 Limiter (06 Limitador), pág. 150). Si lo utiliza, ajuste el nivel de entrada de la forma adecuada al tipo de sonido predominante en la grabación (no la adecuada al sonido alto repentino que aparece de forma ocasional). Al usar el limitador, el nivel de entrada se ajusta automáticamente de manera que el nivel de entrada de audio no sea excesivamente alto. Al usar el limitador, deberá ajustar el nivel de entrada de manera que el símbolo ■ en la posición B en la ilustración aparezca sólo ocasionalmente. 140 Métodos básicos de grabación fig.rec-time.eps 6 Pulse el botón REC (GRABAR). * Si lo prefiere, también puede iniciar la grabación pulsando el botón PLAY/ PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Tiempo transcurrido desde el inicio de la grabación 7 Deutsch Si mueve el control del volumen de entrada en el modo de grabación interrumpida o durante la grabación, el nivel de entrada cambiará. Tenga cuidado de no manipular el control del volumen de entrada sin darse cuenta. Incluso si el interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEO) está en la posición ON (ACTIVAR), el volumen de entrada no se ve afectado por la función HOLD (BLOQUEO). English Se iniciará la grabación. Una vez que haya terminado de grabar, pulse el botón STOP (DETENER). Si desea interrumpir la grabación, pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/ PAUSA). Si desea cancelar la pausa y reanudar la grabación, pulse de nuevo el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Français Los datos grabados se guardarán como un archivo en la tarjeta CompactFlash. La pantalla indicará el nombre del archivo que contiene los datos grabados, y el archivo se seleccionará. * El nombre de archivo se crea de forma automática, empleando el formato siguiente: R1_0001.MP3. La parte del nombre 0001 corresponde al número que sigue a la numeración de archivo más alta contenida en la tarjeta CompactFlash. * El archivo se crea en el nivel raíz de la tarjeta CompactFlash. No se crean carpetas (directorios). Para oír los datos que acaba de grabar, pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Si desea conocer otros métodos de reproducción, consulte “Métodos de reproducción” (pág. 145). Cómo el medidor de nivel de entrada indica el nivel de señal Número de ■'s Ninguno 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ∞ -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 dB –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 -21,0 Número de ■'s 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 -21,0 -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 dB –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– Español 8 Italiano * Puesto que la unidad R-1 no dispone de reloj interno, todos los archivos tendrán la misma fecha de creación (1 de enero de 2002). -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 (Clip) 141 Métodos básicos de grabación Grabación con un micrófono externo La unidad R-1 puede utilizar micrófonos dinámicos y los micrófonos condensadores miniatura con enchufe para la red eléctrica diseñados para conectarlos al jack de grabación de un grabador MD (Mini Disc) o al jack de entrada de micrófono de un PC. Si utiliza un micrófono condensador, debe utilizar uno con enchufe a la red eléctrica. Si conecta el tipo erróneo de micrófono o un micrófono mini estéreo convencional, pueden producirse daños en el equipo. fig.conmic-LR.eps L R MICRÓFONO Micrófono estéreo TIPO DE MICRÓFONO NIVEL DE ENTRADA 1 Asegúrese de que la unidad R-1 está apagada. Defina el volumen de entrada en la posición mínima. Si hay algún dispositivo conectado al jack de entrada de línea, la unidad omitirá la entrada a través del jack de entrada de micrófono. Si desea grabar a través del jack de entrada de micrófono, no conecte ningún dispositivo al jack de entrada de línea. 2 3 4 142 Encienda la unidad R-1 tal como se describe en “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (pág. 19). Especifique el tipo de archivo que desea grabar, tal como se describe en “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (pág. 28). Puede utilizar el parámetro del modo Setup (Configuración) 07 Record Mode (07 Modo de grabación) (pág. 150) para especificar el parámetro que desee o para comprobar el parámetro actual. Coloque el interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono en la posición correspondiente al tipo de micrófono que ha conectado al jack de entrada de micrófono. -> “Interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono” (pág. 135) 5 6 Conecte el micrófono externo al jack de entrada de micrófono. Si desea escuchar (controlar) el sonido a medida que se graba, conecte un par de auriculares al jack de auriculares y utilícelos para controlar la grabación. Si conecta altavoces externos con la intención de utilizarlos para controlar la grabación, se producirá retorno acústico; por este motivo, no trate de controlar la grabación mediante altavoces. Ajuste el nivel de entrada del modo que se describe a continuación. English Métodos básicos de grabación Ajuste del nivel de entrada fig.rec-1.eps La unidad R-1 entra en el modo de grabación interrumpida. La pantalla indica la cantidad de Tiempo de grabación restante tiempo restante que la unidad R1 puede grabar para el tipo de archivo (calidad de la grabación) seleccionado por el usuario. Deutsch 1. Pulse el botón REC (GRABAR). Français * El nombre de la canción que se muestra en el modo de grabación interrumpida es el nombre del archivo que se creará en primer lugar cuando finalice la grabación. fig.rec-2.eps 2. Pulse el botón DISPLAY (PANTALLA). 3. Emita (o realice) los sonidos que desea grabar y sitúe el micrófono externo donde pueda recoger el sonido. 4. Aumente de forma gradual el volumen de entrada. Ajuste el nivel de manera que los indicadores del nivel de entrada ■ que aparecen en la pantalla no B A alcancen el extremo derecho ■. (Posición A en la ilustración de arriba) Si el nivel de grabación es demasiado bajo, no podrá grabar sonidos muy tenues. Si el nivel de la grabación es demasiado alto, los sonidos muy altos se distorsionarán, lo que provocará crujidos en el sonido grabado. * Si el material que se dispone a grabar contiene sonidos altos repentinos, como la entrada de un tambor en una interpretación orquestal o una risa inesperada durante una conversación calmada, es conveniente utilizar el limitador (06 Limiter (06 Limitador), pág. 150). Si lo utiliza, ajuste el nivel de entrada de la forma adecuada al tipo de sonido predominante en la grabación (no la adecuada al sonido alto repentino que aparece de forma ocasional). Al usar el limitador, el nivel de entrada se ajusta automáticamente de manera que el nivel de entrada de audio no sea excesivamente alto. Al usar el limitador, deberá ajustar el nivel de entrada de manera que el símbolo ■ en la posición B en la ilustración aparezca sólo ocasionalmente. 143 Español fig.rec-3.eps Italiano * Si desea aplicar algún efecto al sonido a medida que lo graba, ajuste el nivel de entrada mientras se activa el efecto (es decir, mientras se aplica). Métodos básicos de grabación fig.rec-time.eps 7 Pulse el botón REC (GRABAR). Se iniciará la grabación. * Si lo prefiere, también puede iniciar la grabación pulsando el botón PLAY/ PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Tiempo transcurrido desde el inicio de la grabación Si mueve el control del volumen de entrada en el modo de grabación interrumpida o durante la grabación, el nivel de entrada cambiará. Tenga cuidado de no manipular el control del volumen de entrada sin darse cuenta. Incluso si el interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEO) está en la posición ON (ACTIVAR), el volumen de entrada no se ve afectado por la función HOLD (BLOQUEO). 8 Una vez que haya terminado de grabar, pulse el botón STOP (DETENER). Si desea interrumpir la grabación, pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/ PAUSA). Si desea cancelar la pausa y reanudar la grabación, pulse de nuevo el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Los datos grabados se guardarán como un archivo en la tarjeta CompactFlash. La pantalla indicará el nombre del archivo que contiene los datos grabados, y el archivo se seleccionará. * El nombre de archivo se crea de forma automática, empleando el formato siguiente: R1_0001.MP3. La parte del nombre 0001 corresponde al número que sigue a la numeración de archivo más alta contenida en la tarjeta CompactFlash. * El archivo se crea en el nivel raíz de la tarjeta CompactFlash. No se crean carpetas (directorios). 9 Para oír los datos que acaba de grabar, pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Si desea conocer otros métodos de reproducción, consulte “Métodos de reproducción” (pág. 145). Cómo el medidor de nivel de entrada indica el nivel de señal 144 Número de ■'s Ninguno 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ∞ -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 dB –– –– –– –– -33,0 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 –– –– –– –– -50,0 -40,0 -36,0 -33,0 Número de ■'s 8 9 10 11 -30,0 -27,0 -24,0 -21,0 12 13 14 15 -21,0 -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 dB –– –– –– –– -18,0 -15,0 -12,0 -9,0 -9,0 -6,0 -3,0 0,0 –– –– –– –– -6,0 -3,0 0,0 (Clip) Métodos de reproducción English Reproducción normal 1 Deutsch La unidad R-1 no dispone de altavoces internos. Para oír la reproducción, es preciso que conecte un par de auriculares o altavoces. Puede utilizar el jack de auriculares de la unidad R-1 como una salida digital (salida digital) para conectar la unidad a un dispositivo de audio digital, o como una salida de línea, para conectarla a un dispositivo de audio analógico. Antes de continuar, realice las conexiones con el tipo de cable adecuado para el dispositivo. Consulte “Connecting headphones” (pág. 22), “Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)” (pág. 23) o “Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)” (pág. 24). Cuando la pantalla muestre el mensaje indicado en la ilustración, gire el mando VALUE (VALOR) para seleccionar una canción (archivo). Pulse el botón PREV (ANT) para desplazarse a la canción anterior (archivo), o el botón NEXT (SIG) para desplazarse a la canción siguiente (archivo). Gire lentamente el control del volumen de salida hacia la derecha para ajustar el volumen y establecerlo en un nivel de audición agradable. * El nombre de la canción que aparece en la pantalla es el nombre del archivo. No corresponde a la etiqueta ID3 contenida en el archivo MP3. Italiano 3 Pulse el botón PLAY (REPRODUCIR) ( ); a continuación, se inicia la reproducción de la canción (archivo) indicada en la pantalla. * Los nombres de las canciones se muestran en orden alfabético, según la siguiente lista de caracteres; no se muestran en el orden en que fueron grabadas. (espacio) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz * Si la tarjeta CompactFlash contiene subdirectorios (carpetas), todos los archivos guardados en el nivel raíz se mostrarán en primer lugar, seguidos de los archivos guardados en los subdirectorios (carpetas). Español 2 Français * Si la pantalla indica No Song (Ninguna canción), esto significa que la tarjeta CompactFlash no contiene ningún archivo que la unidad R-1 pueda reproducir. * La unidad ignora los nombres de archivo que empiezan con un punto (“.”) y no los incluye en la lista. * La unidad ignora los archivos que tienen una extensión diferente a .mp3 o .wav y no los incluye en la lista. Si desea obtener más información acerca de los archivos que la unidad R-1 puede grabar y reproducir, consulte “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (pág. 28). 145 Métodos de reproducción REPETICIÓN A-B (repetición de la reproducción) Esta función permite al usuario especificar un fragmento de la canción durante la reproducción de ésta a fin de reproducirlo repetidamente. Procedimiento 1 Durante la reproducción, pulse el botón REPEAT (REPETIR) ( ) una vez. Ese punto se determinará como el principio de la repetición (punto A). 2 Song A Pulse de nuevo el botón REPEAT (REPETIR). Ese punto se determinará como el final de la repetición (punto B). fig.repeat-a A B A B Song El fragmento especificado en los pasos 1 y 2 (es decir, el fragmento entre los puntos A y B) se reproducirá repetidamente. Para cancelar la repetición de la reproducción, pulse de nuevo el botón REPEAT (REPETIR). Song Notas * Si después de especificar el punto A pulsa el botón STOP (DETENER) antes de especificar el punto B, se cancelará la definición del punto A. * Si una vez especificado el punto A continúa la reproducción hasta el final de la canción, se repetirá la reproducción del fragmento comprendido entre el punto A y el final de la canción. * Si pulsa el botón STOP (DETENER) durante la repetición de la reproducción, la reproducción se detendrá y la definición del fragmento que debe repetirse (A-B) se cancelará. Para cancelar esta función • • • 146 Si una vez especificados los puntos A y B pulsa el botón REPEAT (REPETIR) ( ), se cancelará la definición de los puntos A y B. Si después de especificar el punto A pulsa el botón STOP (DETENER) antes de especificar el punto B, se cancelará la definición del punto A. Si además de cancelar la definición de la repetición desea detener la reproducción, pulse el botón STOP (DETENER). La reproducción se detendrá y la definición de la repetición de la reproducción (puntos A y B) también se cancelará. Métodos de reproducción REPRODUCCIÓN 1/2 (reproducción a la mitad de velocidad) English A continuación se describe cómo reproducir a la mitad de la velocidad normal. Procedimiento 1 Mientras la unidad esté detenida o durante la reproducción, pulse el botón SPEED (VELOCIDAD). Deutsch La línea inferior de la pantalla indicará 1/2, y el sonido se reproducirá a la mitad de la velocidad normal. Si la unidad R-1 está reproduciendo en ese momento, la reproducción se ralentizará. Si la unidad R-1 está detenida en ese momento, la reproducción a la mitad de la velocidad normal se iniciará cuando pulse el botón PLAY (REPRODUCIR). Français * Esta función ajusta el tono de la reproducción a la mitad de velocidad de manera que el sonido conserva el tono de la reproducción normal. Esto puede producir un efecto de ondulación en la reproducción que en ningún caso puede considerarse un problema de funcionamiento. Para cancelar esta función Si la función de reproducción a la mitad de velocidad está activa, pulse el botón SPEED para cancelarla. Español Italiano Si no cancela la función de reproducción a la mitad de velocidad, la siguiente canción también se reproducirá a la mitad de velocidad. 147 Métodos de reproducción PLAY MODE (Modo de reproducción) En este modo puede especificar el orden y el método de reproducción. 1 Pulse el botón MENU (MENÚ). Si lo desea, puede cambiar el modo de reproducción durante la reproducción con la unidad R-1. En primer lugar pulse el botón STOP (DETENER) para detener la reproducción. 2 3 4 A continuación, utilice el mando VALUE (VALOR) para seleccionar 05 Play Mode (05 Modo de reproducción). Pulse el botón ENTER (INTRO). Utilice el mando VALUE(VALOR) para seleccionar el modo de reproducción que desee. Sequential (Secuencial) Single (Único) Shuffle (Aleatorio) Las canciones se reproducirán en el orden: 001, 002, 003... 009 * Utilice los botones PREV (ANT) y NEXT (SIG) o el mando VALUE (VALOR) para seleccionar un archivo (canción). La unidad repetirá la reproducción del archivo (canción) seleccionado únicamente. El orden de reproducción de las canciones varía de forma automática. * Las canciones reproducidas una vez no volverán a reproducirse. * Si utiliza los botones PREV (ANT) y NEXT (SIG) o el mando VALUE (VALOR) para seleccionar un archivo (canción), los nombres de los archivos (canciones) aparecerán en el mismo orden que si se selecciona el modo de reproducción Sequential (Secuencial). fig.sequential.eps 5 6 Una vez que haya seleccionado el modo de reproducción que desee, pulse el botón ENTER (INTRO). Pulse el botón MENU (MENÚ). Volverá al modo de reproducción. 148 Utilización de los efectos English Aplicación de un efecto En esta sección se describe cómo aplicar un efecto durante la reproducción o mientras la unidad se encuentra en el modo de grabación interrumpida. Si lo desea, también puede definir parámetros del efecto antes de iniciar la reproducción o probar diferentes parámetros del efecto a medida que realiza grabaciones de prueba. fig.effect.eps Durante la reproducción en modo de grabación interrumpida 3 1 2 Modo de edición EDITAR SALIR Seleccione un efecto 01:Easy EQ (01:EQ fácil) -> 02:For Speech... (02:Discurso...) SALIR INTRO Français Deutsch Modo de efecto ACTIVADO Seleccione un parámetro Tipo -> Nivel1 Italiano EDITAR SALIR INTRO Español Edite el parámetro Pop -> Dance -> HipHop... SALIR Salga del modo de edición del efecto Inicie la reproducción o grabación La unidad memoriza los parámetros del efecto que defina hasta que los modifique. 149 Algunos parámetros Configuración del sistema (modo Setup (Configuración)) Si desea obtener información detallada acerca de cómo definir los parámetros, consulte “Procedures” (pág. 56). * Durante la reproducción, la grabación y mientras la unidad se encuentra en el modo de grabación interrumpida, puede activar el modo Setup (Configuración) pulsando el botón MENU (MENÚ). Menú/efecto Valor (predeterminado en negrita) Procedimi ento 01 LCD Contrast (Contraste de LCD) Ajusta el contraste de la pantalla. 1–5–10 A (pág. 56) 02 LCD Backlight (Luz de fondo de LCD) Especifica el tiempo que tiene que transcurrir antes de que la luz de fondo de la pantalla se apague (cuando la unidad funciona con pilas). OFF (DESACTIVADO), ON (ACTIVADO), 5sec (5 seg.), 10sec (10 seg), 20sec (20 seg) A (pág. 56) 03 Delete File (Eliminar archivo) Elimina un archivo. –– B (pág. 58) 04 Rename File (Cambiar nombre al archivo) Cambia el nombre de un archivo. –– C (pág. 60) 05 Play Mode (Modo de reproducción) Especifica el orden en el que se reproducirán las canciones. Sequential (Secuencial), Single (Único), Shuffle (Aleatorio) A (pág. 56) OFF (DESCATIVADO), ON (ACTIVADO) A (pág. 56) MP3 64kbps, MP3 96kbps, MP3 128kbps, MP3 160kbps, MP3 192kbps, MP3 256kbps, MP3 320kbps, WAV 16bit, WAV 24bit A (pág. 56) Limiter (Limitador) Activa y desactiva el limitador del nivel de entrada. * El limitador reduce el nivel de entrada de manera apropiada cuando éste es excesivo. Nivel de corte Nivel umbral Nivel de AD 06 Reducir el ruido de corte y pasar el convertidor de AD Nivel de señal de entrada El valor umbral es -9 dBFS. 07 150 Record Mode (Modo de grabación) Especifica el tipo de archivo creado durante la grabación. Determinará la calidad de audio del archivo grabado. 11 12 A (pág. 56) OFF (DESCATIVADO), ON (ACTIVADO) A (pág. 56) STEREO (ESTÉREO), MONO A (pág. 56) OFF (DESCATIVADO), 1min, 2min, 3min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 45min, 60min A (pág. 56) – D (pág. 62) 13 Firmware Ver1.00 (Firmware ver 1.00) Permite comprobar la versión del programa de la unidad R-1. – E (pág. 64) 14 About the R-1 (Acerca de la unidad R-1) Muestra información relativa a la unidad R-1. – A (pág. 56) Deutsch 10 OFF (DESCATIVADO), ON (ACTIVADO) Français 09 Procedimi ento Italiano 08 Track Splitting (Separación de pistas) Activa y desactiva la función de separación de pistas. * Esta función divide de forma automática el archivo siempre que haya un intervalo de tres o más segundos de silencio durante la grabación. Input Monitor (Control de entrada) Active esta función si desea controlar la señal de entrada mediante auriculares. Desactívela si no desea controlar la señal. * Durante la grabación, el sonido se oirá tanto si esta función está activada como si está desactivada. Input Select (Selección de entrada) Defina esta función en STEREO (ESTÉREO) si ha conectado un micrófono estéreo. Defina esta función en MONO si ha conectado un micrófono monoaural. Si utiliza el parámetro STEREO (ESTÉREO) con una señal monoaural, sólo se grabará el canal izquierdo (L). Si se define en MONO, el sonido se grabará en ambos canales, izquierdo y derecho (L y R). * El archivo grabado será estéreo incluso si el parámetro se define en MONO. Sleep Timer (Temporizador de suspensión) Especifica el tiempo que tiene que transcurrir para que la unidad R-1 entre en el modo Sleep (Suspensión) (cuando la unidad funciona con pilas). * Este parámetro no tiene efecto si utiliza el adaptador de CA. Format Card (Formatear tarjeta) Formatea una tarjeta CompactFlash. Valor (predeterminado en negrita) Español Menú/efecto English Algunos parámetros 151 Main specifications Recorder Part ● Tracks 2 (stereo) ● Signal Processing AD/DA conversion: 24 bits, 96 kHz ● Data Type <For recording> * Stereo only Format Sampling Rate MPEG 1, Audio Layer 3 (MP3) 44.1 kHz Bit Rates 64/96/128/160/192/256/320 kbps Format WAV Sampling Rate 44.1 kHz Bit Depth 16/24 bits <For playback> * All sampling frequencies are converted to 44.1 kHz for playback Format Sampling Rates MPEG 1, Audio Layer 3 (MP3) 8/11.025/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz Bit Rates 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/144/160/192/224/256/ 320 kbps or VBR (Variable Bit Rate) Format WAV Sampling Rates 8/11.025/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz Bit Depth 8/16/24 bits ● Memory Card CompactFlash (supports 32 MB–2 GB) Recordable times File type WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps 64 MB 3 5 26 MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps 32 43 52 65 86 130 256 MB 15 23 102 128 170 205 256 341 512 Units: minutes 512 MB 31 47 208 260 346 416 520 693 1,040 2 GB 125 188 831 1,039 1,386 1,663 2,079 2,772 4,158 * These recording times are approximate. Your actual results may vary somewhat. * Use a CompactFlash card that has been formatted on the R-1. * If more than one recorded file exists, the total recordable time will be less than this. 152 Main specifications Input and Output Effects ● Audio Inputs ● Effect Types Internal mic (stereo) Mic input jack (stereo miniature phone type, plug-in power supported) Line input jack (stereo miniature phone type) * The mic input jack and line input jack cannot be used simultaneously (line input takes priority) ● Audio Outputs Headphone jack (stereo miniature phone type) Digital output jack (optical miniature phone type) Line output jack (stereo miniature phone type) * Headphones, digital output, and line output share the same jack ● Nominal Input Level (adjustable) -10 dBu (input level set to maximum) ● Input Impedance Mic input:6.8 k ohms Line input:100 k ohms ● Maximum Output Level (adjustable) 9 dBu (output volume set to maximum) ● Recommended Load Impedance 32 ohms ● Frequency Response 20 Hz–20 kHz 01: Easy EQ 02: For Speech 03: Voice Perform 04: Editable EQ 05: Noise Reducer 06: Hum Noise Cut 07: Reverb 08: Int-Mic Rec 09: Ext-Mic Rec 10: Mastering 11: Center Cancel 12: Tuner 13: Metronome Others ● Display 20 characters, 2 lines (backlit LCD) ● Dimensions 99.3 (W) x 134 (D) x 30.2 (H) mm ● Weight 260 g * With batteries and CompactFlash card ● Power Supply AC Adaptor, Alkaline dry battery LR6 (AA) type x 2, or Nickel Hydrogen battery (HR15/51) x 2 ● Accessories Owner’s manual AC adaptor (PSB-6U) CompactFlash (64 M bytes) USB cable (Mini-B type) Carrying case ● USB Interface Mini-B type connector * USB 1.1/2.0 mass storage device class compatible * In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice. 153 Index A AC adaptor ................................................................. 8, 19 AC adaptor jack .............................................................. 16 HOLD .............................................................................. 34 HOLD switch ......................................... 16, 31, 34, 37, 66 Hum Noise Cut ........................................................ 47, 50 I B batteries ..................................................................... 20–21 Battery compartment ..................................................... 17 battery compartment cover .......................................... 20 Battery life ....................................................................... 21 bit depth .......................................................................... 28 Bit Rate ............................................................................. 28 Bit rate ........................................................................ 28, 44 C Carrying case .................................................................... 8 Center Cancel ........................................................... 48, 51 Clipping ........................................................................... 46 CND ................................................................................. 15 CompactFlash ................................................................. 25 CompactFlash card .............................................. 8, 27, 44 CompactFlash cards ...................................................... 29 Completed ....................................................................... 27 D Delete File ........................................................................ 54 digital output jack .................................................... 16, 23 Display ............................................................................. 12 DISPLAY button .......................................... 13, 30, 33, 36 DYN ................................................................................. 15 dynamic microphone .................................................... 32 Input Monitor ................................................................ 54 Input Select ..................................................................... 55 Input volume .................................................................. 15 input volume ............................................................ 29, 35 input volume control ........................................ 31, 34, 37 Inserting .......................................................................... 26 internal ............................................................................ 29 Internal mic .................................................................... 12 internal mic ..................................................................... 67 internal microphone ...................................................... 29 Int-Mic Rec. .............................................................. 47, 50 L LCD Backlight ................................................................ 54 LCD backlight ................................................................ 20 LCD Contrast ................................................................. 54 Limiter ............................................................................. 54 Line input jack ............................................................... 15 line input jack ........................................................... 35–36 line output jack ........................................................ 16, 24 M Easy EQ ..................................................................... 47, 49 EDIT button .............................................................. 12, 53 Editable EQ ............................................................... 47, 49 EFFECT button ......................................................... 12, 53 Eject button ..................................................................... 16 eject button ...................................................................... 26 ENTER button ...................... 14, 43, 53, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65 EXIT button ....................................... 14, 53, 57, 59, 61, 63 external mic ..................................................................... 67 Ext-Mic Rec. .............................................................. 47, 50 Mastering .................................................................. 48, 50 memory ........................................................................... 26 memory card .................................................................. 25 Memory card slot .......................................................... 16 memory card slot ........................................................... 27 Memory card slot cover ................................................ 17 memory card slot cover ................................................ 26 MENU button .................................. 13, 43, 57, 59, 61, 63 Metronome ............................................................... 48, 51 Mic input jack ................................................................. 15 mic input jack ........................................................... 32–33 Mic type select switch ................................................... 15 mic type select switch ................................................... 32 miniature plug-in powered condenser microphones 32 MP3 .................................................................................. 28 F N factory settings ............................................................... 65 Firmware ......................................................................... 55 For Speech ................................................................. 47, 49 format .............................................................................. 27 Format Card .............................................................. 27, 55 NEXT button ................................................ 13, 38–39, 61 No Card .................................................................... 44, 68 NO NAME ................................................................ 44–45 No Song .................................................................... 38, 59 Noise Reducer .......................................................... 47, 49 H O E hardware devices ........................................................... Headphone jack .............................................................. headphone jack ............................................................... headphones ..................................................................... 154 45 16 22 22 Output volume .............................................................. 16 output volume ............................................................... 38 Owner’s manual .............................................................. 8 Index P PAUSE button .............................................. 14, 31, 34, 37 PLAY button ............................... 14, 31, 34, 37–38, 42, 61 Play Mode ....................................................................... 54 Playback .......................................................................... 28 Power switch .................................................................. 16 power switch .................................................................. 19 PREV button ................................................. 13, 38–39, 61 R REC button .................................. 14, 30–31, 33–34, 36–37 Record Mode .................................................................. 54 Record Standby .............................................................. 31 Recording ........................................................................ 28 recording-standby .......................................................... 30 Recording-standby mode ............................................. 66 recording-standby mode ............................................... 67 remain .............................................................................. 66 Removing ........................................................................ 26 Rename File .................................................................... 54 REPEAT button ........................................................ 13, 40 Reverb ........................................................................ 47, 50 S Safely Remove Hardware ............................................. 45 Sampling frequency ................................................. 28, 44 Sequential ........................................................................ 43 Shuffle .............................................................................. 43 Single ............................................................................... 43 Sleep Timer ..................................................................... 55 SPEED .............................................................................. 42 SPEED button ........................................................... 13, 42 stereo ................................................................................ 28 STOP ................................................................................ 37 STOP button ............................... 14, 31, 34, 37, 41, 43, 61 Stop Hardware Device .................................................. 45 T Track Splitting ................................................................ 54 Tuner .......................................................................... 48, 51 U USB 2.0 ............................................................................. 15 USB cable ..................................................................... 8, 44 USB connector ................................................................ 15 USB Mass Storage Device ............................................. 45 V VALUE dial ................................. 14, 43, 53, 57, 59, 61, 63 VBR .................................................................................. 28 Voice Perform ........................................................... 47, 49 W WAV ................................................................................ 28 155 For the U.K. AINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE. AL ns lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying ollows: be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. ust be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug. For EU Countries s with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC. For the USA COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION QUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT ound to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the ed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential , uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee articular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or mined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the wing measures: g antenna. n the equipment and receiver. outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. nced radio/TV technician for help. e FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: interference, and rence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. o this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment. ace cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit. For Canada NOTICE all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. AVIS respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. For the USA CLARATION OF CONFORMITY pliance Information Statement el Name : uipment : ble Party : Address : lephone : R-1 WAVE/MP3 RECORDER Roland Corporation U.S. 5100 S. Eastern Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938 (323) 890 3700